Chang Pile · User Manuals
📒 Web App User Manual · Volume 6

BOQ Studio — Quantity Take-off and Construction Cost Estimating

Buildings · Roads · Bridges · Irrigation · Measure from PDF drawings and site photos · Factor F · PR. forms 2569
Used with page: boq-studio.html
Intended for: quantity surveyors (QS), project engineers, contractors and bidders on government projects
Reading time: about 25 minutes · Taking off your first project: about 1 hour
Last updated: 1 November 2569 · Easier-to-scroll take-off tables (frozen header, first column and row-end buttons · jump-to-edge scroll buttons) · Large billboard template on a single round pole · Irrigation works: canal cross-section, plan and longitudinal profile · 22 canal types (lined · flume · on-farm ditch · pipe system) + 20 standard designs (RID · USBR · FAO) · 16 types of irrigation structures with plan, section and front elevation · 15 bridge superstructure types (DOH · DRR · AASHTO · PCI · FHWA) + section, plan and elevation · 37 bridge component forms · 1–4 cell / precast box culverts · Roadway cross-section, plan and longitudinal profile · 22 standard roadway designs (DOH · DRR · local government · AASHTO · maintenance works) + 20 pavement surface types · Symmetric steel connections + 4 welded connection types · Footing plan/section/elevation + 12 pile types under the footing, with user-entered pile count, automatic/custom pile layout, and sending to the pile row · Element forms (beam, column, slab, wall, stair, footing) · Rebar fields complete per the actual take-off + field numbers ①②③ matching the drawing · 20 rebar details per handbook volumes 1–6 · Concrete pavement joints · Lined canal / U-flume · Rebar per the DPT 1103-64 handbook · 10 precast connection types · 11 steel connection forms (Tekla style) · Bolts and fasteners · Send from the measuring card to every table and every element type · PDF drawings stored on the device · AutoCAD-style distance entry · Automatic cloud save · Row sorting / column resizing
Anyone can view, calculate, print and export files Editing quantities and prices and managing projects requires VIP or staff Keeps working without an internet connection
Open BOQ Studio

Take off your first project in 7 steps

Follow this order, because the downstream prices are calculated back from the quantities you enter in the early steps
  1. Choose the pricing modeUse the Government or Private button on the header bar — Government mode applies Factor F per W 481, while Private mode applies a Mark-up
  2. Set up the projectIn the Project settings menu, enter the job name, province, work type, date and accuracy class
  3. Take off quantitiesEnter elements in the Building Roadway Bridge or Irrigation menu according to the type of work — or attach drawings in the Drawings menu, calibrate the scale, then measure/count on the drawing and send the results into the tables straight from the card (Section 8)
  4. Check the price databaseIn the Price database menu — edit unit prices to match what you can actually buy in your area
  5. Check Factor FIn the Factor F menu — confirm the system picked the right table row for the contract value and contract conditions
  6. Read the price summaryIn the Summary — PR. forms menu, check the grand total and the price per square meter
  7. Export the deliverablesClick Excel — PR. forms or PDF — PR. forms
🆕 What's new (27–30 Oct 2569) — click a topic name to read how to use it
  • 4 Nov Pile dowel weight in the BOQ — “Pile dowel” bar slot on pile caps · hollow/pipe piles get 4 inserted bars automatically · bored piles are not double counted against the pile price (enter your own count)
  • 4 Nov Custom pile coordinate editor — pile table · grid lines (n@spacing) · paste from Excel/CAD · footing center/corner origin · m/mm · mirror · center · per-pile check with red rings on the plan
  • 4 Nov Pedestal on the footing, entered from the real drawing — width × length · height · column above · offset · defaults balanced with the footing · ✓/⚠ checks · pedestal drawn to real size · can be sent to a pedestal row in the column table
  • 4 Nov Pile dowel length into the cap per standard · user-defined — fixes dowels in the pile cap section drawn at a fixed length that stuck out above the cap · length follows ld / the pile head spec, thin caps hook under the top mesh · pick your own dowel size and length
  • 4 Nov Attached PDFs / photos belong to each project — fixes drawings from the previous project showing up in another project that never attached them · removing a drawing from one project no longer deletes the file another project uses · a photo whose name clashes with another project's is renamed instead of overwriting it
  • 4 Nov RC element form chips in the count card — 14 chips (tension piles · batter piles · pile caps · mat foundations · round columns · pedestals · sawtooth stairs, etc.) set the row type and form together · Form field in the card · 106 chips in total
  • 4 Nov Data links between all programs checked — BOQ Studio and the Road & Bridge suite follow the language chosen on the site (choosing it in the program changes the whole site) · quotation numbers sent to ERP follow ERP's own rule (no clashes with other accounts) · the member portal shows every project status (new · on hold · cancelled)
  • 4 Nov Steel framing tables now have their own tabs — House roof framing follows the Precast structure tab · Steel trusses → Pre-engineered buildings (PEB) → Cellular beams follow the Connections & fixings tab · the Structural steel tab now holds just the structural steel table (existing rows are kept)
  • 4 Nov English edition of every manual — TH / EN switch in the manual header · with English selected, opening a manual takes you to the English edition · BOQ Studio translates about 750 more menus, table labels and field hints
  • 3 Nov Work-type chips in the count card now cover every table — 90-plus chips in 10 groups shown as tabs (RC · precast · steel · timber/stainless/aluminium · electrical · sanitary · doors/roofing · bridges · irrigation · external/BOQ codes)
  • 3 Nov Piles in 5 usage forms — compression piles under footings · tension piles · batter piles · slab-support piles · contiguous pile retaining walls (elevation/pile head/details change with the form)
  • 3 Nov Elevator and stair core walls in 5 forms — single elevator shaft · C-shaped core · twin elevators · stair core · elevator + stair · the core plan no longer swells with the wall thickness
  • 3 Nov Bearing walls in 4 forms — general · with openings · tunnel-form system · on a strip footing
  • 3 Nov Shear walls in 6 forms (boundary elements · plain · end columns · flanged · coupled walls + coupling beam · with openings) · Changing the type of a row whose dimensions have not been edited → the new type's default dimensions (e.g., a new beam row changed to a wall will not end up as a wall 4 m thick)
  • 3 Nov Wall drawings change with the form — general · retaining · basement · water tank · parapet · shear · elevator core · bearing
  • 3 Nov Pile-supported footings: symbols and pile heads by 12 pile types · changing the pile type resets the size to that type's default
  • 3 Nov Footing drawings change with the form — spread footing · on piles · strip footing (wall along its length) · combined footing · mat foundation (column grid + top and bottom mats)
  • 3 Nov Column drawings change with the form — tied · spiral · circular hoops · pedestal · tie column; each form has its own section, elevation and details
  • 3 Nov Beam drawings change with the form — continuous · simple span · cantilever · grade beam · post-tensioned · lintel; each form has its own plan, elevation and section
  • 3 Nov Stair drawings change with the form — flat soffit · sawtooth (soffit stepped with the treads + step corner detail) · steps cantilevered from a wall (solid-step elevation + section embedded in the wall)
  • 3 Nov Slab drawings change with the selected slab system — Double-Tee · Hollow Core · flat/solid plank · Metal Deck · Waffle · Ribbed · Bubble · flat plate · drop panels · prestressed · cantilever · slab on grade; each has its own plan, section and details
  • 3 Nov Timber, aluminium and stainless cutting plans from every row in the work tab, with a Preview & print cut sheet button and a Preview & print A4/A3 button on the timber, aluminium and stainless table pages, just like the steel tables
  • 3 Nov New menu Stainless tables — pipes, shafts, flat bars, angles, sheets, grades, finishes and railing glass, with weight by grade; send to the stainless works tab as a Single pieces row or a Stainless sheet row instantly
  • 3 Nov New menu Aluminium tables — sections, grades, finishes, sheets and glass; select and send to the aluminium works tab as a Single pieces row or an Aluminium sheet row instantly
  • 3 Nov New menu Timber tables — timber sizes, species, allowable stresses and plywood/OSB sheets to Thai standards; select and send to the timber works tab as a Single timber pieces row instantly
  • Drawings page — when you finish measuring/counting, send to the take-off tables straight from the card for every table (all RC element types · doors and windows · electrical points · sanitary fixtures · air conditioners · fasteners · stair finishes · bridges · irrigation) · work-type chips in the count card (adds Stairs) · floor/zone field · 30 Oct adds counting of precast stairs/beams · length measurement of shear walls/bearing walls/elevator cores · area measurement of precast slabs and walls
  • AutoCAD-style distance entry · F8 ortho lock · hold down the mouse wheel to pan · full screen
  • PDF drawings stored on the device: reopen the program and the file and the page you were working on come back automatically · the eraser asks before deleting · deleting a measurement line also deletes the quantity it sent · recovering lost quantities
  • Every footing form: plan · sections A-A/B-B · elevation — pile-supported footings let you choose from 12 pile types, number per footing, size, length and spacing · totals are checked against the pile row
  • 31 element forms — simple span/continuous/cantilever beams · round columns with spiral ties · one-way/two-way/flat slab/post-tension/cantilever slab/slab on grade · retaining/basement/tank walls · sawtooth/cantilevered-step stairs · pile cap/strip/combined/mat footings (choose in the Form column — the rebar to match the drawing, the cover and the drawing change accordingly)
  • 20 rebar details per handbook volumes 1–6 — cantilever beams · transfer beams · flat plates · post-tension · prestressed beam anchorages · corbels · openings · corner joints · coupled twin beams · pedestals with anchor bolts · pile caps · bored piles · tank walls/waterstop joints · diaphragm walls · bridge decks · bridge piers · box culverts (choose in the Connection / Detail column) · concrete pavement joints (dowel bars/tie bars) · canal lining and U-flume rebar (shown automatically)
  • Rebar elevations and sections per the DPT 1103-64 handbook / ACI 318-19 — cover, hooks, lap lengths and splice locations, with ✓/⚠ check results under the drawing of every RC element · the rebar-per-drawing panel has supporting data (grade · cover · bar length · wall layer), new fields (separate top/bottom beam bars · end/middle stirrups · cross-ties · column dowels · top bars in slabs/stairs), entry guidance and ✓/⚠ on every field · bar lengths calculated per the handbook
  • 10 precast element connections in Tekla style — column-beam · wall · column base/column splice, with elevations, sections and approximate grout · the length-measuring card can send precast beams/walls
  • Choose the connection type → connection form (two steps) — types by connection category (shear · moment · bracing · splice · stiffener), colored the same as their forms, showing only the forms of that category · Fixing forms for hanging works 6 · panel fixing 6 · general fixing 11 forms
  • 25 steel connection forms (2 column bases + 23 connections) in Tekla Structures style — column bases · beam-to-column · beam-to-beam · bracing · welded connections · 4 stiffener types · Shear connections · Moment connections, with elevations, sections and the connection category of each form (selectable in both the table and the count card on the drawings)
  • Connection tab and fasteners (elevations and sections for every type) and the bolt/fastener price database of 444 items (approximate prices)
  • Sorting take-off table rows · dragging to widen columns in both the take-off tables and the price group tables · dragging to resize windows
  • Automatic cloud save · change a level code and it changes everywhere · the import buttons have moved to the projects/project settings pages — the header bar has Export JSON instead

1What the program does

BOQ Studio covers the whole job from reading the construction drawings to price documents you can actually submit, with every number flowing through a single chain — edit a quantity at the source and the downstream prices move immediately, with no re-keying

Quantity take-off → BOQ by system → Factor F → Median price PR.4

ATake-off for 4 work groups

Buildings (structural, architectural, electrical, sanitary, air conditioning, fire protection, built-in interior works) · Roadways · Bridges and box culverts · Irrigation

BMeasure directly from drawings

Attach a PDF drawing or photograph the site with a phone/iPad, then measure length, area or volume, or count items, and send the results into the take-off table of any work straight from the card while measuring (or into the BOQ by code · structural steel · the bar-cut plan), and show the client a rough price right away

CPrices to government standards

Price database of 1,616 items (416 legacy codes + 756 new codes following the work-group structure + 444 bolts and fasteners) · 3-level BOQ work groups covering buildings, roads, bridges and irrigation · composite material unit cost tables for 11 work groups · steel section table of 516 sections · Factor F per circular W 481 · material prices from provincial commerce office announcements can be pulled in for comparison

DDocuments ready to submit

Forms PR.1 · PR.1 (A) · PR.2 · PR.2 (A) · PR.3 · PR.4 under the 2569 criteria as Excel and PDF, with letterhead, signature blocks for the reference (median) price committee, and amounts written in words

💡 No need to start from scratch The program comes with sample projects already fully taken off for 5 work types + a 2-storey house comparison pair, conventional ↔ precast (see Comparing construction systems), including the bar-cut plan and structural steel of each job, with step-by-step guidance on screen (see Cutting plan example). Open them first to learn the data structure. When you are ready for real work, choose the Start from a blank sheet template on the All projects page — it starts at 0 THB and 0 items; see Starting a new project

2Permissions and data storage

This page follows the same rules as CPM Planner · ERP Studio and Roads & Bridges: anyone can view it, but editing data is reserved for approved members

User statusCan doCannot do
Not signed inView every page, calculate, preview, print and export every file typeEdit quantities, prices and settings, or manage projects
General customer (signed in)Same as aboveSame as above
Lifetime VIP memberFull use + storing projects in the cloud—
Staff / administratorFull use—
⚠ Your account must be in approved status If you have applied for VIP but not yet paid, or you are a staff member still awaiting approval, the system still treats you as view-only · users without permission see a gold bar at the top of the content, and if they try to edit anything a message appears instead of the value changing

Where is the data stored?

  • Site photos stay on the device that took them — photos are reduced in size and stored in that device's browser, not uploaded to the cloud · the project keeps the photo names, markups, measurement list and prices, so opening it from another device shows the numbers but not the photos; see Section 8
  • PDF drawings stay on the device they were attached on — reopen the program on the same device and the drawing file comes back automatically, opening the file you were working on (page · zoom · original position) · they are not uploaded to the cloud, so on another device you must attach the original file again; see Section 8
  • Automatic cloud save — for a project that has been saved to the cloud before, once you edit and stop typing for 20 seconds the system uploads it for you; see Section 16
  • Always saved locally first — every time you click Save, the program writes to the browser first and then uploads to the cloud, so your work is not lost if the connection drops
  • Uploaded to the cloud when signed in — continue from another device, and the system keeps the last 30 revisions of each project
  • The status chip on the header bar always shows the current state — Saved locally · Not signed in · Syncing · Synced · Pending upload · Sync failed
⚠ If the chip says "Sync failed" Your work is not lost — the system has kept it on the device and queued it for re-upload. Click the chip to see the cause; the system explains it in terms you can act on, e.g., an administrator must first install the database tables, or your session has expired and you need to sign in again

Confirmation pop-ups before deleting or overwriting

Every button that causes data to be lost or replaced always shows an “Are you sure you want to…” pop-up first. The pop-up shows the item name, number and the quantity that will actually be lost — read it before you click. If you click by mistake, click Back on the header bar (see Undo and redo)

What you seeMeaning
Red button + trash iconDeletes or clears data
Blue button + swap-arrows iconOverwrites, imports or restores — the existing data is replaced with a new set
Orange box in the pop-upThings to know before clicking, e.g., the item is linked to other data, or a backup has been kept for restoring
“Cancel” button · press Esc · click outside the boxCloses the pop-up without changing anything
The message “If you clicked by mistake, press the Back button on the header bar (Ctrl+Z)”The deletion or clearing can be reverted with the Back button — deleting rows, clearing a calculation sheet, clearing manually entered prices, deleting items in Form PR.2 (A) / PR.3 / 4.5, deleting installments, restoring the standard work groups, deleting structural steel, importing AI results in replace mode
The message “…cannot be restored”Permanent deletion that the Back button cannot revert — deleting a project from the list · deleting items in the AI results waiting to import box · deleting site photos
💡 Clicked by mistake? Undo first, and use the backup only if that fails The fastest way is to click Back on the header bar immediately (see Undo and redo) · if you have already refreshed or opened another project: before clearing, resetting, importing or restoring a whole project, the system automatically backs up the previous version on the device — go to Project settings → Restore BOQ from local backup · accounts without edit permission get a permission message instead of the pop-up

Buttons that ask first:

  • Whole project — delete the project · reset to sample data · clear all quantities · start a new project · create from a template · import JSON · restore from backup · open another project while work is unsaved
  • Prices — reset all default prices · import prices from CSV (shows how many codes will be overwritten) · clear manually entered prices on the composite materials / unit cost pages · restore a code's original price · clear the values in a calculation sheet
  • Tables and work groups — delete rows in any table · delete a work group · delete manually added quantities in the work-group assignment panel · restore the standard work groups · delete installments · rows in the PR. forms
  • Drawings — clear the markups on this page · cancel sending quantities to the BOQ
  • Bar-cut plan — delete rows · clear the schedule · load the sample over the existing schedule · delete offcuts
  • Sharing and ERP — disable the share link (links already sent stop working) · send to ERP with “Create work phases” (the existing phases in ERP are deleted and progress restarts at 0)

Undo and redo

The Back (undo) and ↷ (redo) buttons are on the header bar next to the Update prices button — if you deleted a row or entered a wrong value, click Back and the original data returns in every field without retyping, and quantities and prices are recalculated immediately

HowResult
Back · Ctrl + Z (Mac: Cmd + Z)Steps the latest edit back by one step · a message shows what came back, e.g. Undone · Reinforced concrete elements +1 row · 3 more steps available
↷ · Ctrl + Y or Ctrl + Shift + ZRedoes the step you just undid · no longer available once you make a new edit after undoing
Hover the mouse over the buttonShows how many more steps can be undone · the button is faded gray when there is nothing to undo
Not signed in / view-only accountClicking shows You must sign in with a VIP or staff account to edit — accounts that cannot edit have nothing to undo

Example — deleting the wrong row and getting it back (sample project: 2-storey office building, median price 97,952,725 THB)

  1. Delete the row

    Menu Building → tab RC structure → click × at the end of row F1 pile footing → the pop-up says If you clicked by mistake, press the Back button on the header bar (Ctrl+Z) → click Delete row

  2. Watch the price change

    The Update prices button shows Price −155,949 (green background) and the median price drops to 97,796,776 THB · the Back button changes from gray to clickable

  3. Click Back

    Row F1 returns to its original place with every field intact (quantity 15 · 1.5 × 1.5 × 0.5 m · excavation depth 1.5 m · concrete fc′ 240 ksc), the median price returns to 97,952,725 THB, and the message Undone · Reinforced concrete elements +1 row · 0 more steps available appears

  4. Change your mind again

    Click ↷ or Ctrl + Y and the row is deleted again · click Back to get it back

  • What can be undone — every edit in the open project: deleting, adding, copying or moving rows, editing table values, clearing quantities, resetting default prices, importing CSV / JSON / AI results, restoring from backup, editing prices, the bar-cut plan, work groups (WBS) and assigning items to groups, installments, PR. forms · up to 50 steps
  • Continuous typing in one field (less than 1 second apart) counts as a single step — one undo brings back the value from before you typed · typing and then changing back to the original value (e.g., 15 → 1 → 15) does not count as a step, so there is never an undo step that changes nothing
  • While you are typing in a field, Ctrl + Z undoes characters in that field as usual — the field value and prices change immediately, just as if you had typed them · click outside the field first if you want to undo a whole step, or click the Back button (e.g., change the quantity from 15 to 18, click outside the field, and a single Ctrl + Z brings 15 back)
⚠ What the Back button does not cover Markups and measurements on PDF drawings use the undo button on the drawing toolbar instead (on the Drawings page Ctrl + Z does not undo BOQ data, but the Back button on the header bar can still undo BOQ edits) · history is kept only while this page is open — refreshing the page, opening another project, starting a new project or creating from a template starts a new history (the previous version can still be restored with Restore BOQ from local backup) · deleting a project from the list, disabling a share link and sending to ERP cannot be undone with this button

3Tour of the menus and header bar

The left-hand menu is divided into 4 groups in the order of the actual workflow. The faded numbers at the end of the menus come in two kinds (see Menu counts). All four group headings can be collapsed so that the group you are using is not pushed off the screen — see Collapsing and expanding menu groups at the end of this section

GroupMenuWhat it is for
OverviewAll projectsList of saved projects: open, duplicate, reorder and set status
DashboardPR.4 total, direct cost, multiplier over cost, and direct cost by work group
Take-offDrawingsLet AI take off quantities from PDF drawings and import them into the tables (see Section 8) · take off quantities from SketchUp / Revit models with the plug-ins (see Take-off from models) · attach PDF drawings or photograph the site, mark up, measure distances, send quantities to the BOQ / structural steel / bar-cut plan, and show the client an estimated price; see Section 8
Bar-cut planRebar cutting and bending schedule (Bar Bending Schedule) that computes cut lengths by shape, hooks and standard bend radii, then plans the cutting of 10/12 m bars to leave the fewest offcuts; see Section 5
Steel tablesSection properties of 602 steel sections (including 86 Cellular Beams) to TIS/JIS — calculates weights and sends them to the take-off tables · plans the cutting of the project's structural steel; see Section 12
Timber tables45 timber sizes (Thai inch-size timber · imported MGP pine · Glulam / LVL), 5 species groups and 13 plywood / OSB sheets, the same set as the timber works tab — choose a species, see the actual size, volume, weight and section properties, then send to the timber works table; see Section 12
Aluminium tables31 aluminium sections (door and window profiles · box · tube · angle · channel · flat bar · fin), 6 alloy grades, 5 finishes, 10 sheet/ACP items and 4 glass types, the same set as the aluminium works tab — see weights and section properties, then send to the aluminium works table; see Section 12
Stainless tables44 stainless sections (round tube · square tube · rectangular tube · shaft · flat bar · angle), 5 grades, 5 finishes, 12 sheet thicknesses and 2 railing glass types, the same set as the stainless works tab — weight by grade and section properties, then send to the stainless works table; see Section 12
BuildingRC structural elements, structural steel, architectural, electrical, sanitary, air conditioning, fire protection and built-in interior works
RoadwayRoads, pavement layers, wearing surfaces and roadside drainage
Bridge / box culvertFoundations, piers, pier caps, bridge decks and RC box culverts
IrrigationEarth canals, concrete-lined canals and irrigation structures
PricingBOQ by systemBill of quantities for the items that have quantities, with a unit price field you can edit on each row · add/delete items · print only the items actually priced; see Section 9
Factor FTable of overhead, interest and profit per circular W 481 · at the bottom of the page is the Source of Factor F values card, per item 12 of the roads, bridges and box culverts volume, which tells you which costs are already included in Factor F; see Section 13
Summary — PR. formsThe complete 2569 government form set, tables for entering purchased equipment and special expenses, and buttons for every type of export
Price databaseAll material and labor unit prices; edit them here and every BOQ updates immediately
Composite materialsComposite material unit cost tables per the 2569 median price criteria, covering 11 work groups — computes unit prices from material mixes, then compares them with the price database; see Section 11
Labour ratesLabor/operating cost schedule per Comptroller General's Department circular W 809, the complete schedule of 1,266 items · 1,471 labor lines (the number 1266 at the end of the menu is the item count) — the labor rates the criteria require you to use, a separate set from the labor rates in the price database; see Section 11
Building work item listThe list of building construction work items per item 2 of the 2569 criteria — the items a typical building should have, with units of measurement, 203 items, used to check whether your take-off is complete; see Section 11 · the same page has a Criteria Part 1 tab with items 1-6, the method framework for the whole building volume; see Section 11 · and a Measurement and allowance standards tab with items 3-4, where all the allowance percentages of the volume are found; see Section 11
Unit work cost — road & bridgeTables for evaluating the direct unit costs of roads, bridges and box culverts, 129 items, plus 178 fill-in calculation sheets (see Section 11) — the same idea as composite materials, but for the roads volume; see Section 11 · the same page has a Machinery cost table view per item 8 with another 58 types of work; see Section 11 · a Material haulage cost table per item 7 with another 14,400 figures; see Section 11 · Material quantity tables for SLAB TYPE bridges and box culverts per items 9-11; see Section 11 · a Construction work item list per item 2 with another 337 lines; see Section 11 · and Criteria Part 1 items 1-6, the method framework for the whole volume; see Section 11
ProjectsProject settingsProject header information and all pricing variables
CompareCompare several saved projects to see which option is cheaper
InstallmentsDivide the work into installments, enter their proportions, and view the S-Curve of the plan against the work already billed
Share with clientChoose what the client can see, then create a read-only link
Help & standardsSummary of the formulas and reference standards used in the program

Menu counts

The faded number at the end of each menu tells you the size of that page without opening it. There are two kinds

KindMenuWhat the number tells you
Work in the project
changes with the open project
All projects Bar-cut plan Building Roadway BOQ by system Number of saved projects · number of rows in the bar-cut schedule · number of rows filled in for the building works · total road length in kilometers · number of BOQ items that have quantities (blank sheet = 0)
Size of the reference schedule
the same for every project
Steel tables Price database Composite materials Labour rates Building work item list Unit work cost — road & bridge Number of entries in that schedule — Steel tables 602 sections · Price database 327 codes · Composite materials 367 items · Labour rates 1266 items · Building work item list 203 items · Unit work cost — road & bridge 129 items
💡 Labour rates: 1266 is not the same as 1,471 The menu count is in items (1,266), whereas there are 1,471 labor lines, because some items have several labor rates depending on conditions, e.g., piles have separate rates by the number of piles (200 piles or more · 100–200 piles · 50–100 piles) · both values match the entire W 809 schedule; see Section 11

Collapsing and expanding menu groups

The left-hand menu has 22 pages in total, so if your screen is not tall enough you cannot see them all at once. Every group heading can therefore be collapsed, leaving only the group you are working in

What you clickWhat it does
Overview Take-off Pricing Projects Click anywhere on a group heading bar to toggle that group between collapsed and expanded; the arrow on the right points down when the group is expanded and turns to the left when it is collapsed
The number in the circle at the end of a group heading The number of pages in that group, e.g., Pricing 8 means it has 8 pages, so you know what you have folded away without expanding it
The small color bar in front of the group name The group's color, for quickly spotting the group you want when several are collapsed
Collapse all / Expand all The button on the right of the Menu · 22 bar above the first group; collapses or expands all four groups at once
💡 Collapsing a group that contains the open page If you collapse a group that contains the page currently open, that group heading is tinted orange so you know the page you are working on is hidden inside it; click the heading to expand it and you will see the highlighted menu as before
💡 The program remembers for you Which groups are collapsed is remembered on the device you are using, so if you close the browser and open it again it stays the same. This is a device setting, not a project setting, so switching projects does not affect it. A device opened for the first time shows every group expanded so that you see the whole menu first

The header bar at the top

  • Project name field — type to edit it directly; the line under the name summarizes the province, work type, area and estimate date
  • TH / EN — switches the language of the whole page
  • Government / Private — switches the pricing method; see Section 13
  • Back / ↷ — undoes or redoes edits; see Undo and redo
  • Update prices — shows the price difference every time you edit, and triggers a full recalculation; see Prices update instantly
  • Save — saves the project to the list, locally first and then to the cloud
  • Cloud chip — click it to sign in, view the sync status, or sync right now
  • Export CSV — the bill of quantities for use in other programs · Export JSON — the whole project as a single file, for backup or moving to another device · the import buttons have moved off the header bar — Import JSON is on the All projects page · Import project (JSON) and Import all BOQ groups (CSV) are on the Project settings page
💡 The figure bar under the header bar Shows PR.1 direct cost → Factor F → PR.1 (A) construction cost → PR.4 median price, laid out in the same sequence in which the price is calculated. Click any box to jump to that page

Resizing windows and cards

Pop-up windows (all 9 windows of BOQ Studio · confirmation boxes · the quantity cards on the Drawings page) have a striped grip in the bottom-right corner — drag it to enlarge or shrink both the width and the height, so you can see long text or more items in drop-down lists · the system remembers the size of each window on the device, so it opens at the same size next time · double-click the grip = restore the default size

Prices update instantly, and the Update prices button

Wherever you edit a quantity, prices are recalculated instantly on every keystroke — you do not need to click anything; the take-off tables, BOQ, Factor F, PR.4 and the figure bar under the header bar all change together · the Update prices button shows you how much the price has changed

Button showsMeaning
Price +10,350 (orange background)The latest edit increased the total offer price / median price by this amount · it stays for 4 seconds and then returns to Update prices
Price −2,480 (green background)The price decreased by this amount
Update pricesPrices are current · hover over it to see the latest total · if an edit leaves the price unchanged (e.g., you typed back the original value), the button stays as Update prices and does not show +0

The difference is counted from the price before you started editing — typing one character at a time, or editing several fields in a row while the button is still showing a difference, counts as a single batch of edits, so the number on the button is the total for the whole batch. For example, changing the number of F1 footings from 15 to 17 (typing “1” and then “7”) shows Price +20,699 — not the difference from the moment the field held only “1” · stop editing for more than 4 seconds and the button returns to Update prices, and the next edit starts a new count

Clicking the button — triggers a full recalculation of everything (bar-cut plan → rebar table · materials selected per row → unit prices · Forms PR.2 / PR.3 → median price) and then shows the latest total, e.g., Quantities and prices recalculated · median price 97,952,725 THB — prices are now current · use it when you want to confirm the figures before printing or submitting the work

4Project settings

This page has two parts — General information, which appears on the PR. letterhead, and Pricing settings, the variables used in the formulas

Starting a new project

There are three ways to start a new project; choose according to what you want carried over · every way first backs up the open work on the device and asks for confirmation before replacing it

ButtonStarts atBest for
Start from a blank sheet
the last template on the All projects page
0 THB · 0 items Starting your own real job — every table, quantity and parameter is zero, with no sample installments and no placeholder names (location, owner and estimator are left blank), and no manually added quantities, edited prices, drawing markups or bar-cut plans carried over · the work-group structure (WBS) and the pricing settings remain the standard set
Templates for 5 work types
Road works · High-rise building · Factory · Irrigation · 2-storey house
Copy of a sample project Jobs that look similar to the sample — you get the complete set of tables and parameters, then edit the figures to match the drawings
Large billboard template
Large billboard · single round pole
Copy of a sample project A double-sided monopole sign 12×24 m, 32 m to the top — 8×8×2 m footing on 9 bored piles Ø0.80 m + round pedestal · steel pipe pole Ø1.52/1.22 m (priced by weight), base plate, flanges, M48 bolts · sign truss (steel tables) · sign face of metal sheet + vinyl (metal sheet table) · maintenance catwalk, cage ladder · LED floodlights, control cabinet, grounding, lightning protection · engineer's design and certification fees, permits and annual sign inspection under the Building Control Act (signs ≥ 15 m high or ≥ 50 m²) · wind loads per DPT 1311-50 · the sizes in the sample are for estimating — use the sizes from the engineer's actual design · items outside the price database are manually entered items whose prices can be edited in the BOQ
Construction system comparison pair template
2-storey house · conventional · 2-storey house · precast system
Copy of a sample project Comparing the cost and duration of the same house built with different systems — the dashboards of both samples have the Comparing construction systems card
Start a new project from defaults
on the Project settings page
Demo data (2-storey building + project access road) Trying out how every page works — not a blank sheet; if you want to start from zero, use Start from a blank sheet

Comparing construction systems — 2-storey house, conventional ↔ precast

The sample pair (loaded with the sample set or created from the template) is the same house — a 10 × 12 m plan, 2 storeys, 276 m² · a 6 × 6 m carport · an 85 m perimeter fence + sliding gate · the rooms, finishes, doors and windows, electrical, sanitary, air conditioning, steel roof, footings, 36 I-18 piles and the ground floor slab are identical line for line

What differsConventionalPrecast system
FootingsCast-in-placePrecast footings (same size and earthwork)
StructureCast-in-place RC columns and beams · grade beams · roof beamsPrecast bearing walls (exterior 15 cm · interior 12 cm) · precast grade beams/roof beams · precast carport columns + joint grout
2nd floor slab · stairs12 cm cast-in-place RC slab · RC stairs15 cm Hollow Core + 5 cm topping + wire mesh · 2-flight precast stairs
WallsLightweight concrete block masonry, plastered both sides, tie columns and lintelsNo masonry and no plaster — paint applied directly to the panel surface
FenceBlock masonry 1.80 m high, plastered both sides, on RC fence footings, columns and grade beamsPrecast concrete fence EXT-005
Time · machinery8 months5 months · erection crane for 1 month

The dashboards of both samples have the Comparing construction systems card: the total price of each system, the difference (THB / %), the duration, and the work groups that differ (preliminaries · structural · architectural · external) — edit the figures in the open project and the card recalculates immediately · the button at the top right opens the other sample of the pair

⚠ Precast element prices are assumed prices Codes STR-241 – STR-245 and STR-254 have no prices in the median price database, so the precast sample uses assumed prices (columns/beams 12,000 THB/m³ · walls 1,700 THB/m² · stairs 22,000 THB/set · grout 400 THB/point · footings 11,500 THB/m³ · Hollow Core 960 THB/m², including labor) to make the comparison possible — edit them to match actual manufacturer quotations on the Price database page before using the results · the shorter duration has not been converted into money (site operating costs, interest) apart from the crane cost
💡 A blank sheet carries no phantom totals Some minimum items, such as the minimum fire extinguishers per floor, manholes and end-of-run light poles, and the roadway earthwork and irrigation items, are counted only when that work actually exists (building area or number of floors entered, drainage pipes present, a road or canal present) · contractor's all-risk insurance (CAR) and pipe fittings are not counted as items until there is a work value or pipes · the BOQ by system menu counts only items that have quantities, so a blank sheet shows 0

General information

FieldHow to fill it inNotes
Project name · Contract no.
Project owner · Estimator
Type it inAppears on the letterhead of all three PR. forms
Construction siteChoose from 77 provincesYou can also search by region name · affects the prices pulled in; see Section 10
Estimate datePick from the calendarBuddhist-era calendar with month navigation and a Today button
Building typeChoose from the list21 types covering both buildings and civil works
Accuracy class (AACE)Choose from the listClass 1–5 per AACE 18R-97; see the explanation below
Total floor area · StoreysType a numberUsed to calculate the price per square meter
💡 List fields also accept a typed name For province, building type and accuracy class, if the option you want is not in the list, type it in the search box and click Use this value; the system keeps the text you typed

How to choose the accuracy class (AACE)

This figure tells readers how far this set of prices can be relied on. Choose it according to the completeness of the design available at the time of the take-off

ClassAccuracy rangeDesign definitionWhen to use
Class 5−50% / +100%0–2%Preliminary assessment, screening of options
Class 4−30% / +50%1–15%Project feasibility study
Class 3−20% / +30%10–40%Budget approval, setting the control budget
Class 2−15% / +20%30–75%Budget control, bidding
Class 1−10% / +15%65–100%Price checking, final bid submission

Pricing settings

The variables in this group change the bottom-line total directly; edit them and you see the effect immediately in the figure bar at the top

  • Advance payment rate and Retention withheld — used to select the row in the Factor F table per W 481
  • Rainy zone — Normal zone, Rainy zone 1 or 2; affects the Factor F tables for roadway and irrigation works
  • Construction duration — the number of months, used to calculate monthly lump-sum machinery rental
  • Contractor's all-risk insurance rate (CAR) — as a % of the total work value; see Section 9
  • Fittings, valves and pipe accessories rate — as a % of the sanitary pipe cost
  • Building rebar method — Auto (kg/m³) or Manual (bar list / Bar-Cut List) · the same setting as the selector bar in the structural tab; see Section 5

5Building quantity take-off

The Building menu has sub-tabs by work category. The most used is the RC structure tab, the table of cast-in-place RC elements (footings, columns, beams, slabs, walls, stairs, piles). Next comes the Precast structure tab for prefabricated elements (precast footings, columns, beams, slabs, load-bearing walls and stairs).

  • Standard cast-in-place RC drawings (click a row): ① plan ② section/elevation with reinforcement ③ second section ④ bar bending schedule (mark, size, shape, number, length, kg per the row's bars) ⑤ the row's quantity table — footings (spread · on piles · strip · combined) with sections A-A/B-B in the excavation pit · columns (rectangular/circular) with vertical bars distributed around the section + lap length + 135° tie detail · beams (continuous/simple span/cantilever) with top-bottom bars, top bars over supports L/4, end-zone stirrups L/4 + sections at support/midspan · slabs (one-way/two-way/flat) with top bars 0.3 of the short span · walls with 1–2 layers of bars + starter lap at the base · plain waist-slab stairs · circled numbers ①②③ match the rebar panel beside the drawing · colors: orange = bottom/main · blue = top · green = stirrups/distribution · gold = special
  • Slab drawings by the selected system (click a Slab row) — the drawing follows the slab system in the material field first; only for cast-in-place slabs is the Form field used · in every plan the long side runs horizontally · the span of precast units = the short side
    Select① Plan② ③ Sections / details④
    Form two-way · one-waybeams supporting 4 sides / long edges only · two-way bottom bars · top bars 0.3 span (one-way: long edges only) · load-direction arrowsA-A short direction · B-B long direction (one-way = temperature bars, no top bars)Bar bending schedule
    Flat plate · drop panel (or material Flat Slab + Drop Panel)columns on grid ≤ 8.5 m · column strip ℓ/4 · drop panel ℓ/3 · critical perimeter d/2A-A through the column line · column/drop panel detail: punching shear · ≥ 2 bottom bars through the column core
    Post-tensioned (or material Post-tension)banded tendons along column lines + distributed tendons @ 1.20 · anchorages at the edgesA-A curved tendon profile (high over columns, low at midspan) · anchorage detail + bursting reinforcement
    Cantilever slab · slab on gradecantilever: main top bars anchored into the interior span + drip groove · on grade: saw cuts ≤ 30t and ≤ 4.5 m + isolation jointscantilever: section perpendicular to the support line + cantilever tip · on grade: material layers (sand 50 · vapor barrier) + 3 joint types
    Material Hollow Core 15/20 · plank · solid slab · Double-Teeunits laid along the long side (width 1.20 / 0.35 / 1.20 / 2.40 m) on the long-edge beams + infill strip · hollow cores/stems dashedA-A across the units (partly true scale: cores · grout keys · stems + strands · topping + mesh) · B-B along the span (bearing ledge · temporary shoring for plank/solid slabs)Bearing / joint details (instead of a bar bending schedule)
    Material composite Metal Decksteel secondary beams @ ≤ 3 m + shear studs · ribs perpendicular to the secondary beamsA-A across the ribs (rib 305, depth 51) · B-B along the ribs over a secondary beam
    Material Waffle · Ribbed · Bubble Deckdome voids/joists @ 0.60/balls + solid heads around columns ℓ/6A-A through ribs/balls · B-B along the spanBar bending schedule
    Precast unit sizes are typical manufacturer values (check against the manufacturer's drawings before ordering) · BOQ quantities do not change because of the drawing · the drawing tabs above are renamed to suit, e.g. “Bearing”, “Anchorage”, “Joint detail”
  • Footing drawings by the selected form (click a Footing row · Form field) — Spread footing two-way bottom mat + column dowels · On piles pile layout P1 P2 … as set in the rebar panel · the pile symbol in plan and the pile head in section change with the pile type under the footing (I-section · square · hollow hexagonal · hollow spun · micropile · steel H · steel pipe · dry/wet bored/CFA · barrette · timber) with the embedment and pile-head requirements of that type (driven piles cut off leaving 75 mm anchor bars · hollow/pipe piles plugged with concrete + dowel bars · steel H embedded 300 mm + pile cap plate · bored piles chipped down with vertical bars projecting ≥ ld · timber cut off below the water table) · changing the pile type resets the size to that type's default (e.g. hexagonal 300 · spun 400); you can type your own size afterwards · Strip footing under a wall the wall runs along the long side · main bars perpendicular to the wall (orange) + longitudinal bars (green) on top of the main bars · cross section/section along the wall · footings longer than 4 times their width are shown with a break line, but dimensions still show the true length · Combined footing 2 columns · top mat resists the negative moment between the columns · A-A through the 2 columns · Mat foundation column grid at ≤ 6 m · top and bottom mats + chairs supporting the top mat + U-shaped edge bars · BOQ quantities do not change because of the drawing
  • Wall drawings by the selected form (click a wall row · Form / Type field) — Typical vertical and horizontal bars in 1–2 layers · lap at the base · Retaining wall backfill behind · weep holes Ø50 @ 1.50 · expansion joints every 10 m · the cantilever section shows toe, heel, shear key, drainage gravel, and main bars on the soil face bent into the base · Basement external waterproofing membrane + waterstop at the slab-wall joint · Tank/reservoir plan of walls on all four sides + internal fillets · maximum water level · waterstop · 50 mm cover · Parapet low wall on the slab edge · coping + drip groove · single layer of bars hooked into the slab · The Shear wall type has 6 forms: Special, with boundary elements (default · closely spaced closed hoops at both boundary ends) · Ordinary (U-bars at the wall ends) · With end columns (Barbell) · Flanged (L/T/I) · Coupled walls with coupling beams (coupling beam at every floor + detail of two diagonal bar groups + confining hoops ACI 18.10.7) · With openings (bars around the opening extending past the corners ≥ ld + diagonal corner bars) — the form changes only the drawing and requirements; quantities are computed the same · special/coupled walls default to 2 layers of bars · The Lift/stair core wall type has 5 forms (dimension 1 = total length of all sides · the core layout is computed from the total length, so thickness does not inflate the plan): Single lift shaft (default · four sides D × D · lift door + lintel beam) · C-shaped core (three sides · open side · free wall end detail with closely spaced vertical bars + U-bars closing the end) · Twin lift (2D × D + middle wall · 2 door openings) · Stair core (two-flight stair + landing inside the core · fire door · detail of the landing supported on the wall with a rebar coupler box) · Lift + stair (3D × D + dividing wall · lift/stair doors) — forms with core corners show a wall corner detail (horizontal bars bent around the corner + L-shaped corner bars · no lap splices at corners) · The Load-bearing wall type has 4 forms: Typical (default · slab bears on top of the wall) · With openings (door from floor/window · bars around the opening + diagonal corner bars · opening corner detail) · Tunnel form system (next room wall @ 3.6 m · slab cast with the walls · wall-slab joint detail with slab top bars bent into the wall + kicker) · On a strip footing (ground-floor wall on a strip footing · dowels from the footing · ground level) · BOQ quantities do not change because of the drawing
  • Column drawings by the selected form (click a Column row · Form field) — Single ties rectangular section + cross-ties · elevation with lap length + end-zone ties lo at half spacing · 135° tie detail · Spiral circular section · elevation with the helix at its pitch + 1.5 extra turns at the ends · detail of clear spacing 25–75 mm and spiral lap ≥ 48db · Circular hoops circular section · hoops lapped with 135° hooks · Pedestal (stub column) backfill around · elevation from the top of footing to the grade beam + ground level · pedestal base detail (vertical bars with 12db 90° bends on the bottom mat · ≥ 2 sets of ties inside the footing) · Tie column in masonry walls · wall ties every ≈ 0.50 m · tie beam at the top · plan with wall ties embedded in the mortar joints ≥ 0.30 m · BOQ quantities do not change because of the drawing
  • Beam drawings by the selected form (click a Beam row · Form field) — plan · elevation · sections A–A / B–B change with the form: Continuous adjacent spans dashed · top bars over supports L/4 extending into the adjacent spans · splice locations: top bars at midspan/bottom bars at supports · Simple span not continuous · bottom bars hooked into the supports · top hanger bars for the stirrups · Cantilever back span dashed · top tension bars anchored into the back span ≥ the cantilever length, ends bent down · closely spaced stirrups over L/2 at the root · section A–A at the root · Grade beam footings below ground (dashed) · ground level · sand + lean concrete under the beam · section in soil, cover 40–50 mm · Post-tensioned tendon line in plan + anchorages ▲ · parabolic tendon in elevation · closely spaced stirrups in the anchorage zone · sections show the duct position (ends = mid-depth · midspan = lowest) · Lintel supported on masonry walls, bearing 0.20 each side · opening below the beam · section in the wall · BOQ quantities do not change because of the drawing
  • Stair drawings by the selected form (click a Stair row · Form field) — Waist slab spanning between landings: plan + longitudinal section (soffit parallel to the slope, bottom bars anchored into the landings, top bars L/4) + section A–A across the flight · Sawtooth: soffit folded with the steps at uniform thickness, bottom bars bent along treads and risers + step corner detail (at re-entrant corners use crossing bars anchored past the corner ≥ ld; do not bend continuously · distribution bars at every corner) · Steps cantilevered from a wall/beam: plan of individual steps cantilevered from the wall + solid step elevation (no waist slab · top bars per step + stirrups) + section through a step (top bars bent 90° and embedded in the wall ≥ lap length) · the drawing tabs are renamed per form (section A–A · step corner · section through step) · riser 175 mm, tread ≈ 280 mm according to the horizontal run · BOQ quantities do not change because of the drawing
  • RC reinforcement detail drawings (select in the Connection / detail field of a cast-in-place row · 20 details from reinforcement detailing manuals vol. 1–6) — top half: ① main view ② section/enlarged view · ③ plan locating the element (uses the form matching the detail, e.g. cantilever beam · cantilever slab · flat slab · footing on piles, if the row has no form selected yet) ④ bar bending schedule per the row's bars ⑤ quantity table (choosing a detail does not change quantities) ⑥ requirements: cover · main-bar lap length by grade · 135°/90° hooks · no lap splices in zones of maximum force · referenced standards
  • Standard pile drawings (click a pile row): ① section by type (I-section · square · hexagonal · spun · micro · H · pipe · dry/wet bored · CFA · barrette · soil-cement · jet grout · timber · sheet pile) ② pile elevation in the ground at true length, divided into equal segments by the manufactured segment length + number of splices · cut-off level · ③ pile head-to-footing detail · ④ welded splice + pile tip (driven/steel piles) or construction sequence (bored/soil-cement/timber/sheet piles) · ⑤ quantity table by code (per pile/per meter) + total length + concrete in bored piles (for reference) · The Form field of a pile row selects one of 5 uses (the pile type still comes from material/grade · ① section unchanged · ②③④ change with the form): Compression under a footing (default · the drawing above) · Tension (uplift) (uplift T + skin friction · pile head anchor bars to the top of the footing + 90° hooks · uplift load test ASTM D3689) · Battered piles (vertical + 1 : 4 battered pile group resisting lateral load · heads cut parallel to the footing soffit · plan showing batter direction) · Slab-supporting piles (slab on a pile group · enlarged heads + extra bars above the pile heads · pile layout under the slab) · Retaining pile wall (section with existing ground/excavation level + earth pressure + struts · plan of contiguous/secant/sheet piles · capping beam) — pile quantities and prices are the same for every form
  • Both tabs use the same structural element table — rows are shown by their type · the Type field offers only the types of that tab, so they never mix · + Add row in the precast tab gives a default precast beam row · moving a row up/down swaps it with the rows visible in the same tab · BOQ sub-items, floors and exports are computed the same for every row
  • The precast tab has no Form field and no rebar method bar (precast elements are priced as a lump sum per unit including manufacture, transport and installation) · structural parameters and the take-off-by-code tables are in the RC tab · each tab's printout prints only that tab's rows
  • Standard precast drawings (click a row): ① plan ② elevation/longitudinal section ③ section A–A (top and bottom joints enlarged, middle broken out) ④ enlarged connection detail ⑤ the row's quantity table (same totals as the BOQ) — columns: grout sleeves along the edges @ ≈ 150 mm + corbels on 2 sides for beams · beams: seated on corbels, bearing pads, dowels, lifting points at L/5 · walls: grout sleeves at the base, lifting points at 1/4, vertical joints with wire loops · slabs: divided into equal-width units by unit type (hollow core/plank/solid/Double-Tee) bearing ≥ 75 mm on beams + topping · stairs: seated on the landing ledges, dowelled at the bottom, slotted at the top · footings: pocket footing receiving the column, in the excavation pit · orange = grout/joints (STR-245) · choose the row's Connection / detail → that connection's drawing is shown instead
  • Precast connection drawings, 10 types (Tekla Structures style) — ① plan/horizontal section ② connection elevation ③ section A–A showing internal hardware ④ enlarged detail ⑤ quantity table (connections → STR-245 + estimated grout) ⑥ installation sequence: Precast Foundation (grout sleeve) · Pocket Foundation (pocket footing + wedges) · Column Splice with grout splice sleeve / Bolt-Coupler (steel shoes at 4 corners) · Corbel (corbel + bearing pad + dowel) · Column - beam (beam on column head + dowel pin) · Concrete beam-beam (dapped end on the ledge of an inverted-T beam) · Wall Groove (wire rope loops) · Wall-to-Wall corner / in-line (embed plates + welding) · sleeves/embed plates/wire loops are arranged symmetrically about the axis · estimated grout shown for reference (its price is included in STR-245 per connection)

Filling in the structural element table

  1. Enter the element name

    e.g. F1 pile footing or B1 2nd-floor beam — use the names written on the drawings so you can trace back later

  2. Select floor / zone (available once floors have been defined)

    The Floor / zone and To floor (typical) columns are next to the element name — select the floor the element is on · for several identical floors enter the quantity of one floor and then choose the "to floor"; the system multiplies it for you · a new row gets the same floor as the last row; see By floor

  3. Select the type

    Footing · Pile · Column · Beam · Slab · RC wall · Stair — this choice sets the formulas for volume, formwork and reinforcement rate, so it can only be selected from the list, not typed

  4. Select material / grade

    See section 6 — the options change with the selected type

  5. Enter the quantity and dimensions

    The number of pieces, followed by dimensions 1–3 in meters · the Dig depth field is only for footings and box culverts

  6. Read the values the system calculates

    The grey columns on the right are results — concrete (m³) · formwork (m²) · rebar (kg) · excavation (m³). They cannot be edited there; to change them, edit the dimensions · if you choose manual rebar, the rebar column shows — and its header reads Rebar (manual); see Automatic or manual reinforcement

Copying and moving rows

At the end of every row of the take-off tables (structure · rebar schedule · structural steel · architecture · MEP · roads · bridges · irrigation etc.) there are four buttons

  • ⧉ Copy — inserts a new row below the original with identical values in every field, including material/grade and the pile price code; then edit only the fields that differ, e.g. beams B1 and B2 that differ only in length · BOQ quantities increase for the new row immediately · copying a row that came from AI / a PDF drawing / a cutting plan gives a manually entered row (the source row stays linked to its origin, so re-importing AI or editing the measurement list does not remove the copy)
  • ˄ Move up · ˅ Move down — swaps with the row above/below; quantities and prices do not change, only the order (BOQ sub-items follow this order) · the first row cannot move up and the last row cannot move down (the button is faded) · rows from a PDF drawing or a cutting plan cannot be moved, because the system regenerates them at the end of the table whenever their source changes
  • ✕ Delete — asks for confirmation first, as before
  • Every button can be undone with Back (Ctrl + Z) · disabled in preview/read-only mode

Sorting rows to find them easily

The header of every take-off table has a Sort by drop-down — Entry order · Auto (floor › type › name) · Floor/zone · Type/used as · Name A–Z (numbers sort by value, C2 before C10, ignoring the [drawing] tag) · By source drawing (file › page › measurement order)

  • Sorting affects only the on-screen display — the actual order does not change (the order of BOQ sub-items and of exported files stays the same) · the system remembers the sort separately for each table
  • A divider line appears where a new floor starts · newly added or copied rows are highlighted and scrolled into view
  • While sorted, the ˄ ˅ move row buttons are disabled — switch back to Entry order first if you want to move rows

Scrolling long and wide tables

  • Scrollbars are always on screen — take-off tables are no taller than the screen; scroll up–down within the table, and the left–right scrollbar sits under the visible part of the table, so you do not have to scroll the page to the bottom of the table first · column headers stay pinned at the top
  • The # column and the first column (element / location · description) are pinned on the left — when you scroll over to enter dimensions or view results at the end of the table, you still know which row you are on
  • The row-end buttons (elevation · copy · move · delete) are pinned on the right and can be clicked at any time · the elevation/section panel under a row is as wide as the visible part of the table
  • 4 arrow buttons on the table header — to the top · bottom · far left · far right in one click · or hold Shift and turn the mouse wheel to scroll left–right
  • Floating scrollbar at the bottom of the screen — any wide table whose bottom edge is still below the screen (building, road, irrigation and price tables alike) gets a left–right scrollbar floating at the bottom of the screen, as wide as the table, with ⤒ ⤓ ⇤ ⇥ buttons to go to the top/bottom/first column/last column · once the table's real scrollbar is visible, the floating bar disappears by itself

Widening columns · seeing full column header names

Long column header names are truncated with … — hover over a column header to see its full name · drag the right edge of a column header to widen/narrow it, Excel-style (the header and every row follow, including the grey result columns) · double-click the edge = fit the longest text · the system remembers the widths for each table on this device · a Reset column widths button appears on the table header once you have dragged one · tables in the price section work the same way; see section 10

💡 What dimensions 1–3 mean depends on the type Footing = width × length × thickness · Column = section width × depth × height · RC wall = length × height × thickness · Beam = width × depth × length · Slab = width × length × thickness · see the row's drawing in the Elevation · Section panel under the table · piles do not count concrete or formwork, because pile prices are already lump-sum prices per pile

Structural systems — column-beam · structural walls · precast

The Type field of the RC structural element table is organized into 3 systems (the system is shown under each name in the drop-down) — they can be mixed in one project Under the dimension 1 · 2 · 3 fields of every row there is a label saying what that field means for that type

System · typeDimensions 1 · 2 · 3Computed asReference
Column-beam system (cast-in-place)
footings, columns, beams, slabs, RC walls, stairs + piles
per the table below concrete · formwork · reinforcement (kg/m³ or bars per drawing) · excavationEIT 011008 · ACI 318-19
Structural wall system (cast-in-place)
Shear Wall · Bearing Wall · lift/stair Core Wall
length · height · thickness (lift core: total length of all sides) concrete = number × length × height × thickness · formwork on 2 faces · rebar 130 / 70 / 150 kg/m³ respectively (approximate) or bars per drawing, vertical/horizontal ACI 318-19 Chapter 11 · §18.10 · DPT 1301/1302 · EN 1992-1-1 §9.6
Precast system (Precast structure tab)
precast footing · precast column · precast beam · precast slab · precast wall (load-bearing) · precast stair
footing: width · length · thickness (+ dig depth · excavation margin) · column/beam: width · depth · height (length) per piece · wall: length · height · thickness (spec) · stair: spec · slab: see the next row lump-sum price including manufacture, transport and installation: STR-254 footing (m³) — excavation, sand bedding, lean concrete and backfill (less the footing volume) are still computed as for cast-in-place footings · STR-241 column (m³) · STR-242 beam (m³) · STR-243 wall (m²) · STR-244 stair (set) · grout/joints STR-245 = number × connections per piece (footing 1 · column 1 · beam 2 · wall 2 · stair 2), can be unticked in the auto-calculation column · no separate concrete, formwork or rebar (the table shows “—”) PCI Design Handbook · EN 13369 · EN 13225 · EN 14992 · EN 14843 · EN 1992-1-1 §10 · ACI 318-19 §26.9
Precast slab (precast system)
unit type selected in Material: Hollow Core 15 / 20 cm · plank 5 cm · solid slab · Double-Tee
width (across the units) · length (span) · topping slab units = number × width × length → STR-027 (price by the selected unit type, weighted by area) · topping concrete = area × thickness → STR-005 · topping wire mesh → STR-028 (can be unticked) · no formwork (the units are stay-in-place forms) · the drawing shows the unit layout, span direction, unit section by type, topping and unit joints EN 1168 · EN 13747 · TIS 828 · PCI Design Handbook
Other slab systemsselected in the Material of a “Slab” rowPost-tension · Metal Deck · Waffle · Flat Slab etc. (already available)—
⚠ Precast codes have no prices yet STR-233 · STR-241 – STR-245 are new codes from the 3-level work breakdown, and STR-254 precast footing was added outside the Excel file (in category STR.11 Precast); their starting price is 0 — enter prices from the manufacturer's quotation on the Price database page before using the totals · the kg/m³ rebar values for structural walls are approximations for preliminary cost estimates; use bars per drawing or the actual drawings once structural drawings are available

Element forms (simple-span beam · continuous beam · one-way/two-way slab · flat slab · post-tension …)

The Form column (after Type) selects the system of a cast-in-place element · the options change with the row's type · “—” = the type's default (as in earlier versions) The selected form sets the field names and bar lengths in the bars-per-drawing panel · cover · check criteria · and the elevation and section drawings · concrete/formwork are unchanged, except for circular columns (dimension 1 = diameter, computed as π/4·D²) · rows whose rebar has not been edited are still computed in kg/m³ by type as before

TypeFormEffect on bars per drawing · cover · drawing
Beamcontinuous beam (default) · simple-span beam · cantilever beam · grade beam · post-tensioned beam · lintel/tie beam simple span: no top bars over supports · cantilever: main bars on top, anchored into the back span ≥ the cantilever length, ends bent down, closely spaced stirrups over half the length at the root (elevation with a single column) · grade beam: cover 40/50 mm + sand bedding · post-tensioned: minimum reinforcement + parabolic tendon profile (tendons computed separately) · lintel: 2 top, 2 bottom, stirrups @0.20
Columnrectangular with single ties (default) · circular with spiral · circular with single hoops · pedestal · tie column circular: ≥ 6 vertical bars around the perimeter · spiral counted in turns (height/pitch + 1.5 turns at each end), clear spacing 25–75 mm · pedestal: in contact with soil · tie column: 2–4 bars, ties RB6@0.20, ρ not checked
Slabby aspect ratio (default) · two-way · one-way · flat plate · flat slab with drop panels · post-tensioned · cantilever slab/canopy · slab on grade one-way: top bars at long edges only · flat/post-tensioned: top bars along column lines in both directions, extending 0.30ℓn in each direction; the drawing shows columns instead of beams · post-tensioned: As over columns ≥ 0.00075Acf, tendons computed separately · cantilever slab: main top bars anchored into the interior slab ≥ the cantilever length, cover for exposure to weather · on grade: single mesh, no supports
RC walltypical (default) · retaining wall · basement wall · tank/reservoir wall · parapet retaining/basement/tank: 2 layers, in contact with soil/water (tank ≥ 50 mm, spacing ≤ 300, ρt ≥ 0.003 per ACI 350) · waterstop at the slab-wall joint · retaining walls use the wall-on-footing drawing
Stairwaist slab spanning between landings (default) · sawtooth · steps cantilevered from a wall/beam sawtooth: soffit folded with the steps, bottom bar length ≈ horizontal run × 1.6 · cantilevered steps: top bars “bars/step” embedded in the wall ≥ lap length + bottom bars + stirrups in each step
Footingspread footing (default) · footing on piles · strip footing under a wall · combined footing · mat foundation on piles: depth above the bottom bars ≥ 300 mm, drawing shows the piles · strip footing: transverse main bars + longitudinal bars · combined/mat: top mat switched on automatically

Each footing form: plan · section A-A · section B-B · elevation — and piles under the footing

Footing rows draw 4 matching views: the plan has section lines A-A (along dimension 1) and B-B (along dimension 2) · the two sections show the row's bars per drawing · the elevation shows existing ground level ±0.00 · top of footing · bottom of footing · bottom of pit (from the dig depth, less sand bedding/lean concrete) · column/wall positions change with the form: spread/pile footing = column at the center · combined footing = 2 columns along the long side · mat = 3 × 3 columns · strip footing = wall along the long side (the cross section shows the main bars bent up, the longitudinal section shows the longitudinal bars)

Pedestal on the footing (stub column from the footing) — spread footings · pile caps · combined footings have fields in the bars-per-drawing panel to enter the real drawing: pedestal width × length (blank = balanced with the footing: short side × 0.30 rounded up to 0.05 m, 0.20–1.00 m · one side only = square) · pedestal height from the top of the footing to the top of the pedestal under the ground beam (blank = up to ground = excavation depth − footing thickness) · column size above the pedestal (dashed in plan) · offset along dim 1 / dim 2 for edge/corner footings (combined footings get 2 pedestals at ±dim 1/4 · strip/mat footings have none) · every field checks the balance with the footing ✓/⚠: footing projects ≥ 0.15 m beyond the pedestal on every side · short side ≥ 0.20 m · height ≤ 3 × short side (taller is a column — ACI 2.3) · column above ≤ pedestal · pile caps: pedestal center within 50 mm of the pile group center · spread footings: offset ≤ dim/6 · the plan draws the pedestal to its real size with size/height · sections A-A / B-B draw it from the top of the footing to its top with a height dimension and level (it may rise above ground) · column dowels run up to the top of the pedestal · Send to pedestal row = create a linked column row with the “Pedestal” form (count = pedestals/footing × footings · size · height · same concrete) so concrete, formwork and rebar are priced automatically — edit it at the footing · stop sending and the row stays (unlinked) · “Reset pedestal to footing balance” clears what you typed · watch for double counting with column rows that already include the pedestal

Footing on piles — the bars-per-drawing panel has a Pile type under the footing field (12 types: driven I-section · solid square · hollow hexagonal · spun · micropile · steel H · steel pipe · dry/wet bored pile · CFA · barrette · timber pile) · Piles/footing can be typed from 1 to 60 (blank = as many as fit in the footing) · Pile layout: Auto per standard (2 = pair · 3 = triangle · 4 = four corners · 5 = four corners + center · 6 = 2 × 3 · 7 = hexagon · 8 = 2 × 4 · 9 = 3 × 3 · more are arranged in a grid · narrow footings in a single row) · Single row · Grid · Staggered · Custom coordinates (opens the pile coordinate editor — choosing it the first time copies the current layout for you to edit · the count comes from the coordinates) · Spacing along dimension 1 / dimension 2 can be set separately (blank = max(3D, 0.75 m)) · Edge distance from pile center to footing edge (blank = max(D, D/2 + 0.15)) · “Reset layout/spacing to default” clears the entered values · under the layout field the footing size this layout requires is shown (✓/⚠) · the plan dimensions the actual edge distances and pile spacing · Size · length · Pile dowels into the cap — the Pile dowel bar size field (standard: bored/barrette piles ≤ 0.60 m DB16 · ≤ 1.00 m DB20 · larger DB25 · driven piles use the bars left after cutting the head) and Dowel length into the cap measured from the pile head (blank = standard: bored piles ld = 36db for SD40 per DPT 1103-64, e.g. DB16 = 0.58 m · driven I/square/micropile 0.40 m · hexagonal/spun/pipe 0.60 m · steel H/timber piles have no dowels) — type your own length; shorter than standard shows ⚠ · dowels never stick out of the cap: they run straight up to just under the top mesh (cap thickness − pile embedment − cover − 20 mm) and anything longer gets a 90° hook under the top mesh with a leg ≥ 12db · the section labels the dowel size/length and the hooked part · dowel weight goes into the BOQ through the “Pile dowel” bar slot in the bars-per-drawing panel (pile caps only · also listed in the bar bending schedule): bars per pile × piles per cap × length (inserted into the pile + pile embedment + straight run + hook leg) — defaults: hexagonal/spun/pipe piles 4 inserted bars 1.00 m into the pile · bored piles 0 (the bored pile price already includes the projecting bars — enter a count when the cap contractor supplies the dowels) · solid driven piles 0 (bars left after cutting the head) · pick the size in the pile-cap panel or in the bar slot, the two stay in step · the first time you choose this form, the system takes the type/size/length and “… piles/footing” from the first pile row in the table · the plan shows the pile section by type · the section shows the pile heads embedded in the footing · the elevation shows the piles at full length, splices, pile tip level and the pile section · checks spacing ≥ 2.5D and pile center to footing edge ≥ D/2 + 150 mm · Send to pile row (in the same panel) = automatically creates a pile row linked to this footing: number = piles/footing × number of footings · type + size → the nearest item in the pile list (⚠ shown when the size does not match) · length = pile length (per-pile items with a fixed length are used when the lengths match) · floor follows the footing — whenever the footing is edited the pile row follows (edit it at the footing) · choosing “Not sent” or deleting the footing = unlink; the pile row remains for you to decide · if there are also manually entered pile rows, you are warned to watch for double counting · under the drawing piles/footing × number of footings is shown and compared with the pile row total in the table (✓ match / ⚠ mismatch) — pile prices are still computed in the pile row, not counted twice

Pile coordinate editor (“Custom coordinates” layout) — sits under the fields in the bars-per-drawing panel · Coordinate origin to match the drawing: footing center (x right · y down as in the plan) · bottom-left corner (x right · y up — most drawings) · top-left corner (y down) · Input unit meters or millimeters (as on structural drawings) — switch any time, the piles do not move · 3 ways to enter: Pile table with x / y cells for P1 P2 … (numbers match the labels on the plan), edit one cell at a time, delete a pile with ✕ · Grid lines type x and y line positions separated by , or “4@1.5” (4 lines 1.5 apart centered on the footing), mixed if you like → every intersection (replace all, or add to the existing ones) · Paste / type all one pile per line or separated by ; · x and y separated by a comma, space or tab — copy 2 columns from Excel or a CAD coordinate table · a P1 name in front is fine · tools: + Add pile (one spacing further, new row at the edge) · Mirror left-right / top-bottom / 4 ways (enter half or a quarter of the layout) · Sort · Center on footing (or on an offset pedestal) · Start from standard layout · per-pile check: past the footing edge · too close to the edge < D/2 + 0.15 m · closer than 2.5D to a neighbor · duplicate — orange row with the reason and a red ring on that pile in the plan · summary of minimum spacing, pile group center and the footing size the layout needs

Reinforcement details per manuals vol. 1–6 (DPT · EIT · ACI 318-19 · AASHTO)

The Connection / detail column of the structural element table (after Material / grade) applies both to precast rows (connections — see the next topic) and to cast-in-place rows (reinforcement details) · the options change with the row's type · once selected, the drawing under the row becomes a standard two-view drawing following the illustrations in the manuals, with labels describing each bar set and the sizes from the row's bars-per-drawing panel · “—” = the original element drawing · quantities and totals do not change

Standard connection / detail drawings (all 20 reinforcement details + 10 precast connections) — the same frame as the structural steel and architectural drawings (title block · units · footer line) · left = main elevation/section · right = cross section (A–A · B–B …), plan or enlarged detail · arranged symmetrically about the axis (centerline) · section lines have viewing-direction arrows and letters matching the section names · ISO 129 dimension lines with the row's actual values (b × h · cantilever length · thickness) · ISO 128-50 concrete hatching · bar colors: blue main/top bars · orange bottom/diagonal bars · green stirrups/distribution · yellow special bars (haunch, hooks, waterstop, confining hoops) · precast: light orange = non-shrink grout · black = bearing pads/shims · section titles state the standard (DPT 1103-64 · ACI 318-19 · AASHTO LRFD · PCI · ACI 350 · EN)

DetailLeft viewRight view
Cantilever beamelevation: center column, back span on the left, cantilever on the right · top bars bent down at the end · closely spaced stirrups at the rootsection A–A at the root (b × h · top-bottom bars · 135° stirrups)
Transfer beam · beam with opening · coupling beamsymmetric elevation: Strut-and-Tie + hanger bars · opening at mid-beam + extra stirrups · two diagonal bar groupssection B–B (skin bars on both faces) · C–C through the opening (top-bottom chords) · D–D (diagonal group + confining hoops)
Corner beam-column joint · post-tensioning anchoragerigid frame with two symmetric corners · beam end: local zone + general zone ≈ henlarged corner (ℓdh · ties in the joint) · beam end face (anchor plate · spiral · duct)
Cantilever slab · flat slab · post-tensioned slab · slab with openingcantilever slab section + edge beam · column strip 0.30ℓn · tendon plan · opening plancantilever slab bar plan · middle strip 0.22ℓn · section along the tendon · section E–E
Anchor bolt pedestal · corbel · footing on piles · bored pilepedestal section (hef · ca1) · corbels on both sides of the column (av · d) · footing section (cover 75) · pile sectionpedestal top plan · corbel section (Asc · Ah) · footing plan (row's width × length) · cage elevation
Tank wall · liquid-retaining joint · diaphragm walltank wall-slab joint · construction + contraction joint · panel planenlarged waterstop · expansion joint · vertical section (guide wall · tremie)
Bridge deck · hammerhead pier · box culvertsymmetric cross section · pier elevation · culvert sectionenlarged deck overhang + barrier · section F–F · enlarged haunch
10 precast connectionssymmetric connection elevation/section (column-beam · corbel · beam-beam · 3 wall types · 2 column bases · 2 column splices)column head section · enlarged corbel · plan · horizontal section · column section with ducts/sleeves at their actual number
Row typeSelectable detailsDrawing shows (source in the manuals)
Beamcantilever beam · transfer beam / deep beam · beam with opening · corner beam-column joint · coupling beam · tendon anchorage zone (post-tensioned beam) top bars extending into the back span, bent down at the end · hanger bars under a floating column + skin bars + torsion beam · extra stirrups on both sides of the opening · bars bent into the joint core, ties through the joint · two diagonal bar groups · local zone (anchor plate + spiral) and general zone of length ≈ h (bursting + spalling reinforcement) (vol. 6 items 6.1 · 6.5 · 6.7 · 6.8 · 6.9 · vol. 5 item 1)
Slabcantilever slab / canopy · flat slab · post-tensioned slab · slab with opening top bars across the edge beam · column strip 0.30ℓn / 0.20ℓn, middle strip 0.22ℓn + bottom bars through the column core · banded/distributed tendons + tendon chairs · trimmer bars around the opening + diagonal corner bars (vol. 6 items 6.2–6.4 · 6.7)
Column · footing · pileanchor bolt pedestal · corner beam-column joint · Corbel ACI 16.5 · footing on piles · bored pile headed anchors hef, edge distance ca, ties around the anchors at the pedestal top · hooked dowels on the bottom mat, depth ≥ 300 mm · cage, spiral, stiffener rings, wheel spacers · corbel: Asc anchored at the end by a welded cross bar, closed ties Ah within 2d/3, outer edge ≥ 0.5d (vol. 5 item 6 · item 2.1 · vol. 1 item 11 · vol. 4 item 3)
Wall (RC · shear · load-bearing · lift core)tank wall: slab-wall joint + waterstop · liquid-retaining structure joints · diaphragm wall · coupling beam dowel bars lapped across the joint, raised kicker, waterstop · construction/contraction/expansion joints · two-face cage, tremie pipe openings, spacer plates (vol. 3 items 2 · 6 · vol. 4 item 4)
Bridge · irrigation (automatic)bridge deck · pier/bridge column · pier cap · box culvert · irrigation structure two layers of transverse main bars + barrier bars · closely spaced ties in plastic hinge zones · haunch bars · waterproof slab-wall joint (vol. 2 items 3 · 5 · 6 · vol. 3)

Roads and canals (automatic, no selection needed): PCC road rows have a Concrete pavement joints strip after the cross section — smooth round dowels at transverse joints sized by slab thickness (Ø ≥ T/8 · RB25/RB34, 0.50 m long @ 0.30 m), coated on one side to allow sliding, and deformed tie bars DB16 @ 0.60 m at longitudinal joints (vol. 2 item 2) · Concrete-lined canal rows have a Lining bars and U-flume strip — single mesh at mid-thickness, cut at contraction joints every 3.0–4.5 m, weep holes, and U-flumes with the outer bars continuous around the corners (vol. 3 item 5) · these are illustrations only; quantities and totals do not change

Precast element connections (Precast Connections, Tekla Structures style)

The structural element table has a Precast connection column after Material / grade — used with precast footing · precast column · precast beam · precast wall rows (rows of other types show a dash) · the options change with the row's type · once selected, the elevation and section under the row change to the connection drawing while “—” is the original element drawing (cross section + installation elevation) · quantities and totals do not change — connections are still counted in STR-245 as before (column/footing 1 connection · beam/wall 2 connections per piece)

GroupForm (used with)Drawn views · contents of the connection
1. Column-beam
(Beam-to-Column)
Column - beam
beam
elevation of beams on both sides seated on the column head · bearing pad (Neoprene) · dowel/anchor bolt through grout sleeves in the beam ends · steel splice plates · section through the column head per the row's beam size
Corbel / Concrete Console
column · beam
elevation of corbels on both sides of the column supporting beam ends · corbel section with reinforcement (tension bars with bent ends · closed horizontal ties · dowel · bearing pad)
Concrete beam-beam
beam
inverted-T main beam + dapped-end secondary beam seated on the ledge · main beam-secondary beam plan (secondary beam width per the row)
2. Wall
(Wall-to-Wall)
Wall Groove / Wall Seam elevation of vertical + horizontal joint grooves · wire loop boxes (Wire Loop Box, e.g. Peikko) · threaded-through bar · horizontal section of the keyed groove + grout
Wall-to-Wall — corneroverlapping wall corner · embedded steel plates (Embed Plate) + steel angle welded on site · sealant
Wall-to-Wall — in-linewalls joined in line · embedded plates on both sides + welded splice plate (Welded Connection)
3. Column base / column splicePrecast Foundation — Grout Sleeve
footing · column
section at the column base: corrugated duct (Corrugated Grout Sleeve) · dowels from the footing · 30 mm bedding grout · injection/vent ports · duct positions per the column section
Pocket Foundation — pocket footing
footing · column
section of the footing pocket (depth ≈ 1.2 × column width) · plumbing wedges · non-shrink grout around the column · pocket plan
Column Splice — Grout Splice Sleeve
column
vertical column splice with rebar splice sleeves · injection/vent ports · 20 mm joint grout · sleeve positions
Column Splice — Bolt-Coupler
column
Column Shoe (steel shoe embedded at the base of the upper column) at 4 corners · anchor bolts from the lower column · nut + washer, then grouted

Under the drawing the estimated grout per connection and for the whole row is shown (computed from the row's section, e.g. bedding grout under the column + ducts/sleeves, or the gap around the column in the pocket) — for reference only, not entered in the BOQ because the grout price is included in the per-connection price STR-245 · if the manufacturer does not include steel plates, bolts, bearing pads or ducts/sleeves in the per-connection price, take them off separately in the Connections & fixings tab · Construction drawing page: the precast column/footing count cards and the precast beam/wall length cards have a precast connection field, guessed from the item name (e.g. “splice” · “pocket” · “corbel” · “corner”)

Piles — dimensions filled in by the selected type

Select the Pile type or choose the type in the Material / grade field, and the program fills in the dimensions for you: section size from the item name · per-pile price items with a length in the name (e.g. I-18 length 18 m) put that length in dimension 3 · per-meter price items keep the length you entered · dig depth is 0 (piles do not count excavation)

Under the dimension fields of a pile row there is a small label saying what the field means for this pile type — hover over the field to see the full description

Pile typeDimension 1Dimension 2Dimension 3
Driven precast RC I-section · solid square · square micropileside= dimension 1length/pile
Driven precast RC hollow hexagonalsizenot usedlength/pile
Spun · dry/wet bored · CFA · DCM · jet grout · steel pipe · timber pile · circular micropileØnot usedlength/pile
Steel H (H-Pile)depthflange widthlength/pile
Barrettewidthlengthdepth/pile
Sheet pile (number = number of sheets)sheet width 0.40trench depthlength/sheet
  • Red — value does not match the type, e.g. section size does not match the item · old-version rows with the length entered in dimension 1 · per-meter price item with no length entered yet (the quantity will be 0)
  • Yellow — worth checking, e.g. I-18 length 18 m (per-pile price) selected but length 21 m entered — if the pile length differs from the item, choose the per-meter price item of the same size
  • Labels with an arrow, e.g. ⚠ side → 0.22, can be clicked to apply the item's value immediately (undo with Ctrl + Z)
  • Items whose name does not state a size (generic H-Pile · steel pipe · CFA · DCM · jet grout) need dimension 1 entered manually from the drawings

Automatic or manual reinforcement

Under the table header in the Structure tab and the Rebar schedule tab there is a Rebar method bar with two buttons to choose where the rebar weight in the BOQ comes from — use it when the average rate does not match the drawings and you want to compute all the rebar yourself

ButtonBOQ computes rebar fromStructure table
Auto · kg/m³concrete volume × rebar rate by element type, then split into bar sizes by standard proportions · the default for every projectthe rebar (kg) column shows the weight per row
Manual · bar list / Bar-Cut Listthe sum of the rebar schedule table only, by actual bar size — including manually entered rows, rows sent from the rebar cutting plan and rows imported from AIthe rebar column shows — and is not counted, to avoid double counting

Next to the buttons a message tells you how many kg of rebar the BOQ is using right now and where it comes from, with buttons to go to the other tab's table and to the rebar cutting plan page · the chip at the top of the building page shows Rebar (auto) or Rebar (manual) with the weight · both methods still add the 7% rebar waste allowance as before, and the tie wire cost adjusts to the weight actually used

⚠ Manual but the rebar schedule table is still empty = 0 kg of rebar The system does not fall back to automatic calculation by itself — the bar shows an orange warning message · add rows to the rebar schedule table, or press Send to building BOQ on the rebar cutting plan page · in automatic mode, if the rebar schedule table has rows, the bar says "not counted yet"
💡 You can also choose it on the settings page The Building rebar method option on the project settings page is the same value; changing it in one place changes the other · pressing Send to building BOQ on the rebar cutting plan or importing rebar from AI switches the system to manual for you and shows a message every time

Other tabs in building works

TabWhat to enter
By WBS3-level work breakdown structure (main category → sub-category → item code) covering all four work groups · codes are matched to categories automatically and can be changed manually · add items with quantities, or type items not in the price database; see section 9
By floordefine floors / zones, then assign a floor to each row (or arrange them automatically from the row names) · typical-floor rows repeated over several floors · budget by floor × work category · check quantities and BOQ items floor by floor · CSV export; see section 9
StructureRC elements per the table above
Rebar scheduletake off rebar by size and number of bars, for work needing more detail than average rates · the BOQ uses this table when manual is selected; see Rebar method
Structural steelselect sections from TIS 1227 / JIS G3192, enter the number of pieces and length, and the system computes weight and painting area · 451 sections to choose from; full properties in section 12
Connections & fixingsbolts, anchors, wall plugs, hangers, panel screws — taken off by fixing point (column base · joint · hanging line · panel area · point); see Bolts · fixings
Architecturewalls, ceilings, finishes, doors and windows — computed from room sizes and number of openings · masonry walls and plastering per wall line; see Masonry wall · plaster table · metal sheet walls and sign faces (warehouses, factories, billboards); see Metal sheet table · roofs and roofing by shape (tiles · metal sheet · shingle · roof deck); see Roof · roofing table · complete truss roofs (truss + purlins + roofing); see Truss roof · roofing table · Stair finishes per flight · Ceilings per area · Plan · elevation · section drawings for every table · floor, ceiling, wall and door codes cover every sub-category, and items can be typed in manually; see Add row · type your own item
Electrical / ICT · Sanitary · HVAC · Fire protectionMEP works, computed from the number of points, pipe lengths or air-conditioned area
Built-in furniturefixed cabinets and counters — see how to fill them in below
External works · Preliminariesfences, internal roads, landscaping and temporary works for construction · take-off-by-code tables at the end
Other worksdemolition · lifts · gas · special systems · equipment · provisional sums and contingencies — taken off as rows with the take-off-by-code table

Structural steel — section · member elevation · plan for each row

Press a row's drawing icon in the Structural steel tab and the program draws that member from its section in the TIS / JIS table (the same set as the Steel tables page) following ISO 128 / ISO 129

  • Section A–A — true-proportion shape, root fillets at the flanges, steel hatching, centerlines x–x / y–y and dimensions H B t1 t2 r (or D t · A t · Cy depending on type)
  • Member elevation · plan — the whole member with closed ends, length shortened by a break line in the middle, and a dimension line for the entered length/piece · section plane A–A · under the drawing: used as, number of pieces and total length
  • The title is the member name in the row · the sheet footer states the section standard, anti-rust painting and bolts · under the drawing there are lines computing weight and painted surface with the same values as the table
  • The same drawing appears in Preview & print A4/A3 · sections typed in manually and not in the steel tables use a simplified drawing instead

House roof framing — choose the shape and roofing, enter the house size and steel sizes, get quantities instantly

The table has its own House roof framing tab, right after the Precast structure tab (it used to sit inside the Structural steel tab) — one row = 1 roof (can be multiplied by the number of houses) · enter the house width (perpendicular to the ridge) × length (along the ridge) · slope (degrees) · eave overhang, then choose the sections for rafters, ridge, hips, purlins/battens and king posts; the program computes the length and weight of every member by roof shape · references TIS 1228 (cold-formed steel sections) · TIS 107 (steel tubes) · DPT 1311 (wind load) · AISI S100 / EN 1993-1-3 · roofing manufacturers' manuals (batten spacing/slope)

Roof shapeFeatures · what is computed
Gable · L-shaped gableridge along the length · rafters counted individually per side · barge boards at the gable ends · L-shape adds a wing (width/projection) + 2 valleys
Barn (Gambrel)gable broken into two slopes, the steep lower part at 60° and ¼ of the span wide on each side · 2 lines of purlins at the break
Hip · L-shaped hipridge = length − width · 4 hips (L-shape adds 2 hips + 2 valleys) · no barge boards
Manila / Dutch gable (gable on hip)hip on the lower 60% · small gable on the upper part · barge boards on the small gable
Pyramid hipsquare plan (length = width) · 4 hips meeting at the apex · 1 central king post, 4 braces
Lean-to · low-slope flat roof · butterflysingle slope / slope 1–5° / two sides sloping to a central gutter · beam at the high end or central gutter beam instead of a ridge · no king posts
RoofingPurlin/batten spacing · slope (per manufacturer) → roofing code
Concrete tiles (CPAC/SCG)battens 0.33 m · rafters 1.0 m · slope 17.5–45° → ARC-024 (including ridge caps)
Ceramic/clay tilesbattens 0.30 m · slope ≥ 30° → ARC-024
Fiber cement corrugated sheetspurlins 1.20 m · slope ≥ 15° → ARC-026 (including ridge caps)
Metal sheet + PU insulation · high-rib metal sheet (low slope)purlins 1.2 / 1.5 m · slope ≥ 5° / ≥ 2° → ARC-025 / ARC-049 · ridge/hip caps → ARC-058
  • Rafter spacing / purlin/batten spacing enter 0 = per roofing (the value used is shown under the field) · slopes or spacings beyond the manufacturer's limits show in red under the field · changing the roofing changes the purlins/battens to a suitable type (Top Hat battens for tiles · C75 for metal sheet/corrugated sheets)
  • Sections: cold-formed C-sections TIS 1228 (single/double) · steel tubes TIS 107 · hot-rolled steel from the steel tables · prefabricated battens/galvanized tubes (not painted)
  • Hip/Manila/pyramid/L-wing: rafters ≈ roof area ÷ rafter spacing · purlins ≈ area ÷ purlin spacing · hip = √(2(width incl. eaves/2)² + height²) · king posts under the ridge every ≤ 3 m + 2 braces per king post (the RC tie beams/beams supporting the king posts are in the structural works)
  • BOQ codes: steel tubes/cold-formed/battens → STR-024 · hot-rolled steel → STR-023 · painting → STR-026 · beam embed plates 0.15 × 0.15 × 6 mm (rafter ends + king post bases) → FAS-017
  • Rows in this table = roof framing steel taken from the table instead of the lump-sum “roof area × kg/m²” in the architectural parameters (to avoid double counting) · tick Roofing · fascia (off by default) = use the roofing area, fascia + barge boards (ARC-029) and metal sheet caps from the table instead of the parameters · if you also enter the metal sheet roof in the metal sheet table, untick the framing of that row
  • Row drawings: roof plan (eave line · wall line · ridge · hips · rafter lines · king posts · L-wing) · section (rafters · king posts + braces · purlins/battens · slope · height) · member table with BOQ codes · connection details in 3 panels (apex/ridge · rafter seat · purlin/batten fixing) · the structural steel card at the top already includes the roof framing steel
  • Send to roof · roofing (architecture) — a field at the end of the row; once the roof framing is done, send the same roof to the Roof · roofing table to compute roofing right away: Auto — linked to this row = creates a target row whose shape, roofing, number, size, slope, eaves and wing always follow this row (edit here and the target follows · linked fields are shown in green “per house roof framing”); insulation, gutters, flashing, caps and eave soffits are edited at the target · Custom — copy once = copies once, after which you edit the target freely · Not sent = deletes the linked row (rows copied as custom are not deleted) · once sent, roofing/fascia/caps are no longer computed in this table (to avoid double counting) and the target row is set to “no battens/purlins” because battens/purlins are already computed in this table · deleting the source row = the target row becomes custom (your edits are not deleted)

House roof framing connections — welds · bolts · gusset plates · angle cleats · self-drilling screws

References AWS D1.3 (sheet steel welding) / D1.1 · EIT 011038 / DPT 1121 · AISI S100 · AS/NZS 4600 (cold-formed steel screws) · EN 1993-1-3 / 1-8 · computed when Beam embed plates · connections is switched on in the auto-calculation field · changing the type sets the defaults of the bolt / weld / screw, gusset plate and pieces/connection fields for you

Frame connectionWhat is computed → BOQ code
Weld all round (Fillet weld)typical houses · weld length = depth + width of the member per connection (length shown · welding cost included in the steel price) · 3 mm fillet for cold-formed steel
Weld + gusset plate (Welded gusset)0.15 × 0.15 gusset plate (triangular) at every connection → FAS-017 · welds 2 ends × 2 sides × 1.5 depth
Bolts + gusset plate (Bolted gusset)gusset plate → FAS-017 · 4 bolts/connection: A325M M12 (FAS-072) · 8.8 M12/M16 · A307 ½" (FAS-055) · JIS M12 (FAS-024)
Bolts + angle cleat (Angle cleat)L 50×50×5 angle 120 mm long/connection → FAS-017 · 4 bolts/connection
Self-drilling screws (prefabricated cold-formed framing)1.6 mm gusset plate · 6 screws/connection #12×25 hex head (FAS-309) / #10 pan head (FAS-316) / #8 wafer head (FAS-314)
  • Frame connections/roof = the top end of every rafter (apex/ridge · barn roofs add the break) + hip ends 2/hip + king post top and bottom + braces at both ends · rafter seats are welded to the beam embed plates in every type
  • Purlin/batten fixing at every intersection with a rafter (≈ total purlin length ÷ rafter spacing): 2 self-drilling screws/point → FAS-309 (default · used for tiles) · spot welds 2 × 30 mm · 5 mm purlin cleat + 2 A307 ½" bolts → FAS-017 / FAS-055 (C-purlins for metal sheet)
  • Gusset plates painted on both faces go into STR-026 · the figures for every connection are in the notes beside the drawing and in the BOQ sub-items

Steel trusses (Truss) — choose the type, enter span, height and steel sizes, get quantities instantly

The Steel truss (Truss) table has its own Steel trusses tab, right after the Connections & fixings tab (it used to sit under the structural steel table) — no need to take off piece by piece: choose the type, enter the span, height and number of trusses, then choose steel sizes for 4 groups (top chord · bottom chord · diagonals/braces · verticals); the program builds the truss geometry and computes the length of every member along its centerline × kg/m of the section (TIS 1227) → total weight goes into STR-023 together with structural steel · anti-rust painting → STR-026 · bolts/gusset plates (% of weight) → STR-025 · can be unticked in the auto-calculation field · references DPT 1121 · EIT 011038 · AISC 360 · EN 1993

Group (in the drop-down)Type
Parallel chordPratt (tension diagonals sloping down toward the center) · Howe (compression diagonals) · Warren (alternating triangles, no verticals) · Warren with verticals · K-truss · Vierendeel (no diagonals, rigid joints)
Gable roofPratt gable · Howe gable · Fink (W) · Fan · King post · Queen post · Scissors (bottom chord raised into a gable)
Mono pitch · ArchedLean-to (Mono pitch — low end height ¼ H) · Bowstring arch (parabolic top chord)
  • Height = truss depth (parallel chord) or height at the highest point (gable · mono pitch · arched), measured between chord centerlines · the slope angle is shown in the drawing
  • Number of panels 0 = set from the span (≈ 1.8 m per panel) · always rounded to an even number for symmetry · Fink · Fan · King post · Queen post have fixed layouts and do not use this field
  • The end panels of gable/arched/scissors trusses, where the top and bottom chords already meet in a triangle, have no diagonals
  • Row drawing: true-proportion truss elevation colored by member group + pin/roller supports + span and height dimensions · member table (piece · length · kg/m · kg/truss) · typical gusset plate connection · under the drawing the formulas are shown group by group, with the same figures as the BOQ and the source detail page (Backup)
  • Trusses can be counted from a PDF drawing (count card → target “Steel truss”) · the floor/zone and to-floor fields work as in other tables
  • Send to roof · roofing (architecture) — a field at the end of the row; sends the roof sitting on this set of trusses to the Roof · roofing table to compute roofing: enter the truss spacing, and roof length = (number of trusses − 1) × truss spacing · shape and slope come from the truss (gable/scissors = gable atan(height ÷ half span) · mono pitch = lean-to · parallel chord = low-slope roof 2° · arched = slope equivalent to the arc length) · Auto links shape/span/length/slope to always follow this row · Custom copies once · the target row computes purlins by roofing (the truss table has no purlins); eaves default to 0 and can be edited at the target

Truss connections — welds · bolts · gusset plates (Gusset plate)

The Connection field selects the connection type, and the program computes gusset plates and bolts from the actual connections of the truss type (every joint where diagonals/verticals connect + supports) · references EIT 011038 / DPT 1121 · AISC 360 J2–J3 · EN 1993-1-8 · unticking Connection in the auto-calculation field = no connections computed

Connection typeWhat is computed → BOQ code
Bolts + single gusset plate1 gusset plate/connection → FAS-017 (kg) · bolts at every member end at the connection × number/end → code by size (A325M M12–M24 = FAS-072–076 · grade 8.8 = FAS-047–051 · S10T = FAS-120–123)
Bolts + double gusset plates (Double)gusset plates on both sides (2 plates/connection) · same number of bolts (double shear)
Weld + gusset plate (Gusset)gusset plate → FAS-017 · welds 2 × Lc per member end (length shown · weld metal and electrodes; welding cost included in STR-023)
Direct weld (no gusset plate)web members welded all round their ends to the chord (section perimeter) · suits tube/pipe trusses (AISC 360 Chapter K)
No connections (old lump-sum %)bolts/steel plates as a lump sum of 2.5% of the steel weight → STR-025 (the method before this field existed)
  • Bolt / weld: the options change with the connection type — bolts show the price code and spacing ≥ 3d · fillet welds 4–10 mm (E70xx · AWS D1.1)
  • Gusset plate (mm) 6 · 8 · 10 · 12 · 16 — ≥ 6 mm and not thinner than the connected members · bolts/member end at least 2
  • Approximate gusset plate size: length per member end Lc = (n−1)·3d + 2·1.5d (bolts) or ≥ 1.5 × member width (welds) · width = 0.10 + (connected web members + 1) × Lc · height = Lc + 0.05 + ½ chord depth (+0.10 at supports) — gusset plates painted on both faces go into STR-026
  • Row drawing: gusset plates shown on the elevation at their computed size · the connection detail changes with the type (bolts by number/end · weld lines · double-plate section) · count summary under the member table

Pre-engineered steel buildings PEB — choose the type, enter the building size and steel sizes, get quantities instantly

The Pre-engineered steel building PEB table has its own Pre-engineered buildings (PEB) tab, right after the Steel trusses tab (it used to sit in the Structural steel tab) — one row = 1 building type (can be multiplied by the number of buildings) · enter width × length × eave height · roof slope · frame spacing, then choose the section for each member group; the program computes the number of frames, lengths, weights and fixings for the whole building · references MBMA Metal Building Systems Manual · AISC Design Guide 25 (tapered members) · DPT 1121 · the figures are estimated quantities from standard configurations; actual sizes follow the PEB manufacturer's drawings

PEB frame typeFeatures · suitable for
Clear Span (CS)single span without interior columns, 10–60 m · warehouses, factories, gymnasiums
Multi-Span 1 / 2 / 3 (MS-1 · MS-2 · MS-3)1 · 2 · 3 interior columns · total width 30–80 m and more, saving main frame steel · warehouses, distribution centers
Single Slope (SS) · Multi-Span Single Slope (SM-1)single-slope roof (without or with 1 interior column) · buildings close to the property line
Lean-To (LT)extension leaning against a main building · columns on the outer side only, the inner side fixed to the existing building
Multi-Gable (MG)2 gables joined together · interior columns under the central valley gutter
Space Saver (SV)straight columns, low-slope roof ≈ 1:20 · small buildings, span ≤ 30 m (slope field limited to 5% max)
Roof System (RS)roof on columns, no walls · car parks, activity areas (no girts or wall bracing computed)
  • Main frame columns · rafters: built-up tapered sections BU 250~450 to 600~1200 — the figures are “start~end depth × flange × web × flange thickness” (mm); kg/m is computed from the average depth · interior columns choose H / I / □ / Ø from the steel tables (this field is enabled only for types with interior columns)
  • Roof purlins · wall girts (Girt): cold-formed Z / C 150–250 mm, 1.6–2.5 mm thick · purlin/girt spacing as entered · purlins add 5% for laps (Lap) · eave struts (Eave strut) use the same section as the purlins
  • X-bracing: round rods Ø16–25 · wire rope · L angles — number of cross-braced bays for roof and walls = 1 bay per 5 frame bays (at least 2 bays, at both end bays) · flange braces (Flange brace) L 50×50×4, 1 m long, at every purlin line except over the rafter, and at every girt line except over the column
  • End walls: full main frame (allows extending the building later) or Post & Beam — end wall columns and C 200×80×7.5×11 purlin-support beams, more economical when no extension is planned
  • Anchor bolt M20 · M24 · M30 SS400 or M24 F1554 Gr.55 — 4 per main frame/interior column · 2 per end wall column → codes FAS-002 / 003 / 004 / 010
  • Connections: the main frame connection and bracing connection types can be selected — plates, bolts and turnbuckles are computed from the actual connections (see PEB connections) · base plate 0.30 × 0.40 × 20 mm per column → FAS-017 in every type
  • Send to roof · roofing (architecture) — a field at the end of the row; sends the PEB roof to the Roof · roofing table to compute roof sheets, caps, barge flashing, gutters and insulation · gable → gable (Multi-Gable = number of gables × buildings, width per gable) · single slope/Lean-To → lean-to · slope % converted to degrees · roofing area equals rafter length × building length of the PEB table · Auto links shape/number/width/length/slope · Custom copies once · the target row is set to “no battens/purlins” (roof purlins are already computed in the PEB table) · default material high-rib metal sheet 0.47 mm AZ150
Member groupBOQ code
Main frame columns and rafters · interior columns · end wall framing · X-bracing · flange bracesSTR-023 structural steel (kg)
Roof purlins · eave strutsSTR-024 (kg)
Wall girts (Girt)STR-032 (kg)
Anti-rust painting of the main frame (can be unticked)STR-026 (m²)
Base plates + splice plates · bolts · turnbuckles · anchor bolts (can be unticked)FAS-017 · bolts by the selected size · FAS-055 · FAS-208–212 · FAS-217 · FAS-002/003/004/010
  • Results in the row: number of frames · main frame weight · total steel · kg/m² — under the table it is compared with the typical PEB range of 15–35 kg/m² as a reasonableness check (example CS 30 × 60 m, eave height 8 m, frame spacing 7.5 m ≈ 37,450 kg ≈ 20.8 kg/m²)
  • Roof and wall areas are shown for reference only and are not counted twice — enter the roof/wall metal sheets in the architectural roof/wall tables
  • Row drawings: main frame section (tapered columns and rafters · interior columns · purlins/girts · roof slope) · roof plan (frame lines · cross-braced bays · purlin lines) · member table with BOQ codes — the same figures that flow into the BOQ · the structural steel card at the top already includes the PEB weight

PEB connections — end plates · splice plates · welds · bracing gussets · purlin cleats

The Main frame connection field applies to every frame connection (column-rafter knee · ridge · interior column head · rafter splices about every 12 m by transport length · the Lean-To's connection to the existing building) · references AISC Design Guide 4 / 16 (end plates) · MBMA · AISC 360 Chapter J · EN 1993-1-8 · AWS D1.1 · EIT 011038 / DPT 1121 · changing the type sets the bolt/weld, plate thickness and bolts/connection defaults for you (can be edited further)

Main frame connectionWhat is computed → BOQ code
Extended end plate, 4 bolts/flange (Extended 4E)2 end plates/connection, width b + 20 mm · height d + 40 mm + extension 3.5db → FAS-017 · 8 bolts/connection → code by size — the standard PEB manufacturer detail at the column-rafter knee
Extended end plate + stiffeners (Extended 8ES)extension 6db + 2 triangular stiffeners/connection · 16 bolts/connection — high moment, wide spans, with cranes
Flush end plate (Flush End Plate)plate not extending beyond the flanges, height d + 40 mm · 8 bolts/connection — ridge/rafter splices at low moment
Flange-web splice plates (Bolted Splice)2 flange splice plates + 2 web plates (half thickness) · 16 bolts/connection
Field complete joint penetration weld (CJP Weld)CJP flange welds + web fillets on both sides (length shown · welding cost included in STR-023 · UT inspection) · temporary erection plate + 2 A325M M16 bolts/connection → FAS-073
No connections (old lump-sum %)splice plates as a lump sum % of the main frame (“lump-sum splice plates” field) + 8 A325M M20 bolts/connection → FAS-074 — the method before this field existed (old rows without a connection value are computed this way)
  • Bolt / weld: A325M M12–M24 (FAS-072–076) · grade 8.8 (FAS-047–051) · S10T (FAS-120–123) or CJP + web fillets 6/8/10 mm · end/splice plate 12 · 16 · 20 · 25 · 32 mm
  • Column stiffeners at the knee (Continuity plate) 4 plates/knee (b − tw)/2 × (d − 2tf), computed for every connection type
  • Bracing connections: gusset plate + bolts (angles: 2 A325M M16 bolts/end → FAS-073 · rods threaded through a hole with double nuts) · welded gusset plate (fillet 2 × 100 mm/end) · Hillside washer passed through the frame web, no plate (rods/wire rope only — changing to angles reverts to a gusset automatically) · gusset 0.20 × 0.25 m (angles) / 0.15 × 0.20 m (rods/wire rope), thickness per the Gusset (mm) field → FAS-017
  • Turnbuckles 1 per bracing member: rod Ø16 → FAS-209 · Ø20 → FAS-210 · Ø25 → FAS-212 · wire rope Ø12 → FAS-208 + 3 wire rope clips/end → FAS-217
  • Purlin/girt cleats (Cleat) at every purlin line crossing a frame line, plate 0.10 × (purlin depth + 30 mm), 6 mm thick → FAS-017 · 4 A307 ½" bolts/cleat + 2 per flange brace → FAS-055
  • Splice plates/gussets painted on both faces go into STR-026 (galvanized purlin cleats are not painted) · the row drawing has connection details in 3 panels by the selected type: main frame connection · bracing connection + turnbuckle · purlin cleat

Cellular · Castellated beams — pick a type, enter the parent section, get quantities instantly

The table has its own Cellular beams tab, right after the Pre-engineered buildings (PEB) tab (it used to sit in the Structural steel tab) — the beam is made from a parent section by cutting the web along a profile, shifting one half by half a cell and welding it back together, giving a beam 1.4–2.0 times deeper with web openings for routing services · one row = beams of one type (multiplied by the number of beams) · references SCI P355 · AISC Design Guide 31 · EN 1993-1-1 · ArcelorMittal ACB / Angelina · DPT 1121 · TIS 1227

Beam typeCharacteristics · finished beam depth Dg
Cellular, circular openings (Cellular · ACB/Westok)circular opening a0 ≈ d · opening spacing s ≈ 1.4a0 · Dg = d + a0/2 (≈ 1.5d) · two curved cut lines, leaving offcuts between openings ≈ 4%
Asymmetric cellular (Asymmetric)top and bottom tees cut from parent sections of different sizes (choose in the Bottom tee section field) · composite floor beams
Tapered cellular (Tapered)depth varies from Dg down to the small end set in the Small end (% Dg) field · weight taken at the average depth
Curved cellular (Curved)bent to a curve after cutting · enter Camber/curve (mm) = rise at midspan → length along the arc L(1 + 8/3·(f/L)²)
Angelina, sinusoidal openings (Angelina)a single sinusoidal cut line, no offcut · elongated openings with rounded ends s ≈ 2a0 · opening area = a0·s/2
Castellated, hexagonal openings (Peiner/Litzka)60° zigzag cut · Dg = 1.5d · s = 2e + a0·cot60° · no offcut (waste only at the beam ends)
Castellated + infill plate (Expanded)an infill plate of height p is inserted mid-web (default 0.25d) · octagonal openings · Dg = d + (a0 + p)/2, up to 1.75–2.0d
  • Parent section: narrow/medium-flange H to TIS 1227 (JIS) · IPE / HEA (EN 10365) · UB (BS 4-1) and the H/I sections in the steel table — the options show kg/m and the approximate Dg
  • Opening a0 and opening spacing s: enter 0 = calculated by the program from the type (the value used is shown below the field) · or enter your own per the manufacturer's design · geometry is checked to SCI P355 / AISC DG 31: a0 ≤ 0.8Dg · web post ≥ 0.25a0 · tee depth ≥ tf + 30 mm · Dg/d ≤ 1.6 (with infill plate ≤ 2.0) — failures are shown in red below the field
  • Number of openings = ⌊(length − 2a0)/s⌋ + 1 (first opening a0 from the beam end) · Finished beam weight = (top flange + bottom flange + web over the depth) × length − openings × web thickness × 7,850 × root-radius factor of the section → STR-023 · mid-web infill plate → STR-023 · also shows the parent section weight required (length + s/2) and the cutting offcut
  • Infilled openings/beam (web filled solid at openings near supports/point loads) · Stiffener pairs/beam → plate FAS-017
  • Beam end connection and Mid-span splice can be bolted, welded or gusset plate (see Cellular beam connections)
  • Anti-rust paint = surface around the section perimeter − openings on both faces + opening edges → STR-026 (including both faces of plates) · the structural steel card at the top already includes the cellular beam weight
  • Row drawing: beam elevation to scale (long beams show the end portions) with infilled openings, stiffeners, end plates and dimension lines Dg · a0 · s · parent section + cut line · section A–A through a web post · B–B through an opening · quantity table · connection details in 2 panels (beam end · mid-span splice) according to the selected type

Cellular beam connections — bolted · welded · gusset plate · mid-span splice

References SCI P358 (simple shear connections) · AISC 360 Chapter J · AISC Design Guide 16 · Uniform Force Method (gusset) · AWS D1.1 · EIT 011038 / DPT 1121 · when you change the connection type, the Bolt / weld field switches its options to match the type and Bolts/end is set to a default (still editable)

Beam end connection (2 ends/beam)What is calculated → BOQ code
Partial-depth end plate (Shear end plate)plate b × 0.6Dg → FAS-017 · 4 bolts/end → code by size
Full-depth end plate (Moment end plate)plate (b + 20) × (Dg + 100 mm) · 8 bolts/end
Fin plate (bolted)fin 0.12 × 0.6Dg welded to the column · 3 bolts/end through the beam web
Welded fin platesame fin · beam web welded to the fin on 3 sides + fin welded to the column (weld length shown) · 2 temporary erection bolts A325M M16 → FAS-073
Double angle cleatL 100×100×10, length 0.6Dg, 2 per end → STR-023 · 6 bolts/end
Full-penetration welded (CJP welded moment)CJP flanges 2b + fillet welds on both sides of the web 2(Dg − 2tf) per end · erection plate 0.10 × ½Dg · backing bar 25 × 6 mm · UT inspection · 2 erection bolts → FAS-073
Gusset plate + boltsgusset (0.6Dg + 0.15)² × 0.75 shop-welded to the beam flange · brace/column bolted with 8 bolts/end — beam-column-brace connection
Welded gusset plategusset welded to the beam flange and the column (2× weld length) · brace field-welded · 2 erection bolts → FAS-073
Mid-span splice (at a web post)What is calculated → BOQ code
Flange and web splice plates + bolts (Bolted splice)2 flange plates + 2 web plates (half the thickness) · 16 bolts/splice
End plate splice2 end plates (b + 20) × (Dg + 40 mm) · 8 bolts/splice
Full-penetration butt weld (CJP splice)flanges + web welded with full penetration · 2 backing bars · UT inspection · 2 erection bolts/splice
  • Splices/beam: enter 0 = automatic ⌈length ÷ 12⌉ − 1 splices (transport length) — a 30 m beam = 2 splices · with welded beam ends the splices use A325M M20 bolts
  • Connection plate (mm) 10–25 applies to end plates, fins, gussets, erection plates and splice plates → FAS-017, with both faces painted into STR-026
  • Welds show their length per beam in the item list and below the drawing (welding cost is included in STR-023) · weld leg as selected (fillet 4–10 mm or CJP + web fillet)

Timber works tab — pick a timber structure type and species, enter sizes, get timber volume instantly

The Timber works tab comes after Connections & fixings — one row = 1 set of timber work (can be multiplied by a quantity) · choose a Timber structure type and the program sets default sizes, spacings and dimensions the Member 1–4 fields change meaning by type (the dropdown shows the member name, e.g. “Rafter · 2×6 in”), and the hint under the number fields explains what length/width/height/spacing mean for that type · references DPT 1201 (timber building design) · AS 1684 / NZS 3604 (timber framing) · AS 1720.1 · EN 1995 (Eurocode 5) · EN 14080 (Glulam) · AS/NZS 4357 (LVL)

TypeMembers 1 · 2 · 3 · 4 — how they are calculated
Timber roof frame, gable / hiprafters · ridge (+ hips) · battens/purlins · king posts + struts — same geometry as the steel roof frame (length along the ridge × width · eaves · pitch)
Timber trusstop and bottom chords · diagonals/verticals · purlins/battens · lateral bracing — choose king post/queen post/Fink/Howe … number of trusses = ⌈length ÷ truss spacing⌉ + 1 · nail plate at every joint
Timber floor on joists and beams · timber deck/terracejoists · bearers · blocking (every 2.4 m) · posts (deck · embedded/footing 0.60 m) + floor boards/decking with gaps, or panel flooring/OSB
Stud wallstuds (+ jamb studs at openings) · double top plate + bottom plate · noggings every 1.2 m · lintels over openings · OSB sheathing on 1–2 sides
Timber ceiling framemain runners · ceiling battens · hangers every 1.2 m (ceiling boards are taken off in the ceiling table)
Post & Beamposts (grid of bays in two directions) · beams/bearers in two directions · 2 knee braces/post · steel post base + 4 ½" bolts/post
Single timber pieces (choose size × length)a single timber size — length/piece × quantity · no breakdown into members · used to take off timber one size at a time from a timber schedule, or sent from the Timber tables menu · 2 end joints/piece
Timber fence · timber stairfence: posts (embedded 0.60) · 2–3 rails · vertical pickets · cap rail — stair: 2–3 stringers · treads · risers (≤ 0.175 m) · handrail
  • Species/grade → code: hardwood STR-255 · medium hardwood STR-256 · imported pine, H3 treated STR-257 (ft³) · Glulam STR-258 · LVL/CLT STR-259 (m³) · Thai timber uses sizes in inches and is calculated in ft³ = in × in × length (m) × 3.2808 ÷ 144 (e.g. 2×4 in, 4 m long = 0.73 ft³) · imported pine/Glulam/LVL use sizes in mm · changing the species converts sizes in ↔ mm to the nearest equivalent · “pair” = two pieces sandwiched together
  • Spacing 1–3: enter 0 = default for the type · Waste allowance left blank = default by species (sawn timber 8–10% · Glulam/LVL 5%) · stairs show a red warning when the riser > 0.18 m or the tread < 0.25 m
  • Auto-calculate: wood preservative (surface around the section perimeter → STR-261) · joints·fixings (per the selected joint type — see the next section) · paint/stain (→ ARC-041) · area-based floor boards/cladding → ARC-111 / STR-262 / ARC-106 (if the same room already has a timber floor chosen in the room table, set this to “None” to avoid double counting)
  • Codes STR-255 – STR-263 are new and have no price in the median price database yet — set a price on the price database page before use · they are placed under sub-category STR.07 (timber formwork and shoring) until a timber works category is added to the 3-level work categories
  • Row drawings (drafting to ISO 128 / DPT): ① plan/elevation by type — centred and symmetrical · grid bubbles on beam/post/wall lines · section line A–A · two-tier dimension lines (continuous sub-dimensions “n @ spacing” + overall dimension) · level symbol ▽ · ② section A–A / elevation / assembly plan — member labels with sizes · floor/top plate/ridge/ground levels · floors and decks show the first joist span A–B at a large scale with break lines · RC post/fence footings · ③ timber member schedule (size · pieces · total length · ft³ · m³) · ④ cross-sections of every member at the same scale · ⑤ timber connection details, 3 symmetrical views by type — a joint elevation · b section/plan of fastener positions · c hardware detail (nail L × d · bolt + washer Ø ≥ 3d · nail plate on both faces · joist hanger · fully threaded screw · 10 mm slotted-in plate + dowels · tenon t/3 + timber peg) with edge distances/spacings per EN 1995 §8 (≥ 4d · 5d · 7d · 10d in mm) and the total number of joints/fasteners

Timber connections — nails · bolts · nail plates · proprietary steel connectors · timber screws · slotted-in steel plates · traditional joinery

References DPT 1201 (timber) · EN 1995-1-1 (Eurocode 5) §8 · AS 1720.1 / AS 1720.5 (nail plates) · AS 1684 · ANSI/TPI 1 · EN 14592 (timber screws) · the program counts joints from the geometry of the type (not a lump sum by volume) and multiplies by the joint type · calculated when Joints·fixings is ticked in the auto-calculate field · changing the type sets the Nail / bolt / screw and Pieces/joint fields to the defaults for that type (editable) · choosing a new structure type selects the joint type commonly used for it

Joint typeWhat is calculated → BOQ code
Lump sum by timber volume (legacy)nails 0.25 kg/ft³ → STR-260 + steel hardware by type → STR-263 + ½" bolts → FAS-055 · existing rows with no joint type selected use this (same figures as before)
Nailedmain joints × 6 nails/joint × nail weight (2½" 3.5 g · 3" 4.8 g · 4" 9.5 g · 5" 16 g) → STR-260 (kg) · edge distance ≥ 10d · houses/roofs/walls/ceilings/fences
Bolts + washers (Bolted)main joints × 2 bolts/joint → A307 ½" FAS-055 · 5/8" FAS-056 · ¾" FAS-057 · 8.8 M12 FAS-047 · M16 FAS-048 · washer Ø ≥ 3d · edge distance ≥ 4d · decks/post and beam
Nail plate (Gang-nail)main joints × 2 plates (pressed on both faces) → STR-263 (set) · prefabricated timber trusses
Proprietary steel connectors (joist hanger · angle bracket · strap)1 set/joint → STR-263 + 10 fixing nails/joint → STR-260 · joist to beam · stairs · wind uplift resistance
Structural timber screws (Structural screw)main joints × 4 screws × screw weight (6×100 · 8×160 · 8×240 · 10×300 mm) → STR-260 (kg) · Glulam/CLT/LVL
Slotted-in steel plate + dowels (Knife plate · Dowel)steel plate 0.25 × 0.30 × 10 mm (5.9 kg) per joint → FAS-017 + 6 dowels/bolts per joint by the selected code · concealed connections for long-span Glulam
Traditional joinery (tenon · notch · wedge · timber peg)adds 5% timber for tenons/shoulders to the timber volume · 2 timber pegs/joint (count shown · joinery cost included in the timber price) · Thai houses/pavilions
  • Main joints (counted per set): roof = rafter apex/ridge + rafter seat on the top plate + king post-strut · truss = joints in the truss × number of trusses + truss on wall 2/truss · floor/deck = joist on beam + blocking (+ deck posts) · wall = studs top and bottom + opening sides · ceiling = hangers at 2 ends · post and beam = post head + post base + braces at 4 ends · fence = posts × rails · stair = treads/risers on stringers + top and bottom of stringers
  • Light member fixings (battens · purlins · ceiling battens · noggings · floor boards · fence pickets) take 2 × 3-inch nails/fixing for every joint type → STR-260
  • Stud walls have bottom plate anchor bolts A307 ½" every 1.20 m → FAS-055 for every joint type · every figure is given in the notes beside the drawing, in drawing ⑤ and in the BOQ sub-items

Stainless steel tab — pick a work type, grade and finish, enter sizes and sections, get stainless weight instantly

The Stainless steel tab comes after Aluminium — one row = 1 set/run/leaf/post/sheet of work (can be multiplied by a quantity) · choose a Work type (the dropdown is colour-grouped by category: guardrails · handrails · gates-fences · sheets-counters · external works · components) and the program fills in the default sizes, sections, spacings and fixing for that type, all editable · the Section 1–3 fields change meaning by type (the hint below shows the role, e.g. handrail · baluster post · infill bar) · fields the type does not use are greyed out · references ASTM A554 / JIS G3446 (ornamental tube) · EN 10296-2 (Ø42.4 handrail tube) · ASTM A276 / A484 (round bar, flat bar, angle) · ASTM A240 / JIS G4305 (sheet) · Ministerial Regulation No. 55 and the 2021 Ministerial Regulation on facilities for persons with disabilities · BS 6180 · IBC 1015

TypeSections 1 · 2 · 3 — how they are calculated
Guardrail, round tubehandrail (rail length) · posts (rail length ÷ post spacing + 1 posts × height) · mid-rails (every “Spacing 2” from the floor to below the top rail) · accessories = post cover + 2 end caps
Guardrail, vertical balusterstop rail + bottom rail · posts · balusters every “bar spacing” (excluding post positions) — a clear gap between bars over 0.10 m turns the field red
Guardrail, safety glass / frameless glasshandrail · posts + 4 glass clamps/panel — frameless: folded-plate U-channel glass shoe 60×120 mm (choose thickness) with anchors every 0.30 m · glass = length × (height − 0.15) → ARC-180 (6+6) / ARC-181 (8+8 · 10+10)
Guardrail, wire cablehandrail · posts (≤ 1.20 m) · 316 Ø5 mm cables every “cable spacing” (≤ 0.08 m), length × 1.05 → ARC-182 · swage fitting + turnbuckle 2 pieces/cable → ARC-183
Wall handrail · accessible handrailhandrail (+0.30 m return into the wall) · brackets every “bracket spacing” — accessible: extends 0.30 m beyond each end · number of rail lines (default 2 lines at heights of 0.65 and 0.80–0.90 m)
Gate / door leaf · fenceleaf frame 2 × (width + height) · vertical bars · mid-rail (leaves taller than 1.20 m) · 2 hinges + 1 latch per leaf — fence: posts · top and bottom rails · vertical bars
Countertop / tabletop sheet with 40 mm folded edge + 100 mm upstand at the back · under-top frame · legs (spacing ≤ 1.80 m) · undershelf (number of shelves = “Spacing 2”) — height 0 = top sits on a cabinet, no legs or frame counted
Wall cladding sheet / kick plate · corner guard · stainless sheetsheet area × thickness × density (20 mm folded edges on two sides · two-leg angle) → sheet by grade ARC-175 / 176 / 177
Drainage channel gratingflat-bar bearing bars every “Spacing 2” lengthwise · angle bearing frame all round · round-bar cross ties every “Spacing 1”
Canopy · flagpole · bollard · single piecescanopy: perimeter frame · cantilever rafters · tie rods + glass (choose “None” if covered in the roof table) — flagpole: tube stepping down at 50/30/20% of the height + 400×400×12 base plate — bollard: embedded 0.15 m in concrete + cap — single pieces: section × length × number of pieces
  • Weight = total length × kg/m of the section (round tube π(D − t)t·ρ · square/rectangular tube 2(a + b − 2t)t·ρ · round bar πd²/4·ρ · flat bar b·t·ρ · angle (2a − t)t·ρ) · sheet = area × thickness × ρ · the section dropdown shows kg/m for the row's grade · Waste allowance left blank = 5%
  • Grade → code (tube/profile · sheet): SUS304 ρ 7.93 → ARC-170 / ARC-175 · SUS316L ρ 7.98 (seaside · swimming pools) → ARC-171 / ARC-176 · SUS201 ρ 7.80 (interior) → ARC-172 / ARC-177 · SUS430 ρ 7.70 → ARC-173 / ARC-177 · Duplex 2205 ρ 7.80 → ARC-174 / ARC-176
  • Finish: Hairline · No.4 · 2B/BA are included in the price per kg · Mirror No.8 → ARC-178 and PVD colour coating → ARC-179 are calculated on the full surface area around each piece
  • Fixing (per point = post/bracket/table leg): base plate 100×100×6 + 4 stainless ½" wedge anchors (FAS-277) · side-mount plate 80×150×8 + 2 anchors · embedded in concrete + M12 chemical anchor (FAS-286) · wall bracket + 2 ⅜" drop-in anchors (FAS-436) · flagpole plate + 4 sets of M16 chemical anchors (FAS-287) — base plates are counted as stainless sheet of the same grade
  • Auto-calculate: special finish (Mirror/PVD) · plates·anchors · glass·cables·rail accessories — untick when priced separately or already included in the supplier's price
  • Codes ARC-170 – ARC-183 use market median prices of Nov 2569 (materials + labour for cutting, bending, welding, polishing and installation) and sit in work category ARC.10 Stairs, railings and miscellaneous metalwork · adjust them from quotations on the price database page · counts can be taken from PDF drawings with the Stainless steel chip · the SketchUp/Revit plugins send pieces whose names contain stainless/SUS304 (or the Thai word for stainless) into this table
  • Row drawings (drafting to ISO 128 · not to scale): ① plan · ② elevation · ③ section A–A · ④ enlarged member cross-sections (size in mm · kg/m by grade) · ⑤ quantity table (same figures as the BOQ) — guardrails/fences space posts evenly along the whole run; runs longer than 6 bays are broken to show the first 3 bays + the last bay · the section shows the fixing (base plate · side mount · embedded in concrete) · handrails show the 50 mm clearance from the wall and the 0.30 m extension · gratings show the slots · flagpoles show the stepped tube lengths · single pieces include a cutting plan from 6 m stock lengths · bar/cable gaps over 100 mm or a rail lower than 0.90 m show a red message on the drawing

Aluminium tab — pick a work type, finish and glass, enter sizes and sections, get aluminium weight and quantities instantly

The Aluminium tab comes after Interior built-in works — one row = 1 set/leaf/wall of work (can be multiplied by a quantity) · choose a Work type (colour groups: doors-windows · glass walls · cladding-ceilings · sun shading-ventilation · railings-components) and the program fills in default sizes, sections, spacings, glass and fixing, all editable · the Section 1–3 fields change meaning by type · references EN 573 / EN 755 (6063-T5) · AAMA 611 / 2603 / 2604 / 2605 (finishes) · AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101 (windows) · EN 13830 (curtain walling) · ASTM C1036 · TIS 965 / TIS 1222 (glass) · ASTM C920 / C1184 (sealants) · Ministerial Regulation No. 55 (guardrails)

TypeSections 1 · 2 · 3 — how they are calculated
Sliding window · casement/awning window · fixed lightframe 2 × (width + height) · sash 2 × (width/number of sashes + height) per sash · fixed lights divided into panes of width ≤ 1.2, height ≤ 1.8 m · glass = width × height less the frame · sealant inside and outside 4 × (width + height) · 1 hardware set/sash · insect screen (sliding: half the opening · casement: full opening) · frame fixing screws every 0.40 m
Sliding door · swing doorframe (swing door 3 sides, no threshold) · leaf frame · bottom track · tempered glass · 1 hardware set/leaf
Storefront glass wall · curtain wall · partitionmullions ⌈length ÷ mullion spacing⌉ + 1 × height · transoms ⌈height ÷ transom spacing⌉ + 1 lines × length · glass over the full area · sealant 2 × (mullions + transoms) · curtain wall anchored at each slab edge (3.5 m) · partition with top and bottom tracks + mid transom, glass in the upper 1.00 m
ACP wall · aluminium panel · aluminium ceilingvertical sub-frame @ 0.6 + horizontal sub-frame @ 1.2 m · ACP 4 mm area × 1.08 (folded edges) → ARC-194 · aluminium panel area × 1.10 × thickness × 2.70 → ARC-195 · joint grooves per 1.22 × 2.44 m panel · ceiling area → ARC-119 + hanger rails @ 1.2 m
Vertical/horizontal sun-shading fins · louvresfins ⌈length ÷ fin spacing⌉ + 1 · 2 brackets/fin (horizontal: vertical posts carry the blades) · Z 75 louvres @ 60 mm + insect mesh
Guardrail · screen door · single pieces · sheetrailing: top and bottom rails · posts · balusters with clear gap ≤ 0.10 m (red when exceeded) · screen door: frame + mesh · single pieces: section × length × quantity
  • Method: Itemised components (default) = profiles in kg + glass + sealant + hardware + insect screen + screws/anchors · Lump sum per unit = the existing finished-work codes (sliding window ARC-035 · awning window ARC-036 · fixed light/storefront ARC-037 per m² · sliding door ARC-033 · swing door ARC-130 per set · partition ARC-104 · ACP ARC-139 · sun shading/louvres ARC-140 · ceiling ARC-119) components are shown for reference but do not go into the BOQ — if doors and windows are already taken off in the Doors & windows table, do not enter them again here
  • Elevation · section (click the icon at the end of the row): ① plan ② elevation seen from outside ③ section A–A with enlarged top and bottom details (middle portion broken out) ④ enlarged member cross-sections with kg/m ⑤ quantity table (same totals as the BOQ) · leaves/glass panes/panels/fins/posts divided evenly along the run (symmetrical) · arrows = sliding direction · dashed triangle with apex pointing to the hinge side · very long walls or railings show the first 3 bays + break + the last bay · members coloured by the selected finish (wood grain shown in wood colour) · curtain walls show slab-edge brackets + fire-stop insulation · ceilings show a reflected ceiling plan · single pieces show a cutting plan from 6.00 m lengths
  • Weight = total length × kg/m · 6063-T5 ρ 2.70 · box 2(a + b − 2t)t·ρ · frame/sash = equivalent box × 1.25 (glazing pockets/fins) · fins/louvre blades b·t·ρ × 1.2 · round tube π(D − t)t·ρ · angle (2a − t)t·ρ · channel (a + 2b − 2t)t·ρ — check against the manufacturer's catalogue before ordering · Waste allowance left blank = 5%
  • Finish → profile code: anodised/mill finish ARC-185 · powder coat ARC-186 · PVDF/wood grain ARC-187 · Glass: clear/tinted 6 mm ARC-188 · tempered ARC-189 · laminated ARC-190 · Low-E IGU ARC-191
  • Auto-calculate (can be unticked): screws·anchors/brackets (stainless screws FAS-433 every 0.40 m · brackets + wedge anchors FAS-277) · sealant·gaskets ARC-192 · leaf hardware ARC-193 · insect screen ARC-197
  • Codes ARC-185 – ARC-197 use market median prices of Nov 2569 · profiles, glass, sealant and hardware are in category ARC.07 Doors, windows and hardware · ACP/aluminium panels are in category ARC.08 External walls and glass walls · counts can be taken from drawings with the Aluminium chip · the plugins send pieces whose names contain aluminium/ACP/louver/curtain wall (or the Thai word for aluminium) into this table

Rebar schedule — cross-section · bar surface detail · full-bar elevation

Click the drawing icon of a row in the Rebar schedule tab to get three views for the selected size (same set as structural steel)

  • Section A–A (enlarged) — diameter marked Ø · steel hatching · centre lines · DB shows the two longitudinal ribs and the transverse ribs as a dashed ring · cross-sectional area stated
  • Bar surface detail (enlarged) — DB with inclined transverse ribs at a spacing not exceeding 0.7Ø (TIS 24) and longitudinal ribs · RB plain surface (TIS 20) · break lines at both ends, cutting plane A–A
  • Full-bar elevation — length shortened with break lines, dimension line for Length each as entered · RB with standard 180° hooks, extension 4Ø but not less than 60 mm · below the drawing: members × bars/member = number of bars
  • The sheet footer gives the weight in kg/m · bar bending shapes and detailed cut lengths are on the Bar-cut plan page

Connections · bolts · fixings (taken off by fixing point)

The Connections & fixings tab (formerly Fixings) follows Structural steel and is used to take off bolts and fixings from the details in the drawings — steel column base plates · steel structure connections · pipe or cable tray hanger runs · roof/wall screws · anchors and general fixing points every row picks an item from the Bolts, nuts and fixings category (FAS-001–444, see section 10) · when you change the fixing type, the system sets the default item, pieces/point, dimensions and accessory for that type, all still editable · the quantity and dimension fields mean different things by type, so every row has a hint below the fields (e.g. “hanger spacing” or “plate thickness”)

Fixing typeEnterSystem calculates
Steel column base
(Anchor Bolt + plate)
quantity = bases · pieces/point = bolts per base · dimensions 1 × 2 × 3 = width × length × plate thickness (m) bolts = bases × bolts/base · plate (kg) = bases × width × length × thickness × 7,850 · bolt setting template FAS-019, one set per base (can be unticked)
Shear connection (Shear Connection)
Moment connection (Moment Connection)
Bracing connection (Bracing Connection)
Lap / butt splice (Splice)
Stiffener / column web plate (Stiffener)
quantity = connections · pieces/point = bolts per connection · connection plates take dimensions 1–3 and a chosen accessory · the connection type field shows only the types of that category (see type table) bolts = connections × bolts/connection · connection plates are weighed the same way as base plates (× plates/point of the type) — the same formula for every category
Steel structure connection (bolted)
combined type · legacy rows
same as the categorised connection types, but any of the 23 types can be chosen — rows made earlier still work, totals unchanged bolts = connections × bolts/connection · connection plates are weighed the same way as base plates · for new rows, choosing a categorised type above is recommended
Pipe hanger / cable trayquantity = runs · dimension 1 = run length · dimension 2 = hanger spacing · dimension 3 = threaded rod length per point hanger points = runs × (⌈length ÷ hanger spacing⌉ + 1) · hangers = points × pieces/point · threaded rod (m) = points × length per point (× rods/point of the type) · anchors = points × anchors/point of the type
Roof / wall sheet fixingquantity = faces/sheets · dimension 1 × 2 = width × length · pieces/point = screws per m² (metal sheet 5–6) screws = area × screws/m² · anchors (if selected) = one per screw
General fixing (count points)quantity = points · pieces/point = items per pointitems = points × items per point · anchors/end fixings (if selected) = points × pieces/point of the type (pipe clamp 2 · guy wire 6 clips)

Per-point multiplier of the type — some types use more than one component per point; the system multiplies for you and writes it in the formula below the drawing and in the Excel sheet: steel plates (BFP 2 · Stiffened Seat 2 · Column Stiffener 4 · Bearing Stiffener 2 plates/point) · threaded rod (Trapeze 2 rods/point) · anchors/end fixings (Trapeze 2 · seismic brace 2 · Riser Clamp 2 · pipe clamp 2 · guy wire 6 clips/point)

Accessory is calculated in the unit of the selected code — kg codes (plates) = weight from the size · m codes (threaded rod) = points × dimension 3 · piece-count codes = one per point · the grey columns show fixing points · main item · accessory · anchors · every item sits under Structural engineering works in the BOQ (work category STR.10 Steel structure · form ties/tie rods STR.07 Formwork) and the sub-items can be expanded to show which row they came from (label Fixing points)

Row elevation · section (click the icon at the end of the row, or click the row — see Elevation · section) drawn by fixing type from the row's actual values with the bolt size taken from the code name (e.g. M20 × 500 mm):

  • Steel column base — plate plan (bolts per base, placed at the corners or on two sides + H column) · section (pedestal · levelling grout · plate · nut + washer · cast-in bolt with bent end, length per code)
  • All connection categories / steel structure connections — drawn by connection type (see Row drawings) · legacy rows with no type: connection elevation (members on both sides · splice plate · bolt grid) · bolt section (head · two plies · washer · nut · Ø and length)
  • Pipe hanger / cable tray — hanger run elevation (hanger points at actual spacing · run length · threaded rod) · section by fixing type (see Fixing types)
  • Roof / wall sheet fixing — sheet plan with screw positions per m² · section by type (crest fixed · concealed clip · valley fixed · insulated panel · board · gypsum)
  • General fixing — number of points × items per point · section by fixing type, or “General” = by product group (concrete anchors · lifting eyes · pipe clamps · general bolts)

Below the drawing is a list of dimensions by type (with the full name of the selected item) and the formula the system uses — the figures match the totals flowing into the BOQ

Choose fixing type → connection type (two steps)

Fixing types are split by the connection classification of EN 1993-1-8 §5.2 and AISC 360 §B3.4 — choose the category first, and the Connection type field then shows only the types of that category · options in both fields share the same category colour and have a description under the name (when to use · number of types) · changing the category resets the type to that category's default

Fixing type (colour)Use whenSelectable connection types · default
Steel column base (grey)steel column on a pedestalSimple Base Plate · Stiffened Base Plate
Shear connection (blue)pinned joint — transfers shear only (simple-span beams, secondary beams) Clip Angle · Single Angle · Shear Tab · End Plate beam-to-beam (Full / Partial Depth) · Seated Angle · Stiffened Seat · Tee Shear (WT) · beam-to-beam, welded all round — 9 types
Moment connection (red)rigid/semi-rigid joint — rigid frames, warehouses, seismic-resisting frames End Plate (Moment) · Flush End Plate · Stiffened End Plate 8ES · Bolted Flange Plate · Welded Moment · RBS · Haunch — 7 types
Bracing connection (green)X diagonal bracing / wind bracing / frame cornersGusset Plate · Corner Bracing · Welded Gusset — 3 types
Lap / butt splice (gold)joining beams/columns in lineSplice Plate · Welded Splice (Butt Weld) — 2 types
Stiffener / column web plate (purple)columns/beams under concentrated forces — add a row paired with the moment connection Column Stiffener (Continuity + Doubler) · Bearing Stiffener — 2 types
Steel structure connection (combined type)legacy rows / unsure of the categoryall 23 types (default Splice Plate, matching the original drawing of legacy rows)
Pipe hanger / cable tray (grey)MEP services — pipes · cable trays · ducts Clevis Hanger · Band Hanger · Trapeze · Beam Clamp · Seismic Brace · Riser Clamp — 6 types
Roof / wall sheet fixing (grey)roof/wall/ceiling sheets — screws per m² Through-Fastened · Concealed Clip (Klip-Lok) · Wall Cladding · Sandwich Panel · Fiber Cement Board · Gypsum Board — 6 types
General fixing (count points) (grey)anchors · lifting points · clamps · cables — counted as points General (by item group) · Wedge · Sleeve · Drop-in · Chemical · Cast-in · Hollow Wall · Plastic Plug · Pipe Clamp · Lifting Point · Guy Wire — 11 types

Fixing types — hangers · sheet fixing · general fixing

The fixing kinds other than steel connections have the same Type field — once chosen, the system sets the default main item · pieces/point (or pieces/m²) · hanger spacing · accessory · anchors/end fixing (it does not change the run length or area already entered) · the section changes with the type · rows made earlier get the first type of their kind, totals unchanged

TypeUse whenDefaults · reference standards
Pipe hanger / cable tray
Clevis Hangersingle horizontal pipeFAS-232 clevis hanger · @2 m · 3/8" threaded rod 0.6 m · drop-in anchor · MSS SP-58 Type 1
Band Hangersmall pipes · conduits · sprinklersFAS-240 band hanger · @1.5 m · NFPA 13 · MSS SP-58 Type 10
Trapezeseveral pipes/cable trays on a shared run2 U-bolts/point · @2.4 m · 1/2" threaded rod × 2 · 2 anchors · the support beam is taken off in the structural steel table
Beam Clamphanging from steel beams/roof framing (no drilling into slabs)end fixing field = beam flange clamp FAS-225 · MSS SP-58 Type 21–30
Seismic Braceseismic-resistant buildings (main pipes/trays)brace spacing 12 m · diagonal brace ≈45° · 2 anchors/point · NFPA 13 §18.5 · ASCE 7 §13.6 · DPT 1301/1302-61
Riser Clampvertical pipes in shaftsFAS-253 riser clamp · every 3.5 m (per storey) · 2 anchors · MSS SP-58 Type 8
Roof / wall sheet fixing
Through-Fastenedordinary corrugated metal sheet roofs#12×45 screws + EPDM 6/m² at the crests · sheet manufacturer's manual · AS 1562.1
Concealed Clipclip-lock / standing seam roofs (sheet not penetrated)3 clip screws/m² (clips supplied with the sheet) · ASTM E1592
Wall Claddingmetal sheet walls on girts#12×25 screws 4/m² in the valleys · AS 1562.1
Sandwich PanelPU/EPS insulated panels for roofs/cold room walls#14×75 screws 4/m² (length ≥ panel thickness + 25 mm) · EN 14509
Fiber Cement Boardfibre cement/SmartBoard on stud framingFAS-324 15/m² · TIS 1427
Gypsum Boardgypsum ceilings/walls on C-channel framingblack screws #6×1¼" 16/m² · ASTM C840
General fixing (count points)
Generalno type specified — drawn by the selected item groupdoes not change the item already selected
Wedge · Sleeve · Drop-inmechanical anchors in concrete (tension/shear · medium duty · internal thread for hanging)FAS-272 · FAS-281 · FAS-264 (+ M10 bolt) · ACI 318 Ch.17 · ACI 355.2 · EAD 330232
Chemical · Cast-inhigh loads/close edge distance · cast in before pouringFAS-285 chemical anchor · FAS-418 cast-in socket · ACI 355.4 · EAD 330499
Hollow Wall · Plastic Pluglightweight/gypsum walls · light duty in brickFAS-406 · FAS-403 + screw FAS-326
Pipe Clamppipes on walls/ceilingsomega clamp FAS-374 + 2 anchors/clamp
Lifting Point · Guy Wirelifting points on components · guying masts/signsM20 eye bolt + shackle · turnbuckle + 7x7 wire rope 6 m/point + 6 clips · ASME B30.26 · DIN 580

The Measured on drawing card: hanger run measurement lines and sheet fixing areas have a Fixing type field guessed from the item name (e.g. “cable tray” → Trapeze · “Klip-Lok” → Concealed Clip · “gypsum ceiling” → Gypsum Board) · point counts of the general fixing kind likewise guess Wedge / chemical / drop-in / clamp / lifting eye from the name

💡 How to choose without getting confused Look at the detail in the drawing first: beam joined to the column by an angle/single plate at the web = shear · plates/welds at the top and bottom beam flanges = moment · gusset plate with diagonal members = bracing · joining members in line = splice · plates in the column/fins in the beam = stiffener — the Measured on drawing card guesses the category from the chosen type by itself (e.g. choosing BFP → moment connection type)

Steel connection types (Steel Connections in the style of Tekla Structures)

Rows of type Steel column base · categorised connections (shear · moment · bracing · splice · stiffener) and Steel structure connection have a Connection type column after the fixing type (options by type — see two-step selection) — grouped by application as in Tekla · once a type is chosen, the system sets pieces/point, plate size (width × length/height × thickness) and the accessory as steel plate (kg), all still editable · the row's elevation and section change with the type instantly · if a type that does not match the kind is chosen (e.g. Shear Tab in a column base row), the system ignores it and draws the default for that kind

GroupTypeUse whenViews drawn · defaults
1. Column bases
(Base Plates)
Simple Base Platecolumns with compression or low moment plate plan + H column + bolts · section of pedestal, grout, cast-in bolts with bent ends · 4 bolts · plate 0.30 × 0.30 × 0.020 m
Stiffened Base Plate
(Web Stiffened)
columns with high moment or shear plan with stiffeners along the column web and flanges out to the plate edges · section with triangular stiffeners on both sides of the column · 8 bolts · plate 0.45 × 0.45 × 0.025 m
2. Beam to column
(Beam-to-Column)
End Plate (Moment)moment connection (rigid frame) elevation of the beam end plate extending beyond the top and bottom flanges, bolted to the column flange face · plate face with bolt rows outside the flanges and within the web · 8 bolts · 0.25 × 0.55 × 0.025 m
Clip Angle (Shear)shear-only connection elevation of L angles on the beam web · horizontal section showing two angles bolted to the column flange face and bolts through the web · 6 bolts (beam web 2 + column face 4) · no plate
Haunchrigid frames/warehouses that need extra beam depth at the column head elevation of the tapered haunch under the beam + deep end plate over the full haunch · plate face · 10 bolts · 0.25 × 0.80 × 0.025 m
3. Beam to beam
(Beam-to-Beam)
Shear Tabsecondary beam into a main beam (single plate) elevation with the main beam section + plate welded to its web + coped secondary beam flange · detail of the single-row bolted plate · 3 bolts · 0.10 × 0.25 × 0.010 m
End Plate — Full Depthsecondary beam into a main beam, full-depth end plate elevation of the end plate bolted to the main beam web · plate face · 6 bolts · 0.18 × 0.40 × 0.012 m
End Plate — Partial Depthend plate over part of the web depth (lower forces) same as Full Depth but with a shorter plate · 4 bolts · 0.15 × 0.25 × 0.012 m
4. Bracing and trusses
(Bracing & Trusses)
Gusset Plate (X / Wind)X diagonal bracing or wind bracing elevation of four brace arms on the gusset plate (bolts divided equally among the arms) · section of back-to-back angles · 8 bolts · 0.40 × 0.40 × 0.012 m
Corner Bracingbracing at column-beam corners elevation of a triangular gusset welded to the column + beam with a diagonal brace · section · 4 bolts · 0.35 × 0.35 × 0.012 m
SpliceSplice Platejoining members in line (legacy connection rows) elevation of a splice symmetrical on both sides: top and bottom flange plates + web plates, equal bolts on both sides of the splice line · section at the splice: outer/inner flange plates + web plates on both sides · connection rows made before this column existed use this type automatically, totals unchanged
5. Welded connections
(Welded)
Welded Moment — beam-column (fully welded)rigid frames welded on site/in the shop beam flanges CJP-welded to the column face · web plate welded to the column + temporary erection bolts · column stiffeners · weld access holes · groove detail 30°–45° with backing bar
Welded Splice — butt joint (Butt Weld)joining beams/columns in line without splice platesfull-penetration weld over the whole section · detail of 60° V-groove, 6 mm root opening, backing bar · UT/RT inspection
Welded — beam-beam (welded all round)secondary beam into a main beamcoped secondary beam flange, fillet weld around the web · T fillet detail (leg s · throat 0.707 s)
Welded Gusset — welded bracingdiagonal braces welded to the gusset platefour brace arms fillet-welded along the angle legs · section A-A of double angles sandwiching the plate, with weld beads
6. Stiffened connections
(Stiffener)
Stiffened End Plate — beam-column (8ES)high-moment connections (rigid frames resisting seismic/wind loads) extended end plate with triangular stiffeners above and below the beam flanges · 8 bolts/flange (two outer rows + two inner rows per flange) · continuity plates in the column · plate face shows the stiffeners · default 16 bolts · 0.30 × 0.75 × 0.030 m · AISC 358 (8ES) · AISC Design Guide 4 · EN 1993-1-8
Stiffened Seat — beam-column (beam seat)beam sits on a seat; higher shear than a plain seat angle vertical seat plate on a stiffener below, welded to the column flange + top angle against rollover · section A–A, T-shaped, with bolts to the beam flange · counts 2 plates/point (seat + stiffener) · default 4 bolts · 0.20 × 0.30 × 0.016 m · AISC Manual Part 10 (Stiffened Seated) · AISC 360 §J10
Column Stiffener — column reinforcing plates (Continuity + Doubler)columns receiving forces from moment-connected beam flanges (column web/flange insufficient) continuity plates at the top and bottom beam flange levels on both sides of the web (corners clipped clear of the welds) + web doubler plate over the panel zone · plan section through the column · counts 4 plates/point · welded · default 0.15 × 0.40 × 0.016 m · AISC 360 §J10 · AISC Design Guide 13 · EN 1993-1-8 §6.2.6
Bearing Stiffener — beam bearing stiffenerbeams under reactions/concentrated loads (on column heads, under columns landing on beams) pair of full web-depth stiffeners with clipped corners, ends milled to bear or welded to the loaded flange · section A–A through the stiffeners · counts 2 plates/point · welded · default 0.10 × 0.50 × 0.012 m · AISC 360 §J10.8 · EN 1993-1-5 §9
7. Shear connections
(Shear Connection)
Single Angle — beam-column (Shear)beams with low to moderate shear, installed from one side elevation of a single L angle on the near side with a ~10 mm gap · horizontal section through the beam web (angle on one side, bolts through the web + to the column flange) · the angle is taken off in the structural steel table · default 4 bolts · no plate · AISC Manual Part 10 (Single-Angle Connections)
Seated Angle — beam-column (Unstiffened seat angle)beam sits on a seat; easy to install, shear not high (use Stiffened Seat if it is) seat angle under the bottom flange + top angle against rollover · section A–A through the seat angle (horizontal and vertical legs, bolts to the beam flange/column flange) · default 4 bolts · no plate · AISC Manual Part 10 (Unstiffened Seated)
Tee Shear — beam-column (WT)replaces double angles when a single plate on the column is wanted WT cut from an H section — flange bolted to the column face, stem on the beam web · horizontal section through the beam web · the WT is taken off in the structural steel table · default 8 bolts · AISC Manual Part 10 (Shear Tee)
8. Moment connections
(Moment Connection)
Bolted Flange Plate — beam-column (BFP Moment)rigid frames bolted on site (less field welding) top and bottom flange plates CJP-welded to the column face, bolted to the beam flanges + shear web plate · flange plate plan (2 bolt lines) · counts 2 plates/point · default 16 bolts · 0.20 × 0.50 × 0.025 m · AISC 358 Ch.7 (BFP)
Reduced Beam Section — beam-column (RBS Moment)seismic-resisting frames — forces the plastic hinge to form in the beam, away from the column face beam flanges cut in a curve (dogbone) top and bottom · flanges CJP-welded to the column face · beam flange plan giving a · b · c (a = 0.5–0.75 bf · b = 0.65–0.85 d · c ≤ 0.25 bf) · shear web plate · default 4 bolts · 0.10 × 0.40 × 0.012 m · AISC 358 Ch.5 (RBS) · AWS D1.8
Flush End Plate — beam-column (Moment)moderate moment/semi-rigid, when the plate cannot extend beyond the flanges (against a slab/roof) end plate flush with the beam flanges, bolts within the web depth · plate face with e · g · p · column stiffeners · default 8 bolts · 0.25 × 0.50 × 0.020 m · AISC Design Guide 16 · EN 1993-1-8 §6

Connection category — every type is labelled with its category in the drawing title and the dimension list, following the classification of EN 1993-1-8 §5.2 (pinned · semi-rigid · rigid) and AISC 360 §B3.4 (Simple / Moment Connection): Shear — Clip Angle · Single Angle · Seated Angle · Stiffened Seat · Tee Shear · Shear Tab · End Plate beam-to-beam · beam-to-beam welded all round · Moment — End Plate (Moment) · Flush End Plate · Stiffened End Plate 8ES · Bolted Flange Plate · RBS · Welded Moment · Haunch · Bracing · Splice · Stiffener · Base

Reference standards — Thai: EIT Standard for Structural Steel Buildings (based on AISC methods) · steel sections to TIS 1227 · DPT 1301/1302-61 (seismic-resistant buildings — use prequalified moment connections) · international: AISC 360-16 (Ch. J connections · §J10 concentrated forces — stiffeners/web doubler plates) · AISC 358 (prequalified moment connections: RBS · BFP · 4E/4ES/8ES) · AISC 341 (seismic force-resisting frames) · AISC Design Guide 4 / 13 / 16 · AISC Steel Construction Manual Part 10 (Shear) / Part 12 (Moment) · RCSC (high-strength bolts) · EN 1993-1-8 (joints) · EN 1993-1-5 (plated elements/stiffeners) · AWS D1.1 / D1.8 (welding) — defaults are typical sizes for cost estimating; actual sizes follow the engineer's calculations

Every drawing is symmetrical — the main column/beam sits in the middle with equal members on both sides · with welding symbols per AWS A2.4 (arrow · reference line · fillet triangle · CJP groove · circle = weld all around · weld leg size) and weld beads at the actual corners · plate faces show the bolt edge distance e · pitch p · gauge g · welded connections set pieces/point = 0 (no bolts) and count only steel plates (kg) · below the drawing the weld type and approximate weld length are given — welding cost is included in the steel fabrication and erection cost (price per kg in the structural steel table), not as a separate item · the Measured on drawing card guesses welded types from the name (weld/butt, in Thai or English)

⚠ This row counts only bolts and plates Stiffeners · the L angles of Clip Angle / Single Angle / Seated Angle · the WT of Tee Shear · haunches · brace members are not included in the fixing row — a note below the drawing always says so take them off in the structural steel table or add an accessory row · drawings are not to scale; the figures on the drawing are the row's actual values
⚠ Do not count bolts twice with the structural steel table Structural steel rows have Bolts ticked by default, which counts bolts/steel plates as a % of the steel weight (STR-025) · if you take off bolts and plates in the Connections & fixings tab, untick Bolts in the structural steel row
💡 Billboard — 4 column bases One row: type Steel column base · item FAS-005 (Anchor Bolt M36) · quantity 4 · pieces/point 8 · plate 0.8 × 0.8 × 0.04 m · accessory FAS-018 (galvanised plate) → 32 sets of bolts · plate 804 kg · 4 setting templates

Row drawings — steel column base · pipe hangers · sheet fixing · general fixing

Click the drawing icon of a row to get drawings that follow the same drafting conventions as structural steel (dimension lines with arrows · centre lines · 45° steel hatching · concrete hatching per ISO), arranged symmetrically about the centre axis

  • Steel column base — plate plan A × B with H column · holes k-Ø(d+6) placed symmetrically (2 bolts left-right · 4 at the corners · more in equal top and bottom rows) · edge distance e and spacing · stiffeners when Stiffened is chosen · section A–A through the bolt line: column (broken), plate t, non-shrink grout, RC pedestal, cast-in bolts with bent ends, nut + washer, distance between bolts and bolt length (shortened when too long for the frame)
  • Pipe hanger / cable tray — hanger run elevation: RC slab, threaded rod, hanger, hanger spacing and run length · section by type: Clevis (clevis hanger) · Band (band around a small pipe) · Trapeze (paired threaded rods, support beam, pipes + U-bolts) · Beam Clamp (steel beam section, flange clamp) · Seismic Brace (diagonal brace ≈45°, brace anchor) · Riser (vertical pipe through the slab, clamp + 2 anchors)
  • Roof / wall sheet fixing — sheet plan with purlin lines (dashed) and screw positions · section by type: crest (corrugated sheet, C purlin, screw + rubber washer) · clip concealed under the crest · valley on a girt · insulated panel (top and bottom skins, insulation, long screw + curved washer) · board on stud framing · gypsum under C framing
  • General fixing — plan of fixing positions (centred) · section by type: Wedge (expansion wedge) · Sleeve · Drop-in (internal thread, flush) · Chemical (adhesive around the stud) · Cast-in (embedded insert) · Hollow Wall (umbrella toggle behind the board) · Plastic Plug · Pipe Clamp (2 anchors) · Lifting (eye bolt + shackle) · Guy Wire (turnbuckle, wire rope, 3 clips) — “General” draws by the original product group
  • 23 steel connection types (including 4 stiffened types · shear · moment) — the same drawing set, symmetrical about the main column/beam axis (see Connection types):
    • Beam-column End Plate (Moment) · Haunch — elevation with beams on both sides, column stiffeners, end plate + plate face (bolts e · g · p · beam outline dashed) · Clip Angle — elevation + horizontal section through the beam web (H column in plan, double angles, bolts)
    • Shear Single Angle · Tee Shear — elevation + horizontal section through the beam web · Seated Angle — elevation + section A–A through the seat angle · Moment Bolted Flange Plate — elevation + flange plate plan · RBS — elevation of the reduced flange zone + beam flange plan a · b · c · Flush End Plate — elevation + plate face · the drawing title states the connection category
    • Beam-beam Shear Tab · End Plate full/partial · welded all round — main beam as a central section, secondary beams coped on both sides + plate face or fillet detail
    • Bracing Gusset X · Corner Bracing · welded bracing — gusset plate, double-angle braces + section A–A (bolts through 3 plies, or fillets along the angle legs)
    • Lap/butt splice Splice Plate — outer and inner flange plates, web plates on both sides + section at the splice · Welded Splice / Welded Moment — CJP detail: groove, root opening, backing bar, weld access hole
    • Welding symbols per AWS A2.4 (arrow · reference line · fillet/CJP · weld-all-around circle · tail) · continuous members use break lines · drawings are not to scale; the figures are the row's actual values

Masonry walls · plaster (by wall line)

The room/area table calculates walls from room perimeter × height × wall ratio, which suits ordinary rooms · walls that do not enclose a room, or that you want to take off line by line from the drawings, such as fences, retaining walls, lower warehouse walls, plant room partitions, walls under signs, go in this table (after Ceilings (per area) in the Architecture tab) · its quantities are added on top of the room table, so do not enter the same wall in both tables

FieldMeaning
Wall typeclay brick, half-brick/full-brick · concrete block · AAC block 7.5/10 cm · gypsum drywall · fibre cement · plaster only — plaster on an existing surface, e.g. columns, beams, RC walls (no wall body or stiffener columns counted)
Length × height × quantitywall line length × height × number of identical lines/floors, then deduct openings (m², total for the row)
Plaster (sides)0 · 1 · 2 — smooth cement plaster ARC-006 = net wall × sides · drywalls are not plastered even if a value is entered
Paint inside · Paint outside (sides)interior paint ARC-039 = net wall × sides − tiled wall · exterior paint ARC-040 = net wall × sides · 3% paint allowance
Wall tiles (m²)wall tiles ARC-013 with a 5% allowance, deducted from the interior paint area

System calculates — wall body × 1.05 (brick waste) · stiffener columns-lintels ARC-008 = net masonry wall × the “stiffener columns-lintels per m² of masonry wall” value in Manual entries (not counted for drywalls and plaster only) · the grey columns show net wall · plaster · paint (before allowances) · in the BOQ by work category every item is in B1 Masonry walls and plastering (paint in B6) · expand the sub-items to see which room or wall line they came from

Roofs · roof coverings — pick a roof shape and covering, enter sizes and battens/purlins, get quantities instantly

The Roof · roof covering table in the Architecture tab (after Stair finishes) — choose a roof shape (the same 10 types as the house roof frame: gable · L-shaped gable · gambrel (barn) · hip · L-shaped hip · Manila (hip-and-gable) · pyramid · lean-to · low-slope flat · butterfly) choose a covering, enter width × length, pitch and eaves overhang (and the L wing), then choose battens/steel purlins, insulation and gutters — you get the covering area along the slope, caps, flashings, barge boards, fascia, eaves soffit, gutters, insulation and batten/purlin weight instantly · references TIS 535 · TIS 1407 · TIS 2228 · EN 1304 · ASTM D3462 · EN 12326 · ASTM D6878 · manufacturers' manuals

Group (colour in the dropdown)Covering → code · default batten/purlin spacing · manufacturer's pitch
Tilesconcrete CPAC/SCG → ARC-024 (0.33 m · 17.5–45°) · ceramic/clay → ARC-160 (0.30 · ≥ 30°) · fibre cement double-roll corrugated → ARC-026 (purlins 1.20 · ≥ 15°) · asphalt shingle on plywood → ARC-161 (≥ 18°) · slate/cedar shingles → ARC-164 (≥ 20°) — ridge/hip caps are included in the covering price
Corrugated/metal sheetmetal sheet 0.35 + PU → ARC-025 (≥ 5°) · high-rib 0.47 AZ150 → ARC-049 (2–30°) · Standing Seam → ARC-122 (≥ 1°) · sandwich panel → ARC-053 · corrugated galvanised iron → ARC-163 · 3-layer uPVC/ASA → ARC-162 — folded metal sheet caps → ARC-058 (uPVC includes caps)
Translucent sheetpolycarbonate/skylight → ARC-124 · fibreglass with the same profile as the sheet → ARC-050
Flat roofRC roof deck + torch-on/PU waterproofing → ARC-127 · TPO/PVC membrane → ARC-165 · green roof → ARC-125 — includes a 0.30 m upturn on the parapet all round · no battens/caps · when chosen, the program sets the shape to “low-slope flat roof” with a 1° pitch and roof drains
  • Covering area = horizontal area including eaves ÷ cos(pitch) × (1 + waste) — waste left blank = default by material (tiles 5% · sheet 3% · shingle 10% · roof deck 10% including laps) · a pitch below/above the manufacturer's range shows red below the field
  • Battens/steel purlins — choose a size (Top Hat batten · box section · cold-formed C), spacing 0 = per covering → weight (kg) → STR-024 · non-galvanised sections get paint STR-026 · choose “Not counted” when the battens/purlins are already taken off in the house roof frame/truss/timber works tables (to avoid double counting)
  • Auto-calculate (tickable): caps·flashings (ridge/hip caps ARC-058 · valley gutter + wall abutment flashing ARC-123) · fascia·barge boards (ARC-029 · ARC-166) · eaves soffit (horizontal area including eaves − house wall footprint → ARC-022) · battens/steel purlins
  • Gutters: all round the eaves / long sides only → ARC-028 (including 1 downpipe every ≤ 12 m) · flat roof = 1 roof drain/50 m² (at least 2) → SAN-108 · Insulation: reflective foil/PE sheet ARC-126 · sprayed PU ARC-056 · foil-faced glass wool ARC-057 (area along the slope) · glass wool on the ceiling ARC-027 (ceiling area)
  • Having rows in this table = the covering area, eaves soffit, gutters and fascia are taken from the table instead of the roof parameters of the Architecture tab (to avoid double counting) · if the roof is already covered in the house roof frame table (with “Roof covering·fascia” ticked), do not enter the same roof here · codes ARC-160 – ARC-166 are new — set prices on the price database page before use (sub-category roofing, gutters and insulation)
  • Row drawings: ① roof plan — covering pattern (tiles in rows at the batten spacing · sheets along the slope · flat roofs show roof drains), ridge/hip caps, valley gutters, gutters + downpipes, barge boards, slope arrows, grid bubbles, section line A–A, two-tier dimension lines · ② section A–A with material layers (covering · battens/purlins · insulation), levels, pitch, fascia, gutter, eaves soffit · ③ front elevation (eaves side — roof plane with covering pattern, ridge caps, barge boards, fascia, gutters + downpipes, upper wall broken off) · ④ side elevation (gable end with gable wall/hip end) — top plate/ridge levels, height dimension chain, grid bubbles · ⑤ quantity table with formulas and codes · ⑥ 3 details showing the actual material layers (frame → battens/purlins → insulation → covering) with labels and manufacturer's dimensions: a eaves (fascia · gutter + downpipe · eaves soffit · eaves overhang) · b ridge, symmetrical on both sides (tile ridge cap + mortar/clips, lap ≥ 75 mm/side, or metal sheet ridge cap lap ≥ 150 mm + profile foam closure) · c valley gutter (width ≥ 300 mm, water channel ≥ 100 mm) when there is a valley, or wall abutment flashing (upstand flashing ≥ 150 mm + counter flashing in a wall chase + sealant) — flat roof: parapet edge · roof drain · material layers

Truss roofs · roof coverings — pick a truss type and covering, enter the building size and steel sizes

The Truss roof · roof covering table in the Architecture tab — take off a whole roof in one row: choose one of 15 truss types (the same set as the steel truss table — parallel chord Pratt/Howe/Warren/K/Vierendeel · pitched Pratt/Howe/Fink/Fan/King post/Queen post/scissor · mono-pitch · Bowstring arch), choose a covering (the same set as the roof · roof covering table, except flat roofs) enter truss span, building length, truss height, truss spacing and eaves, then choose steel sizes for top chord · bottom chord · diagonals · verticals · purlins · bracing — you instantly get the complete set of steel weight, purlins, bracing, plates, bolts and covering · references EIT 011038 / DPT 1121 · AISC 360 · AISI S100 · TIS 1228 · covering manufacturers' manuals

  • Trusses: ⌈building length ÷ truss spacing⌉ + 1 trusses · roof pitch derived from the truss height (gable = atan(height ÷ half span)) · top chord extends over the eaves at both ends = eaves ÷ cos pitch · truss/bracing steel → STR-023 (combined with structural steel)
  • Purlins per plane ⌈slope length ÷ purlin spacing⌉ + 1 lines × length along the ridge (building length + 2 × eaves) → STR-024 · purlin spacing 0 = per covering · for tiles, choose prefabricated battens and a truss spacing ≤ 1.2 m (the program sets these when the covering changes) · Bracing: X in both end bays + every ~5 bays in every plane + 2 lines of bottom chord sway bracing (RB 12/16 mm or angle)
  • Auto-calculate (tickable): anti-rust paint (STR-026 · galvanised purlins are not painted) · base plates 250 × 250 × 12 mm + gusset plates at every joint (FAS-017) + 4 base bolts/base (FAS-056) · caps·flashings (ARC-058 · ARC-123) · fascia·barge boards (ARC-029 · ARC-166) · eaves soffit (ARC-022) · gutters ARC-028 · insulation as selected
  • Covering area = slope length (top chord + eaves overhang) × length along the ridge × (1 + waste) · the pitch is checked against the covering (flat parallel-chord trusses warn you to use a low-pitch covering or increase the height); purlin spacing and truss spacing show red below the field
  • Having rows in this table = the roof frame (instead of the lump-sum steel in kg/m²), covering, eaves soffit, gutters and fascia are taken from the table instead of the roof parameters (to avoid double counting) · do not enter the same roof again in the steel truss or roof · roof covering tables
  • Row drawings: ① roof plan — trusses at every spacing (truss number bubbles), purlins, X bracing, ridge/caps, gutters + downpipes, barge boards, slope direction, section line A–A, dimension lines n @ spacing · ② section A–A — truss coloured by member group, top chord extending over the eaves, purlins on the top chord, covering, gutter, supporting columns/walls + base plates, levels, joint panels · ③ front elevation (eaves side) — roof plane with covering pattern, ridge cap, barge boards, fascia, gutters + downpipes along the columns, columns supporting the trusses at every spacing with truss number bubbles · ④ side elevation (gable end) — clad gable, trusses behind shown dashed, roof band following the top chord profile, bottom chord/ridge levels · ⑤ member and quantity table with formulas · ⑥ 3 details showing the actual members with labels: truss bearing (top and bottom chords · gusset + bolts · base plate + base bolts · purlins · eaves + gutter) · ridge joint, symmetrical (gusset · vertical · purlins on both sides · ridge cap), or top chord-diagonal joint for parallel-chord/arched/mono-pitch trusses · purlin fixed to the top chord (L 50×50×5 purlin cleat + 2 bolts · self-drilling screws + rubber washer · insulation)

Metal sheet walls · sign faces (warehouses · factories · billboards)

A table in the Architecture tab for work where the walls are sheet metal and cannot be calculated from room sizes — warehouse/factory walls, sandwich panels, ACP walls, sun-shading panels and billboard faces · enter one row per face and the system breaks it down into a complete set of BOQ items · Roofs go in the Roof · roof covering table or Truss roof · roof covering (the roof type has been removed from this table — old roof rows are still calculated as before and show a red note telling you to move them)

FieldMeaning
TypeWall · sign face — changing the type sets the default Sheet · sub-frame · slope factor ( wall ARC-052 · 5 kg/m² · sign face ARC-054 · 8 kg/m²), all still editable
SheetARC-050 translucent sheet · ARC-139 ACP wall · ARC-140 sun-shading panel · ARC-051 / ARC-052 wall 0.35 / 0.47 mm · ARC-053 sandwich panel 50 mm · ARC-054 metal sheet sign face · ARC-055 ACP sign face
Width/length × height/depthwalls and sign faces = length × height · slope factor = 1 (enter more than 1 for inclined walls)
Facestwo walls of equal size = 2 · double-sided sign = 2
Deduct openingsarea of roller doors, fixed lights and vents that are not clad (m², total for the row)
InsulationARC-056 sprayed PU foam 25 mm · ARC-057 foil-faced glass wool 50 mm — taken as the net area
Sub-frame kg/m²purlins/girts carrying the sheet — walls and sign faces go to STR-032 (steel sub-frame) · anti-rust paint STR-026 by the surface area per kg in the parameters · enter 0 if the sub-frame is already taken off in the structural steel table (e.g. a sign frame taken off member by member) to avoid double counting
FacingARC-059 printed vinyl sign face · ARC-041 steelwork paint — taken as the net area

System calculates — sheet = net area × (1 + Metal sheet lap/waste allowance, default 5% in Manual entries) · caps/flashings ARC-058, approximately: wall = top edge closure + two corners · sign face = edge all round the sign 2(width + height) · the grey columns show net area · caps/edges · sub-frame weight for each row

💡 Billboard — example of a 15 × 44 m double-sided sign One row: type Sign face · sheet ARC-054 · 44 × 15 · faces 2 · facing ARC-059 → sheet 1,386 m² (including the 5% allowance) · vinyl 1,320 m² · edges 236 m · the main steel structure of the sign (columns, beams, trusses) is taken off in the Structural steel tab as before · sign lighting goes in the Electrical / ICT tab

Building roofs are entered in the Roof · roof covering table / Truss roof · roof covering or in Manual entries (horizontal width/length · slope factor · covering code) — use only one method per roof surface · in the work categories (WBS), metal sheet walls are in ARC.01 · insulation and caps in ARC.05 · sign faces and vinyl in ARC.12 · sub-frames in STR.10

Stair finishes (per flight)

A table in the Architecture tab after Doors & windows — enter one stair flight at a time from the drawings, and the program calculates tread and riser finishes, landings, handrails, stair nosings and stair skirting · or count the flights on the plan in the Drawings page and send them from the count card (destination Stair finishes — see Send from card)

FieldWhat to enter
Number of flights · flight widthidentical flights (e.g. every floor uses the same design) · width of the flight
Risers (steps) · tread · riser heightnumber of steps per flight and size per step — there is one tread fewer than risers, because the top step is the upper floor
Landing width · lengththe landing of that flight (same finish) · enter 0 if there is none
Stair finish materialtile/stone stair ARC-046 · granite/marble · granito · terrazzo · solid wood · vinyl tile/SPC · carpet · polished cement · epoxy — or type your own name
Handrail (sides)0–2 sides · handrail ARC-042 = length along the slope × number of sides · a side without a handrail is taken as being against a wall and gets stair skirting ARC-019
Auto-calculate✓ stair nosing ARC-116 (treads × flight width) · ✓ stair skirting — can be unticked
⚠ Avoid double counting with the existing fields The Tile/stone stair (tread-riser area) and Stainless stair handrail fields in Manual entries still work — if you move to entering stairs in this table, set those two fields to 0 · stair finishes use the same waste allowance as floor tiles

Ceilings (per area)

The second table in the Architecture tab, after Rooms/areas — the room table already calculates ceilings from room sizes; this table is for ceilings that do not match a room — lobby ceilings, long corridor ceilings, eaves soffits, slab soffits or rooms with several ceiling types · enter width × length × quantity − openings, then choose the ceiling type

  • Ceiling type — smooth-jointed gypsum · T-bar · moisture-resistant gypsum · fire-rated · metal ceiling · acoustic · fibre cement soffit · plastered slab soffit — or type your own name
  • Insulation above ceiling covers the full ceiling area · Access panels: enter the number of sets (ARC-121)
  • Auto-calculate — ✓ ceiling cornice ARC-023 = perimeter × quantity (gypsum ceilings) · ✓ paint ARC-039 (smooth-jointed and plastered ceilings), can be unticked
⚠ Do not enter the same room in two places If the room is also in the room/area table, set the room's Ceiling code to None and enter the ceiling in this table instead

Architectural drawings — plan · elevation · section of each row

Every table in the Architecture tab (rooms/areas · ceilings · walls by line · doors–windows · stair finishes · metal sheet) draws with the same set as the structural steel drawings — the same frame: left = plan/elevation · right = section/plan, arranged symmetrically about the centre axis · the figures on the drawing are the row's actual values (drawings not to scale) · drawn per ISO 128 (line weights · material hatching ISO 128-50) · ISO 129 (dimension lines with arrows) · ISO 7519 / ISO 4157 (construction drawings — reference grids, room labels, door and window symbols, levels ▽) and Thai construction drawing conventions (finished floor level ±0.00 · door tag in a circle D · window tag in a hexagon W · “UP” arrow on stairs)

TableLeft drawingRight drawing
Room / areaRoom plan — four walls hatched by material at the actual thickness of the wall code · floor pattern by tile size (60×60 · 30×30 · laminate/wood as long boards · grooves at 1 m) · openings split into a door in the middle of the bottom wall (leaf + 90° swing) and a window in the middle of the top wall · reference grids 1–2 / A–B · room label (name · area · floor code · ceiling level) · section line A–A Section A–A — RC floor and upper slab · walls with plaster layers · floor finish · skirting · wall tiles (height = tiled area ÷ wall perimeter) · ceiling + framing + hanger wires · FFL ±0.00 and ceiling level · material labels lined up along the wall
Doors – windowsElevation seen from inside/outside — frame · leaves by type (single/double swing · sliding · automatic sliding · awning · fixed FX · roller) · dashed swing symbol pointing to the hinge side · sliding direction arrows · window sill · D/W tag Plan cut at +1.20 — walls on both sides of the opening · 90° swing · overlapping sliding leaves · glass as 2 lines + frame · roller door (roller box dashed) · inside/outside
Walls by lineWall elevation — wall pattern by material (masonry courses/drywall board joints/glass frames) · stiffener columns at the wall ends and every ≤ 3.00 m · lintels at mid-height (walls over 3 m) and over openings · openings · cladding Wall section — wall body thickness per code · plaster on 0/1/2 sides · paint inside/outside · cladding · beams/slabs top and bottom · level ±0.00 and wall head
Stair finishesStair section — RC stair waist slab · tread and riser finishes (orange line) · nosings · 0.90 m guardrail · landing · T/R · levels · checks against Ministerial Regulation No. 55 (riser ≤ 0.20 · tread ≥ 0.22) and 2R+T Stair plan — every tread · “UP n steps” arrow · landing · handrail/stair skirting · horizontal run · width
CeilingsCeiling plan (looking up) — T-bar grid 0.60 · gypsum board joints 1.20×2.40 · linear metal ceiling · cornice · access panels (square with a cross) · openings Ceiling section — slab above · hanger wires/threaded rods · T-bar or C-channel framing · insulation above the ceiling · ceiling boards · cornice · ceiling level
Metal sheetroof: section with trusses, purlins, sheets, insulation, ridge cap, pitch angle · walls/sign faces: elevation with sheet profile, girts (dashed), caps/edges, openings, sign legs roof: plan with profile · ridge · slope arrows · skylights · walls/signs: section with corrugated sheet · insulation · girts/box frame · columns

Ancillary work (Auto-calculate field) is shown on every drawing — only the items the program actually calculates, under the same conditions as the BOQ totals, are drawn, and their names are listed at the end of the drawing (“Ancillary work: …”) · below the drawing are the formulas for each item:

Table · ancillary workOn the drawingFormula below the drawing (matches the engine)
Room · plasterplaster layers on both faces of the wall in the section (drywalls/custom-typed codes are not plastered)net wall × 2 sides
Room · paintorange line on the inner wall face · orange line under the ceiling (smooth gypsum ceiling/plastered soffit)net wall × 2 − tiled area (+ paint allowance) · ceiling = room area
Room · stiffener columns-lintelsplan: stiffener columns at the room corners, every ≤ 3.00 m and beside door frames · section: lintel at +2.10net wall × project rate (default 1 m/m²)
Room · skirting / cornicebrown dashed line along the room edge (gap at the door) · orange triangle at the ceiling corners — bathrooms (ARC-012) not countedroom perimeter 2(width + length)
Room · waterproofing · mirrorbathroom: light-blue dashed line over the full floor + 0.30 m upturn in the section · mirror on the wall (plan and section)waterproofing = room area · mirror 1 set/room
Room · room signsign beside the door on the outside (named rooms)1 set/room
Doors-windows · window grilles/insect screensgrille bars on the elevation · dashed line on the inside in the plan — sliding/awning windows only (ARC-035 · 036)quantity × width × height × project rate (default 100%)
Metal sheet · anti-rustpurlins/girts/box frames in red anti-rust primersub-frame (kg) × surface area per kg (default 0.025 m²/kg)
Walls by line · stair finishes · ceilingsstiffener columns-lintels · stair nosings/stair skirting · cornice/ceiling paint (as ticked)per the formula of each table

Take-off by item code (at the end of the Architecture tab) — drawings are chosen by code type: walls → elevation + wall section · ceilings → ceiling plan + section · doors/windows → elevation + plan (size from the length/width fields or read from the code name, e.g. 0.90×2.00 m) · roofs/metal sheet/signs/sandwich/ACP → metal sheet drawing · other codes by unit: m² finish pattern plan + section of the layers (finish · bedding/primer · substrate) · m elevation of the run + cross-section · m³ plan + section · set/piece position plan + item elevation

Material hatching: clay brick diagonal lines · concrete block crosshatch · AAC block air bubbles · drywall fine dots · concrete aggregate · insulation zigzag lines · plaster dots · timber grain · wall body thickness: half-brick clay brick 70 · full-brick 140 · block 70 · AAC block 75 / 100 / 200 · drywall 100–120 mm (+ 15 mm plaster/side for masonry walls)

Electrical/communication drawings — electrical point plan · mounting-height elevation

The electrical points per room table now has a drawing for each row (click the row or the 📐 button) — the same frame as the rebar and architectural drawings · symbols follow IEC 60617 and the Electrical Installation Standard for Thailand (EIT 2001) · emergency lights and exit signs follow EIT 2004 and ISO 7010

DrawingWhat it shows
Electrical point plan (left)The room at its actual size from the room/area table with the same name (not found = approximate positions) · door + swing · room center lines · ceiling luminaires (LED panel · T8 · lighting point ⊗ · downlight · speaker) arranged in a symmetrical grid with the last row centered · dashed line = serpentine circuit run to the switch beside the door frame · equal numbers of outlets on the left and right walls · A/C outlet at the corner of the top wall · LAN (D), telephone (T) and TV (TV) at the middle of the top wall · emergency light · CCTV at the corner · exit sign at the door
Mounting-height elevation (right)Wall + door + ceiling (height from the room table, default 3.00 m) · a level line for each group with its symbol · running dimensions from the floor: outlet/LAN/telephone/TV +0.30 · switch +1.20 · A/C outlet +2.00 · exit sign above the door +2.20 · emergency light +2.40 · CCTV below the ceiling · level ±0.00 and ceiling (typical values — adjust to the drawings)

Below the drawing is a list of each point type with its price code (ELE-014 lighting point · ELE-015 outlet · ELE-016 A/C outlet · ELE-017 switch · ELE-018–022 luminaires/emergency lights/exit signs · ELE-025–028 LAN/telephone/TV/CCTV · ELE-033 speaker) — matching the totals in the BOQ · Take-off by code on the electrical tab draws according to the code type: cable (cable cross-section) · conduit (supports every ≤ 3.00 m · fill ≤ 40%) · cable tray/wireway/busbar (threaded-rod hangers) · underground conduit (trench, warning tape, depth ≥ 0.60) · MDB/DB panels (panel front elevation + single-line diagram) · transformer/generator/UPS/EV charger (elevation + installation area) · ground rod pit (≥ 2.40 m · ≤ 5 Ω) · systems (diagram) · point devices (symbol by type)

Sanitary drawings — fixture plan · mounting-height elevation · floor section

The sanitary fixtures per room table has a drawing for each row (click the row or the 📐 button) — the same frame as the other drawings · fixture plan symbols follow construction drawing convention (ISO 4067 / ASME Y32.4) · trap sizes and pipe slopes follow IPC 2021 · room size comes from the room/area table with the same name or a name that begins it (e.g. “Restroom Floor 1” is used for “Restroom Floor 1 Men”) — not found = approximate positions (this also applies to electrical points per room)

DrawingWhat it shows
Fixture plan (left)Toilet stalls in a row along the middle of the top wall (0.90 m partitions + doors) with bidet sprayers · urinals on the left wall · showers on the right wall · lavatories/sinks on the bottom wall symmetrical on both sides of the door with mirrors · floor drain on the room center line · hose bib beside the door · water heater · valve at the pipe entry · blue = cold-water pipe along the wall · dashed brown = waste/soil pipe down to the pipe shaft (SP)
Mounting-height elevation · floor section (right)Tiled wall + ceiling · each fixture type at its typical height: toilet seat +0.40 · bidet sprayer/hose bib +0.60 · urinal rim +0.60 · lavatory rim +0.80 (mirror above the lavatory) · sink +0.85 · water heater +1.60 · shower +2.10 · running dimensions from the floor · floor section: floor drain + P-trap below the floor · floor sloped 1:100 toward the FD

Below the drawing is the count of each type with its code (SAN-016 water closet · 017 lavatory · 018 urinal · 019 shower · 020 bidet sprayer · 021 sink · 022 floor drain · 023 hose bib · 031 water heater · 032 bathroom accessories · 013/014 valves), matching the BOQ totals, plus typical trap sizes · Take-off by code on the sanitary tab draws according to the code type: water supply pipe (pipe section + clamp · pressure test at 1.5 times) · hot-water pipe (insulated) · waste/soil/storm pipe (slope 1:100–1:50 · supports every ≤ 1.20 m) · vent pipe · above-ground water tank · underground tank/septic tank/grease trap (inlet-outlet pipes, inspection cover) · manhole · pump set (check valve + water distribution diagram) · systems (flow diagram) · fixtures (plan symbol · accessible design per the Ministerial Regulation B.E. 2548)

Air-conditioning drawings — FCU/CDU plan · through-wall section

The air conditioners per room table has a drawing for each row (click the row or the 📐 button) — the same frame as the other drawings · references the EIT air-conditioning and ventilation standard · ASHRAE 15 (refrigerant safety) · clearances per the manufacturer · room size from the room/area table with the same name or a name that begins it — not found = a square room derived from the area (dimension lines start with ≈) · the formulas for unit count and extra piping are unchanged

DrawingWhat it shows
Air-conditioner plan (left)Indoor units (FCU) arranged along the exterior wall symmetrical about the room axis at equal spacing — ≤ 24,000 BTU = wall-mounted · 36,000–48,000 BTU = ceiling-suspended · light-blue arrows = cool-air direction · outdoor CDU in line with the units · blue = small pipe (liquid) · red = large pipe (suction) · dashed green = condensate drain · more than 8 units shows 8 with the total count noted
Through-wall section (right)Floor ±0.00 · ceiling (level from the room height) · FCU ≥ 0.15 below the ceiling with its height above the floor · wall sleeve sealed with sealant · refrigerant pipe pair running down to the CDU · condensate drain sloped ≥ 1:100 · CDU on a bracket + rubber pads (wall-mounted units) or a concrete base + rubber pads (ceiling-suspended units) · rear clearance ≥ 0.10 · discharge side ≥ 0.50 · below the drawing: cooling load, area × BTU/m² → size × number of units

Take-off by code on the air-conditioning tab draws according to the code type: refrigerant pipe/VRF pipe + Refnet (section of the insulated pipe pair on a hanger · nitrogen test and vacuum) · A/C condensate drain (slope ≥ 1:100) · chilled-water supply and return pipe (insulation + vapor barrier) · galvanized steel duct (duct plan + diffusers · section of the insulated duct on a trapeze · SMACNA hangers every ≤ 2.40 m) · flexible duct · wall-mounted/ceiling-suspended/4-way cassette/floor-standing units/AHU/FCU (room plan + mounting-height section) · exhaust fans/ceiling fans/jet fans · air diffusers/VAV · CDU brackets and bases · chilled-water/VRF/kitchen/ERV/DDC systems (flow diagram + maintenance clearances) · stair pressurization/smoke exhaust systems (shaft riser · NFPA 92)

Fire protection drawings — spacing plan · standard wall elevation · valve set/pump room section

The Fire protection tab is a take-off by code — choose a FIR code and the drawing changes with the equipment type; every drawing uses the same frame as the other drawings · references Ministerial Regulations No. 33 / 39 / 47 / 55 · the EIT fire protection standard · NFPA 10 / 13 / 14 / 20 / 72 / 2001 · the standard wall elevation is shared by all wall-mounted devices: exit door + EXIT sign · manual pull station · bell · FHC cabinet · fire extinguisher · FCP panel · ceiling detectors — red = the code's item with its mounting height · gray = other devices for relative position

Code typePlan/layout (left) · elevation/section (right)
Portable fire extinguishers (dry chemical · CO₂ · clean agent · Class K)A building floor with stairs at both ends, 1 unit/≤ 1,000 m², spaced ≤ 45 m apart · top of extinguisher ≤ 1.50 high
FHC hose cabinet · hose valve/PRVSpacing ≤ 64 m with a 30 m hose radius · cabinet 0.75 × 1.05, valve at 0.90–1.50 high
Sprinkler heads · branch pipesHead layout at spacing S ≤ 4.60, ≤ S/2 from walls (≤ 12 m²/head) · section of a pendent head below the ceiling, deflector 25–300 mm
Black steel pipe Ø 2"–6" · FRC signal cablePipe route plan · section of the pipe on a hanger (hanger spacing ≤ 3.70 / 4.60) · EMT conduit carrying fire-resistant FRC cable
Zone control valve set · flow test setRiser diagram with zone valves on every floor + ITV at the end of the pipe · elevation of OS&Y + alarm check + flow switch / sight glass + orifice
Fire pump · reserve water tankPump room plan with clearances · elevation of suction and discharge piping (eccentric reducer · check · relief) · tank section (fire reserve level · vortex plate · uses the W×L×H entered)
FDC inlet · outdoor fire hydrantSite plan (≤ 30 m from a hydrant, next to the fire-truck access road) · elevation with heights 0.45–1.20
Alarm: FCP · smoke/heat/beam/aspirating detectors · manual pull station · bell · voice evacuation · emergency telephoneClass A zone/loop diagram · ceiling plan with detector spacing (smoke S ≤ 9.10 · beam ≤ 18.30) · pull station ≤ 1.50 from the exit at 1.07–1.37 high · bell at 2.03–2.44
Fire exit signs · external fire escape stairEscape routes in two directions + a sign at every change of direction · stair elevation/plan, width ≥ 0.80, riser ≤ 0.20, tread ≥ 0.22
Gas systems (FM-200/Novec/CO₂) · kitchen wet chemical · pre-action · foamFlow diagram · section of the gas-protected room (2-zone detection, discharge ≤ 10 seconds) · kitchen hood section
Firestop · fire-rated rolling doorSection of the wall/floor penetration · rolling door elevation (W × H entered) + roll box section

Built-in furniture drawings — cabinet front elevation · side section

The built-in furniture table has a drawing for each row (click the row or the 📐 button) — the same frame as the other drawings · typical dimensions per Neufert Architects' Data and hardware manufacturers (adjust to the actual drawings) · door/top colors follow the chosen surface material · prices and formulas are unchanged

DrawingWhat it shows
Cabinet front elevation (left)Cabinet front laid out symmetrically about the center line: drawers in the middle (more than 4 sets are split to both sides) · equal left and right doors with handles facing the paired door · diagonal dashed lines = hinge side · dark plinth/toe kick · length, height and mounting height above the floor
Side section (right)Wall on the left, cabinet front facing right · standard depth · toe space 0.10 · adjustable shelves · top/backsplash · hanging rail · French cleat rail · LED lighting · labels arranged without overlapping
Work typeDimensions shown (typical)
Kitchen base cabinet · kitchen wall cabinet · countertopBase cabinet 0.85 high, 0.60 deep, plinth 0.10 · wall cabinet 0.35 deep, underside at +1.45, 0.60 above the top · top 0.62 deep, 0.02 overhang, backsplash 0.10 · top thickness by material (granite 20 · solid surface 12 mm · stainless steel 1.2 mm)
Wardrobe, hinged / sliding doors · storage cabinet0.60 deep (sliding 0.65 including 2-track rail) · upper cabinet 0.45 when taller than 2.10 · hanging rail +1.75 · handle +1.05 · storage cabinet shelves @ 0.35
Shelving / display shelves0.35 deep · shelf span ≤ 0.80 · shelf spacing ≈ 0.35 · with doors = base cabinet 0.80
Vanity counter · deskBasin +0.80, 0.55 deep, two basins when length ≥ 1.50, mirror +1.15–1.90 · desk +0.75, 0.60 deep, knee space ≥ 0.60 wide and ≥ 0.65 high, drawers on both sides
Headboard · decorative wall · slats · reception counterUpholstered headboard 0.30 panels + bedside tables on both sides · wall on furring @ 0.40, panels 0.60, skirting 0.10 · slats 0.04 @ 0.10 · reception counter +1.10, work surface +0.75

Take-off by code on the built-in tab: carcass codes (BLT-001–014 · 101 · 102) use the same drawing as the table (length = length field · height = width/height field) · door finishes BLT-015–019 = door elevation + material layer section · BLT-020 drawer slides (drawer section + full-extension slide) · BLT-021 Ø 35 mm cup hinges (number by door height) · BLT-022 cabinet fittings · BLT-023 under-cabinet LED lighting · BLT-024 handles (position + fixing hole spacing)

External works drawings — plan · pavement structure/trench section · elevation

The External works tab is a take-off by code — choose an EXT code and the drawing changes with the work type · the plan uses the size from the length × width fields (blank = sample size, dimensions start with ≈) · the thickness/depth field is used as the average depth/height of earthwork · references DOH/DRR road standards · DPT · TIS 128 · the Ministerial Regulation on parking · EN 1176/1177 · section labels are arranged automatically without overlapping

Code typePlan (left) · section/elevation (right)
RC road/yard · paving blocks · crushed rock · asphalt · grass blocksArea plan + contraction joints ≤ 4.00 (RC) · crown/cross slope 2% · pavement structure section with each layer's thickness + curbs on both sides · subgrade compacted ≥ 95%
Lawn · shrubs · irrigation system · clearing · soil mixPlanting bed/sprinkler head plan · planting soil layer section (grass ≥ 0.10 · shrubs ≥ 0.30 · trees ≥ 1.00)
Curbs · fences · gates (sliding/automatic)Curb section 0.15 above the pavement · fence elevation with evenly spaced posts + footings embedded ≥ 0.60 · gate opening 6.00, sliding storage space ≥ 6.00 + photo sensor
RC/HDPE drain pipe · water supply pipe · U-channel · manhole · communication pit · pump stationPipe route plan + manholes ≤ 20.00 apart, slope ≥ 1:200 · trench section (width Ø + 0.40 · sand bedding/surround · cover ≥ 0.60 · warning tape for water pipes) · manhole/pump pit section (pump start-stop levels)
Retaining wall · fill · cut · detention pondWall elevation (weep holes @ 2.00 · joints ≤ 10.00) + cantilever wall section (base ≈ 0.6 H · gravel layer) · spot level plan · fill/cut section, slope 1 : 1.5, fill in layers ≤ 0.20 · detention pond with orifice
Traffic markings · speed bumps/wheel stops/convex mirrorsPlan of 90° parking stalls 2.50 × 5.00, drive aisle 6.00 + accessible stalls · thermoplastic marking section · speed bump 0.05–0.10 high · wheel stop
Garden/street light poles · in-ground lights · trees · large trees/palms · maintenancePole spacing plan ≈ 3–4 times the height, symmetrical on both sides · pole elevation + footing with anchor bolts · planting pit + 3-way stakes · monthly maintenance plan
Carport roof · pavilion · signs · guardhouse · flagpoles · playground · benches · bicycle parking · decorative pondSymmetrical column plan + section/elevation (clearance under the structure ≥ 2.40 · 3 flagpoles with the middle one taller · play equipment safety zone ≥ 1.80 · pond depth 0.45–0.60)

Preliminaries drawings — construction site layout · item-specific elevation/section

The Preliminaries tab is a take-off by code — choose a PRE code and the drawing changes with the item · references the Ministerial Regulation on construction work safety · government project sign requirements · ASTM D1586 (SPT) · ISO 7010 (safety signs)

DrawingWhat it shows
Construction site layout (left · site items)One standard layout for every code: temporary fence + entrance · wheel wash · guardhouse · project sign · site office/workers' quarters/toilets · storage sheds/laydown yard · temporary road · building + scaffolding · tower crane + radius · hoist · temporary power and water · survey benchmarks · boreholes · adjacent buildings + settlement points · underground utilities — red = the code's item, others in gray
Process flow chart (left · management/documents)Insurance · as-built · commissioning · safety officer · permits · personnel · shop drawings · reports · BIM · material testing · training · spare parts
Item-specific right drawingMetal-sheet fence 2.00 high + sign · public information sign 2.40 × 1.20, ≥ 2.00 high · scaffolding with 2.00 lifts + guardrails 1.00/0.50 + toe board 0.15 + netting · slab-edge guardrail · tower crane/mobile crane/hoist + foundation · shoring · temporary road · wheel wash + sediment pit · temporary power and water layout (RCD 30 mA) · survey benchmarks · boring log (SPT) · crack record · settlement points/inclinometer · GPR + test pits · safety signs + PPE · organization chart · S-curve · BIM

Other works drawings — demolition · elevators · gas · special systems · furniture · provisional sums

The Other works tab is a take-off by code — the drawing changes with the code's category · the code's item is highlighted in red · references EN 81-20/50 (elevators) · EN 115 (escalators) · NFPA 54/58/99 · HTM 02-01 (medical gases) · ISO 14644 (cleanrooms) · OAP notifications (radiation shielding) · environmental law (asbestos/hazardous waste)

CategoryPlan/layout (left) · section/elevation/system diagram (right)
DEM DemolitionExclusion zone ≥ H/2 + top-down demolition sequence · standard room section highlighting the items removed (walls, finishes, ceilings, roofs, doors and windows, sanitary fixtures, protection of existing work) · existing footings/pile head cutting · core drilling/wire saw · partial demolition + shoring · asbestos zone + 3-stage decontamination unit · tree relocation · disposal/waste/salvage procedure
LFT Elevators/escalatorsElevator shaft plan by type (passenger, home, freight, bed, firefighting + fire lobby, dumbwaiter, car lift, platform lift) arranged symmetrically · shaft section (pit 1.50 · overhead ≥ 4.50 · added landings · lifting beam) · escalator 30° / moving walk ≤ 12° · stair lift
GAS GasCylinder bank + manifold (duty/standby) · permanent tank/liquid oxygen tank · wall penetration + valve · LPG detector low ≤ 0.30 / NG high · outlets/bedhead panel +1.50 color-coded by gas type · Vac/Air plant room
SPE Special systemsCleanroom/operating room (top-down HEPA supply · positive pressure) · negative-pressure room + ante room · cold room · lead radiation shielding wall ≥ 2.10 · data center (raised floor · hot/cold aisles) · swimming pool/filtration system · soundproof room (double wall · floating floor) · AV · BMU · automated parking/parking guidance · refuse chute · fume hood/laboratory bench
FFE Furniture/equipmentSymmetrical layout plan, aisles ≥ 0.90 · table 0.75 / seat 0.45 · bed + bedside cabinet · curtains/curtain tracks · central kitchen (aisles ≥ 1.20) · cabinets/lockers · racking (forklift aisle ≥ 2.70)
PSM Provisional sumsCalculation principle (percentage/estimate → paid at actual cost) + share of the contract price · a separate line in the BOQ, Factor F not applied twice

Take-off by code — the table at the end of every tab

Most items in the price database (fire protection, external works, preliminaries, elevators, demolition, roadway, bridges, irrigation, etc.) have no dedicated table — previously their totals had to be entered as a lump sum in BOQ by system · now every tab has a "Take-off by code" table at the end so every item can be taken off row by row with its location and dimensions (1,169 codes — except pipe fittings % and insurance %, which the program calculates for you)

  1. Choose the sub-category (the field before the code)

    Each tab has dozens to hundreds of codes (existing codes + new codes under the 3-level work breakdown), so they are grouped by the sub-category on the WBS page, e.g. electrical: ELE.01 high voltage/transformers · ELE.02 main switchboards/distribution boards · ELE.03 feeders/conduits · ELE.04 lighting and outlets … · the number of items is shown under each category name · once a category is chosen, the code dropdown shows only that category · All categories = shows everything with category headers separating the groups (dot color by category) · choosing a code switches the category to match automatically · changing the category of a row that already has a code = clears the code so you can choose again within the category · you can assign codes to categories yourself on the WBS page and the dropdown groups follow

  2. Choose the item code

    Options are limited to that tab's categories, sorted by sub-category; you can search by code, name or category name; the unit and the fields to fill are shown under the name · if it is not in the list, type the name yourself (you can add the unit at the end of the name, e.g. Photoluminescent exit sign / set)

  3. Enter the quantity and dimensions according to the code's unit

    m = quantity × length · m² = quantity × length × width · m³ = quantity × length × width × thickness · other units (set, point, each, kg, job) = quantity · a negative quantity = deduction · fields not used by that unit are ignored

  4. See the drawing and formula below the table

    The drawing changes with the unit (linear · sheet · block · counting grid) along with the row's formula

TabCodes that can be taken off in this table
Structure · Architecture · Built-inAll STR · ARC · BLT (e.g. sheet piles, retaining walls, precast slabs, glass walls, railings, signs)
Electrical · Sanitary · HVAC · Fire protectionAll ELE · SAN · HVA · FIR (e.g. transformers, generators, water tanks, ducts, sprinkler heads)
External works · PreliminariesAll EXT · PRE
Other works (new tab)Demolition DEM · elevators LFT · gas GAS · special systems SPE · equipment FFE · provisional sums and contingencies PSM
Roadway · Bridge/box culvert · IrrigationAll ROD · BRG · IRR — the table sits below the road segment / bridge element / irrigation structure table
💡 Use instead of + Add item in the BOQ Both routes feed the BOQ the same way, but this table keeps the location and dimensions row by row, so you can trace where each quantity came from (the sub-item in the BOQ shows its source as take-off by code) · do not enter the same item in both places

Elevation · section of the row being entered

Below every take-off table that has dimensions (structure · rebar schedule · structural steel · fixings · rooms · doors and windows · masonry walls by line · metal sheet · stair finishes · ceilings · built-in · air conditioning · road segments · bridge elements · canals · irrigation structures) there is an elevation · section panel drawn from the actual values in the row — orange dimension lines show which field is which dimension on the drawing, together with the numbers entered

  • Click anywhere on a row = show/hide the drawing — the row's drawing opens below the row (with an orange bar on the left · under the row number ▸ means closed / ▾ means open); click the same row again to close it · clicking a number input only opens the drawing and never closes it while you type · buttons and dropdowns in the row (type, material, copy, delete) do not open or close the drawing
  • The drawing appears right below the selected row — you can look at it while entering numbers even in a table with dozens of rows, without scrolling to the end of the table · the clicked row stays where it was on screen · when the table scrolls horizontally the drawing stays in place
  • The 📐 button at the end of the row (next to the copy button) — opens that row's drawing · press it again on the same row to hide it · or press ‹ › in the drawing panel to move one row at a time
  • Beside the drawing is the meaning of each field and the formula the program uses to calculate that row's quantity, e.g. concrete = 1.5 × 1.5 × 0.5 × 15 = 16.88 m³
  • For RC elements the drawing changes with the type — footings show a plan + section (excavation margin 0.30 m each side, sand and lean concrete at the bottom of the pit) · columns show a cross-section + elevation · beams show a section + elevation · box culverts show the inner opening, wall thickness and excavation depth
  • Drawings follow drafting conventions — shared by all building elements (5 footing types · columns · beams · slabs · walls · stairs · piles · precast)
    • Section cut lines on the plan A-A · B-B are chain lines with thick ends, arrows showing the viewing direction and letters at both ends matching the section titles
    • Center lines (CL) on symmetrical cross-sections — column cross-section (two axes) · beam section · column on footing · pile cross-section
    • Longitudinal bars arranged symmetrically — added bars go on opposite faces in pairs (e.g. 12 bars = 4 per face) · crossties engage the actual middle bars of each face, every other bar counted from the corner, with a 135° hook at one end and 90° at the other, alternating ends bar by bar (ACI 25.7.2.3)
    • Leaders are bent lines with a horizontal shoulder before the text, pointing to the part of the bar nearest the label · labels never overlap and leaders never cross · close level markers in elevations shift their text so it stays readable
    • The bar size label at the top right wraps to two lines instead of being cut off with “…”
  • Excavation margin (m) — the column after dig depth in the structure, bridge element and irrigation structure tables: working space around the footing on each side; blank = default 0.30 m (the field shows 0.30 in faded text · label "each side · default") · enter 0 = excavate tight to the footing · enter another value to suit the site, e.g. 0.50 when formwork or dewatering is needed · excavation, sand bedding, lean concrete and backfill are calculated from (width + 2 × margin) × (length + 2 × margin) · box culverts: trench width = culvert + 2 × margin · for other row types (columns, beams, slabs, piles …) the dig depth/margin fields are gray "not used" · the plan drawing and the excavation formula below it update immediately with the value entered
  • Rebar as drawn — rows for footings, columns, beams, slabs, walls and stairs (and bridge/irrigation elements) get automatically suggested rebar based on the element size, drawn on the plan and the elevation/section with a size label at the top right of the drawing · colors by bar type: main reinforcement · additional reinforcement · stirrups/ties · perimeter bars
    ElementFields entered (size + number/spacing)Length calculated (per DPT 1103-64 manual)
    FootingBottom mat 2 ways @ · top mat 2 ways @ (enabled automatically when the footing is ≥ 0.80 m thick or a side is ≥ 3.00 m) · perimeter bars … rounds · column dowels … bars (default “None” = counted with the column longitudinal bars) Bottom: width − 2·cover + bent up at both ends · top: + 12db hook · perimeter: footing perimeter + lap · dowels: embedded down to the bottom mat + 12db hook + lap up into the column
    Column · pedestalLongitudinal bars … bars · additional longitudinal bars … bars · ties @ · crossties … legs/set (enabled automatically when there are ≥ 4 bars per face) Longitudinal: height + lap by grade · ties: around the section (to the outside of the tie) + 135° hooks 2 × max(6db, 75 mm) · crossties: inside width of the tie + hooks at both ends × number of tie sets
    Beam · pier capContinuous bottom bars … bars · continuous top bars … bars · top bars at supports … bars/side · additional bottom bars at midspan … bars (length 0.75L, cut off L/8 from the supports) · skin bars … bars/side (required when the beam is deeper than > 900 mm) · end-zone stirrups (L/4 both ends) @ · middle-zone stirrups (L/2) @ Top/bottom: span + 90° hook (12db) into the columns at both ends · at supports: 2 sides × (L/4 + hook) · stirrups: first one 50 mm from the column face, end and middle zones separate
    SlabBottom short direction @ · bottom long direction @ · top bars over supports @ (“None” = not counted) · top mat at mid-panel @ (flat slab = top bars in the middle strip 0.22ℓn, enabled automatically) Bottom: span + embedment into supports 2 × 0.10 (RB: 180° hook) · top: around the edges, extending 0.30 of the short span + 12db hook (one-way slabs count the long edges only)
    RC wallVertical @ · horizontal @ (per layer) · wall end U-bars @ · number of layers chosen in the supporting dataVertical: height + lap · horizontal: length − 2·cover + 12db hooks at both ends · U-bars: 2 ends × (inside wall width + lap with the horizontal bars on 2 sides)
    StairBottom along the slope @ · transverse distribution @ · top bars at supports @ · nosing bars … bars/stepMain: slope (horizontal run × 1.2) + embedment 2 × 0.30 · top: 2 ends × (slope/4 + hook) · nosing: number of steps × (width + hook)
    The supporting data (top bar of the panel) affects the length of every field — deformed bar grade SD30 / SD40 (default) / SD50 → lap length 30db / 36db / 45db (RB = SR24 40db + hook) · field numbers ①②③ — each field in the panel has a circled number in the same color as its bar line, and the labels on the elevation/section start with the same number (e.g. “add. bottom ④ 2-DB20”) so you can look at the drawing and fill in that numbered field right away · fields still set to “None” have faded numbers · the element configuration can also be chosen on the top bar of the panel (the same value as the configuration column) — field names, lengths and the drawing update immediately · the new optional fields (additional bottom bars · skin bars · top mat · wall end U-bars · nosing bars) default to “None”, so existing rows do not change — enable them when the drawings call for them · cover blank = per the DPT 1101-64 manual (the value and its source are shown under the field); you can enter your own — less than the manual shows ⚠ · stock bar length 10 / 12 m — bars longer than the stock length get extra laps automatically · walls have bar layers 1 / 2 · each field has an Enter: line saying what to enter (number of bars/spacing/rounds) and a ✓/⚠ line comparing it with the manual's criteria for that field as soon as you edit it · beam rows edited before top and bottom were split (single field “top 2 + bottom”) are converted automatically to bottom = original number − 2 · top = 2 · you can change them yourself in the rebar as drawn panel below the dimension list beside the drawing: choose the size (RB6–DB32 or None) and enter the number of bars / spacing / number of rounds — the drawing and weight update immediately · rows not yet edited are calculated in the BOQ as concrete volume × kg/m³ as before (label "auto-suggested") · edit any field and that row's BOQ calculates the weight from the rebar as drawn, split into codes by actual size (RB6 → STR-009 … DB25–DB32 → STR-015 · bridges/irrigation split DB/RB); the label changes to "BOQ uses rebar as drawn" · press Restore auto to go back to kg/m³ · if the building's rebar method is set to Manual · bar list, the values in this panel do not go into the BOQ (the panel says so)
  • Reinforcement details per the DPT 1103-64 / DPT 1101-64 / EIT 1008 / ACI 318-19 manuals — rebar elevations and sections are drawn following the figures in the manuals, and below the drawing are the row's cover, standard hooks and lap lengths, together with check results against the criteria (✓ pass · ⚠ should check/fix) based on the row's element size and rebar
    ElementDrawing (per the manual figures)Criteria checks
    BeamClosed stirrups with 135° hooks · cover to the stirrup face · top bars with 90° hooks into the columns · bottom bars embedded into the supports · first stirrup ≤ 50 mm · splice locations: top = midspan · bottom = support to L/5 (Figures 7-1, 8-1)Stirrups ≤ d/2 and ≤ 600 mm · top/bottom ≥ 2 bars · beam width enough for a single layer of bars · beams deeper than > 900 mm require skin reinforcement
    ColumnTies with 135° hooks · crossties when there are ≥ 4 bars per face or the middle bars are more than 150 mm apart · lap splices above the floor · offset bends ≤ 1:6 · first tie ≤ s/2 (Figure 10-1) ρ 1–8% · ≥ 4 bars · ties ≤ min(16db, 48dt, least dimension) · ties ≥ 10 mm (RB9 to be confirmed by the designer)
    FootingCover 75 mm · column dowels with 90° hooks resting on the bottom mat · column ties within the footing (Figure 11-1)0.0018Ag · spacing ≤ min(3h, 450) · depth above the bottom bars ≥ 150 mm (pile footing ≥ 300)
    SlabTwo-way slab plan (long/short ≤ 2) divided into the column strip 0.25·min(l1, l2) and the middle strip (Figure 9-1) · the section shows top bars over the supports (per the drawings — not part of the row's rebar fields) 0.0018Ag in both directions · main bars ≤ min(3h, 450) · long direction/shrinkage bars ≤ min(5h, 450)
    Wall · retaining wallThe retaining wall is drawn as a cantilever wall: main bars on the soil face bent into the base · top bars in the heel · bottom bars in the toe · backfill (Figure 12-1) ρℓ ≥ 0.0015 · ρt ≥ 0.0025 (fy < 420) · ≤ min(3h, 450) · thicker than > 250 mm requires 2 layers
    StairSymmetrical drawing: lower landing · flight · upper landing of equal length, resting on support beams · constant waist thickness throughout · crossed bars at the inside corners for both the top bars (top face at the lower landing) and the bottom bars (soffit at the upper landing), extending past the corner ≥ ld (Figure 13-1 b) · distribution bars · the plan shows the main/distribution bars and the number of steps0.0018Ag · main bars ≤ min(3h, 450) · distribution bars ≤ min(5h, 450)
    Drawings are symmetrical, following standard details — footings fill the section view with the pedestal, excavation margin and sand/lean concrete layers · columns between the beams/slabs below and above (lap above the floor, offset bend in the beam, ties through the joint) · single-span beams between two columns showing the stirrup zones L/4 – L/2 – L/4 · continuous slabs over two beams, top bars extending 0.30 L, and a plan of representative bar strips with symbols (one-way slabs show top bars on the long edges only) · walls on footings with hooked dowels, lap zones and hooks into the slab above · stairs with landings at both ends · cover per DPT 1101-64 Table 13 and the fire-resistance criteria of Table 16: footings cast against soil 75 · beams 30 (width ≥ 300 mm → 40) · columns 35 (least dimension ≥ 300 mm → 40) · interior slabs, walls and stairs 20 · in contact with soil/exposed to weather (pedestals, pier caps, bridge decks, retaining walls, irrigation structures) 50 (db > 16) / 40 mm · lap length DPT 1103-64 clause 5.5.4.1: SR24 40db + hook · SD30 30db · SD40 36db · SD50 45db · hooks longitudinal bars 90° extending 12db · ties 135° extending ≥ 6db and ≥ 75 mm · grade assumed from the size name (RB = SR24 · DB = SD40)
    ⚠ The checks are an aid and do not replace design Drawings signed by the design engineer take precedence over the manual values · rebar lengths as drawn are calculated with the same criteria (cover, laps, hooks, splices by stock length) — so the BOQ totals of rows with edited rebar match the drawing
  • Rebar as drawn is sent to the rebar cutting plan (Bar-Cut List) automatically — when there is no bar bending schedule (BBS) yet and the rebar schedule table is empty, the Bar-cut plan page uses the “rebar as drawn of RC elements” from every row (building, bridge, irrigation) automatically (label Auto) · converted into BBS rows by actual shape: footing mats = U shape (21) split into two directions · stirrups/perimeter bars (beams: end zone + middle zone) = closed stirrups with 135° hooks (51) · continuous top/bottom beam bars = U shape with 12db hooks into the columns · column dowels = L shape (11) · longitudinal bars, slab mats, walls and stairs = straight bars (00) — bar marks use the element name in the row, e.g. F1-1, C1-2 · edit the size/number/spacing in the rebar-as-drawn panel and the cutting plan recalculates immediately (cutting length calculated from the shape, hooks, bend radii and laps of the chosen standard) · you can choose the source yourself under “Pieces to plan” · to define shapes or hooks yourself, press Copy to cut schedule · press Send to building BOQ to send only the building's rebar (bridge/irrigation rebar is already counted in its own category and is not sent twice)
  • Piles are drawn by the type chosen in the material / grade field (15 types) — the cross-section and the in-soil elevation show the actual shape of that type: driven precast I-section (side grooves) · solid square · hollow hexagonal · spun pile (hollow, prestressing wire, welded joint) · micropile (short segments joined) · dry bored / wet bored (temporary steel casing, rebar cage) · CFA · barrette (rectangular panel) · steel H-pile · steel pipe (open end) · sheet pile (plan of interlocking joints) · soil-cement · jet grout · timber pile (pile head below the groundwater level) — below the drawing are the construction method and codes that can be added, e.g. welded joint STR-205 · no material chosen = I-section, default I-22
  • Rebar schedule bars are drawn by type — DB deformed bars show longitudinal ribs and transverse lugs in both the elevation and the cross-section · RB round bars are smooth with hooked ends · thickness in the enlarged view and cross-section scales with the actual Ø (comparable between sizes) · below the drawing are the TIS standard, grade, weight in kg/m, cross-sectional area and the row's total weight
  • Associated items unticked in the Auto-calculated column also disappear from the drawing, e.g. untick the metal sheet flashing/trim and the orange flashing line disappears
  • Dimensions that are very small compared with the element size (5 cm sand layer · slab thickness · pavement layers) are enlarged to be visible, and the drawing is marked not to scale · the numbers on the drawing are always the actual values
  • Press Hide drawing to collapse that table's panel; the browser remembers it (open it again with the 📐 button at the end of the row) · tables with no rows yet show the drawing of a default row as an example below the table
Element typeDimension 1Dimension 2Dimension 3
Footing · bridge footingWidth (plan)Length (plan)Thickness · dig depth and excavation margin in separate fields
Column · pedestalSection widthSection depthHeight
Beam · pier capWidthDepthSpan length
Slab · bridge deck · apronWidthLengthThickness
RC wall · wing wall · irrigation structure wallLengthHeightThickness
StairWidthHorizontal runWaist thickness (×1.5 allowance for steps)
PileSection size / ØBy type (see table)Length per pile
Box culvertInside widthInside heightCulvert length · thickness/dimension 4 = wall thickness

Preview & print A4/A3 — quantity take-off sheets with drawings

The Building · Roadway · Bridge / box culvert · Irrigation pages have a Preview & print A4/A3 button at the top right (next to the summary figures) — giving you a booklet you can hand to the client, the checker or the site crew right away

  • What is printed — every row of the tables on the open page · the Building page prints the selected sub-tab (Structure · Architecture · Electrical …); if the By WBS or By floor tab is open, which has no tables, all tabs are printed
  • One block per row, in this order:
    1. Element name/location and every field entered (price codes printed with the item name · associated auto items ✓ counted / ✗ unticked)
    2. The row's results, e.g. concrete, formwork, rebar, excavation
    3. Elevation · section · plan — the same drawing as the panel below the row (drawn from the row's actual values) at full paper width
    4. Meaning of the dimensions (dimension 1 · 2 · 3 · dig depth · excavation margin) and the formula used, with the standard's check criteria
  • Grouped by table (blue header bar showing the number of rows) · at the end of the booklet is a table of lump-sum values / category parameters (only those with values) · header and signature boxes are the same as in the other booklets
  • Choose the paper A4 portrait · A4 landscape · A3 portrait · A3 landscape on the preview bar · a block is never split across pages · press Print / save PDF

Add rows · type your own items · untick auto-calculated work

Every take-off table still has + Add row as before, and two things have been added

  • Price code fields cover every sub-category — floor code · ceiling code · wall code (room table) · door/window code · wall type and wall finish (wall line table) · sheet, insulation, facing (metal sheet table) have codes for every sub-category ARC.01–ARC.12 of the new work breakdown, e.g. solid wood flooring, rubber/SPC flooring, carpet, metal ceilings, acoustic ceilings, glass walls, rolling doors, automatic doors, standing seam roofs · codes without a price yet are labeled no price set · floors and ceilings can be set to None (rooms with no ceiling)
  • Type your own items — type a name in the search box of the code field, then press Use this value to get a custom item with code OWN-001 … and a unit according to the field (floor/ceiling/wall = m² · door = set, except names containing window/glass/rolling = m²) you can add your own unit at the end of the name, e.g. Glass railing / m · the price starts at 0; enter it in BOQ by system or on the Price database page → Custom items · custom items count only their own quantity and do not bring along plastering, painting or stiffener columns · the + Add item field in the BOQ and on the WBS page also accepts items outside the price database (on the WBS page you must choose a sub-category first)
  • The “Auto-calculated” column — work that the program calculates along with the row is shown as ✓ tags; press one to make it ✕ = not counted for that row only; press again to count it · if you do not want it calculated automatically but still need the item, untick it and enter the quantity yourself in BOQ by system → + Add item · every existing row is all ✓, so existing project totals do not move
TableAssociated items that can be unticked
Structure · bridge · irrigation structureFormwork · lean concrete/sand under footings (footings only)
Structural steelAnti-rust paint (e.g. for galvanized steel) · bolts/steel plates (calculated as a % of the steel weight — untick if already taken off in the Connections & fixings tab)
Connections & fixingsBolt setting-out drawing (steel column base type only)
Room / areaPlaster · paint · stiffener columns · skirting · ceiling cornice · waterproofing and mirror (bathroom floors) · room sign
Doors – windowsSecurity grilles/insect screens (sliding/awning windows)
Masonry walls · plasterStiffener columns and lintels (the wall finish can be chosen in the wall finish column)
Metal sheet walls · sign facesFlashing/trim (m) · framing · anti-rust coating for framing
Air conditionersExtra refrigerant piping and condensate drain
Road segmentClearing · subgrade compaction · grass + slope dressing · roadside ditch · prime/tack coat · traffic markings · signs/guide posts/reflective road studs
Irrigation canalClearing · grass on canal banks · road on the embankment · canal lining steel mesh

The electrical point, sanitary fixture and built-in tables are already entered as direct quantities; cables, pipes and values calculated from parameters can be overridden in manual entries below the table (dashed fields = auto values)

Built-in furniture tab

Cabinet and counter work fixed to the building — kitchen cabinets, wardrobes, vanity counters, shelving, headboards, decorative walls entered set by set, with the room or location · it is a category of construction work, not purchased equipment, so it flows into PR.1 (A) as its own work category, not PR.2 (A)

FieldWhat to enter
Room / locatione.g. Kitchen Bedroom 1 — use the names from the room layout in the drawings so it can be traced back
Work type11 types — this choice determines the formula: both whether the row is calculated in meters or square meters and which price database code it uses, so it can only be chosen from the list and cannot be typed
Surface material / topThe meaning differs between countertops and the other types; see the next section
Length · heightIn meters · rows calculated per meter still need a height, because it is used to calculate the door face area for the surface material cost — except countertops, which do not use the height field at all
SetsFor exactly identical sets, enter one row and give the number of sets; no need for separate rows
Doors · drawersHinges and soft-close slides are counted by the numbers entered · handles are counted automatically = doors + drawers
AccessoriesClothes rails, pull-out baskets, carousel shelves — counted together as sets
LED lightingLength of the under-cabinet LED strip per set in meters · the system multiplies by the number of sets, including drivers and switches
💡 Why some rows are priced per meter and others per square meter Kitchen base cabinets, kitchen wall cabinets, vanity counters and built-in desks already have standard heights, so the market prices them per linear meter · wardrobes, storage cabinets, shelving, headboards and decorative walls have no fixed height, so they are priced per square meter of door face · the gray-background column at the far right, Priced by, shows which unit each row uses, so there is no guessing

Surface materials are priced as a difference

The base price of every type is a melamine finish; if you choose another finish (laminate · real wood veneer · high-gloss acrylic · PVC/PET wrap · aluminium-framed glass doors) the system adds one more line to the BOQ as a difference, calculated by door face area, without changing the price of the cabinet itself

This is done so that when you open the BOQ you can see immediately how much choosing veneer instead of melamine moves the price, clearly separated from the cabinet cost — when the owner asks to cut the budget, you can point straight to which line to remove and how much it saves, while the cabinet quantity stays the same

⚠ Countertops use the material field with a different meaning The countertop type has no finish difference line, because the material chosen (granite · solid surface · stainless steel 304 · laminate/post-formed) is the top itself, not a finish applied over the door face — choosing it gives the price database code for that type of top directly, and the height field is not used, so the door face area column shows a dash
⚠ The default prices of these 24 items are not yet referenced to any agency's price list They are set from general market price ranges; if you will use them for an actual submission, first adjust them to the price list your agency uses — edit them in the Price database menu, codes starting with BLT-
The Price database page already says this itself — every row in this category has an estimated tag next to the code, and an explanation bar appears above the table when you select the category Built-in furniture or view All categories · no need to come back to the manual to find this out
📄 Four government price books checked — none of them covers this Recorded in boq-basis.js: what was checked and what was found, so the search does not have to be repeated and so that "no price list supports this" is a conclusion with a source, not an unsupported claim
Source checkedWhat it gave
Labour rate list W 809 (all 44 pages)No labour rate for installing built-in cabinets or counters · the closest is demolition cost
Unit composite material cost manual, Comptroller General's DepartmentOnly RC counters and marble/granite counters, which are construction work, not built-in cabinet work
Building construction criteria 2569Clause 8, page 175 only says that permanently installed built-in equipment is to be counted in the direct cost, with no price given
Material and labour prices 2569 (OBEC)States plainly “2. Interior finishing work (no data)”
Official figures that do exist and are relevant — not installation prices, but usable as a partial cross-check · W 809 clause 2.9.48 counters/storage cabinets demolition cost THB 185/m (demolish and stockpile) and THB 226/m (demolish and haul away) · clause 2.6.30 stainless steel sink, 2 bowls THB 328/set · clause 2.6.31 single bowl THB 308/set · the checkpoint verifies these four items against the actual labour rate list on every run, so a wrong clause number or labour rate is flagged immediately
✓ The work group question is settled, not pending Building construction criteria 2569 clause 8, page 175 states that contracted equipment (built-in equipment) installed permanently and not removable is to be calculated in Part 1 direct cost for calculating Factor F · so this category belongs in the building work group and uses the building Factor F, which is where it has been placed correctly
💡 Numbers in input fields are shown with thousands separators Price fields show 15,000.00 for easy reading, but when you click in they switch to the raw number and select the whole field, so you can type over it without deleting the commas yourself · you can also type 1,250.50 yourself; the system reads it

Rebar cutting plan (Bar-Cut List)

The Bar-cut plan menu in the take-off group does two jobs in sequence — a Bar Bending Schedule that calculates the cutting length of each bar mark from its shape, hooks and standard bend radii, and then a cutting plan that works out which pieces each 10 or 12 m stock bar should be cut into, so you buy the least steel and throw away the least scrap; it gives the number of bars to order, the weight and a cut sheet for the crew

  1. Choose the standard and the bar length

    The Cutting and bending settings card — standard EIT 011008 / ACI 318-19 (default, commonly used in Thailand) or BS 8666:2020 / EN 1992-1-1 · for the stock bar length press the chip 10 m 12 m or 10 + 12 m, or type your own separated by commas (TIS 24-2559 specifies standard lengths of 10 and 12 m)

  2. Fill in the cut schedule

    Press + Add row and enter the bar mark, element, size, shape, dimensions A B C (meters, measured out-to-out per the drawings), end hooks, number of elements and number of bars per element · or press Load example to see a 2-storey house + bored piles (replaces the cut schedule of the open project) · or Pull from rebar schedule entered on the Building page, then change the shapes to match the drawings · when you choose an RB size the system adds 180° hooks at both ends automatically, because smooth bars must have hooked ends

  3. Read the cutting plan

    Choose a bar size tab — each strip is one stock bar, drawn to its true proportional length; the colored blocks are the pieces cut (point to one to see its bar mark) orange hatching is an offcut long enough to keep for later use, gray hatching is scrap · the × number is how many bars are cut with the same pattern

  4. Print the cut sheet or send it to the BOQ

    Preview & print cut sheet gives an A4 landscape sheet with both the cut schedule and the cutting patterns for every size, plus a bending shape for every row (see Cut sheets for the site crew) · Export CSV opens in Excel · Send to building BOQ sends every row into the rebar schedule table (lengths already include laps; sending again replaces the previous set rather than stacking) and switches the rebar method to manual for you (see Rebar calculation method) · one send is enough — after that, whenever you edit the cut schedule (add, delete, change quantities, or rebar rows from the PDF drawing change), the rebar schedule table and the BOQ update immediately

⚠ Rows that come from the cutting plan are edited in the cutting plan Rows in the rebar schedule table that were sent from the cutting plan are regenerated every time the cut schedule changes; if you edit or delete them directly in the rebar schedule table, the values will be overwritten · rows entered by hand in that table are not touched · if Pieces to plan is set to the rebar schedule table, the cutting plan does not send back to that same table, to avoid double counting

Automatic cutting plan from the rebar schedule table

Enter rebar in the Rebar schedule tab of the Building page, and below the table there is a Rebar cutting plan · Bar-Cut List card that recalculates every time the table is edited, just like the structural steel cutting plan

  • Each row of the table is a bar piece — quantity = elements × bars/element · the length in the table is taken as the cutting length (hooks included), rounded up per the settings · marks R1, R2 … are rows 1, 2 …
  • Bars longer than the stock bar (e.g. 13 m bored pile longitudinal bars · 29.1 m perimeter bars) are lap-spliced automatically using the lap length in the settings, and the number of lap splices is shown
  • The card shows the stock bars to order · the order weight compared with what the BOQ calculated (table + wastage allowance — the figure turns red when the actual order is larger, mostly because of laps) · scrap % · savings compared with unplanned cutting · a table by size, and the cutting patterns for the selected size
  • The stock bar length 10 / 12 / 10 + 12 m · lap length · kerf · minimum offcut length to keep can all be set in the card — they are the same settings as on the Bar-cut plan page
  • The Bar-cut plan page uses this table automatically when that page's cut schedule (BBS) is still empty (labeled Auto) — if you want hooks and bend radii calculated from the shapes, press Pull from rebar schedule and then edit the shapes in the cut schedule, or choose the source yourself under Pieces to plan for cutting
  • The BOQ still calculates the weight as table × (1 + wastage allowance) as before — the cutting plan is ordering information and a cut sheet for the crew; it does not change the price

Cut sheets for the site crew — bending shapes and cut position strips

The cut sheet printed from Preview & print cut sheet is designed so the crew can take it to the bar cutting and bending bench and follow it right away. It has two parts

Part / columnWhat the crew sees
Cutting and bending schedule · the bend shape / bar columnA sketch of the bending shape of each bar mark, with the actual dimension in meters on each leg (A · B · C measured out-to-out, matching the dimension fields) and the end hooks as chosen — 90° · 135° · 180°, one end or both ends · below the sketch are the shape code and name
Cut length · quantity · weightCutting length per piece with hooks and bend radii already accounted for (rounded up per the settings) · total number of pieces · weight · if longer than the stock bar, the number of lap splices is shown
Cutting plan for each size · pattern rows 1, 2, 3 …A cut position strip drawn to the true proportional length of the stock bar — the cut pieces are blue in two alternating shades · orange hatching = offcut long enough to keep for later use · gray hatching = scrap · below the strip is the length of each piece, and the rightmost cell shows which piece belongs to which bar mark and how many

Every shape in the program can be drawn — straight bar · single 90° bend (L) · double 90° bend (U) · crank bar · closed stirrup · circular tie · spiral · user-defined length · spirals use the symbols ⌀ = outside diameter · p = pitch · n = number of turns

⚠ Sketches are not to scale Short and long legs are roughly proportional so the shape can be read, but very short legs are drawn long enough to see · bend to the numbers on the legs, not by measuring the sketch · rows pulled from the rebar schedule table have no shape, so they have no sketch — change the shape in the cut schedule first · always check against the drawings and specifications before actual cutting
💡 Print for easy reading on site The default is A4 landscape · for schedules with dozens of rows choose A3 landscape and the sketches get larger · press Print / save PDF and choose the destination “Save as PDF” to send it to the foreman via LINE · sketches and strips always print; there is no need to tick “Background graphics” — tick it only if you also want the colored header bars

Cutting plan examples in all 5 sample projects

Every sample project has a bar bending schedule for actual elements of that job, plus offcuts already on site to try out · open a sample project from All projects, then go to Bar-cut plan; at the top there is a How to explore this sample project card telling you what that sample demonstrates and the steps to try one by one (you can press Hide tips)

Sample projectCut scheduleWhat to look at
Rural highway + RC bridge11 rowsBridge deck bars DK-2 are 30 m long, longer than a stock bar — the system splits them into pieces and adds the laps automatically · footings, piers, pier caps, wing walls and box culverts
8-storey office building11 rowsStock bars set to a 10 + 12 m mix; the system picks the length that leaves the least scrap for each cutting pattern · a 4.20 m DB25 offcut on site is used before buying new · circular ties for round columns, and crank bars in the stairs
Warehouse, zone B28 rowsYard slab bars SG-1 are 5.90 m, so a 10 m bar yields only one piece — try pressing the 12 m chip and the number of DB12 bars to order drops from 7,200 to 3,634 · RB25 dowels at slab joints
Irrigation canal improvement7 rowsRegulator structure, gate piers, footbridge · canal lining slabs RB9 with 180° hooks at both ends per the specifications
2-storey house11 rowsAll the common shapes — straight bars, L shapes, U shapes, crank bars, rectangular ties and circular ties for bored piles · a 13.20 m beam and 12.50 m bored piles with lap splices
💡 Try this Choose a bar size in Cutting plan by bar size to see what pieces each bar is cut into → change the stock bar length and compare the number of bars and the scrap percentage → add or remove offcuts already on site → press Preview & print cut sheet to see what the sheet for the crew looks like · feel free to edit the sample projects; if you want the original set back, load the sample project again
Samples loaded before 26 September 2569 For samples loaded before the cutting plan existed, when you open the project the system fills in that sample's cutting plan and structural steel automatically, only the parts that are missing — anything you have edited is not touched · if you want an entirely new set, press Load all 5 samples into the project list on the All projects page (the old samples are replaced; your own projects are not affected)

Supported shapes

CodeShapeCutting length
00Straight barA + end hooks
11Single 90° bend (L shape)A + B − δ90
21Double 90° bend (U shape)A + B + C − 2δ90
CK45° crank barA + 2B(√2 − 1) · A total horizontal length · B crank height
51Closed stirrup with 135° hooks (beam/column stirrup)2(A + B) − 4d − 8R + 3πR + 2e₁₃₅
CICircular tie with 135° hooks (round columns/bored piles)π(A − d) + 2(¾πR + e₁₃₅)
77SpiralC·√((π(A − d))² + B²) · A outside ⌀ · B pitch · C number of turns
99User-defined cutting lengthA

Codes follow BS 8666 / ISO 3766 where they match · R = D/2 + d/2 is the centerline radius · δ90 = 2(D/2 + d) − (π/2)R is the deduction at a bend · e is the straight extension after the hook · lengths are calculated along the bar centerline from the actual geometry, differing from the simplified formulas in BS 8666 by no more than about 1.5 mm per bend, then rounded up to every 10 mm (selectable)

Standard values used

ItemEIT 011008 / ACI 318-19BS 8666:2020 / EN 1992-1-1
Inside bend diameter, longitudinal bars6d (≤ DB25) · 8d (DB28–36) · 10d (≥ DB40) — ACI Table 25.3.14d (d ≤ 16) · 7d (d > 16) — BS 8666 Table 2
Inside bend diameter, stirrups/ties4d (≤ DB16) — ACI Table 25.3.24d / 7d, same as longitudinal bars
Straight extension after 90° hook12d · stirrups ≤ DB16 use 6d ≥ 75 mm10d (stirrups ≥ 70 mm)
Straight extension after 135° hook6d ≥ 75 mm5d ≥ 50 mm
Straight extension after 180° hook4d ≥ 65 mm5d ≥ 50 mm
Lap length (default)Deformed bars 40d · round bars 48d · not less than 0.30 m — if the drawings specify per ACI 25.5 (Class B = 1.3ℓd) or EN 1992-1-1 §8.7, change the multiplier to match the drawings
💡 Bars longer than the stock bar are split automatically For example, 12.50 m bored pile longitudinal bars with 10 m stock bars — the system splits them into one full stock bar (no cutting needed) and a last piece that already includes the lap length; the cutting length in the schedule has a * mark — point to the number to see the number of splices and the lap length · on site, stagger the splice locations so they are not in one line and avoid the regions of maximum moment

How the cutting is planned, and how far you can trust it

This is a one-dimensional cutting stock (1D cutting stock) problem; the system tries several methods and chooses the one with the shortest total length of steel bought — column generation by Gilmore & Gomory (solves a linear program to find the best cutting patterns, then rounds to whole bars) · SHP (picks the pattern with the least scrap and repeats it) · FFD / BFD (places the longest pieces first) · the pieces in each bar never exceed the bar length and every piece must be cut exactly, no fewer and no more

Every size has a theoretical lower bound — the smallest possible number of bars (or length, when several lengths are enabled); if the plan equals the lower bound the card shows This plan is optimal · it is also compared with unplanned cutting (cutting one piece size until the bar runs out, then discarding the remainder) to show how many kilograms and baht planning saves, using material prices from the project's price database

SettingWhat it does
Pieces to planThe cut schedule on this page · the building's rebar schedule table (lengths in the table are taken as cutting lengths) · or both sources — watch out for double counting
Kerf per cutShear cutters use 0 · fiber cutting discs about 3 mm
Keep offcuts longer thanDefault 1.00 m — offcuts longer than this count as kept offcuts, not scrap
Offcuts already on siteEnter offcuts from previous work (size · length · quantity); the system assigns short pieces to these offcuts before opening new stock bars
Custom inside bend diameter / straight extension after hookEntered as a multiple of d when the drawings specify particular values · 0 = per the chosen standard
💡 Actual scrap compared with the BOQ allowance The Scrap from the cutting plan card is compared with the percentage the BOQ allows for rebar (7%) — it turns green when the actual cutting plan leaves less scrap than the allowance; use it for ordering steel and checking that quantities are reasonable, but it does not change the wastage percentage in the median price, which still follows clause 4 of the building criteria

6Material and grade catalog

The Material / grade field in the structural tables is more than a text label — once you pick one, the system takes that material's price, averages it weighted by quantity, and writes the result back as the unit price of the code in the price database

What you can choose from

GroupStandards covered
ConcreteTIS 213 (fc′ 180–500 ksc) · EN 206 / BS 8500 (C20/25–C50/60) · ACI / ASTM C94 (3,000–6,000 psi) · sulfate-resistant, waterproof, SCC, steel-fiber, lightweight, shotcrete, tremie (underwater) concrete
Reinforcing steelTIS 20 / 24 / 95 / 420 / 737 · ASTM A615 Gr.40–80, A706, A767, A955, A1064, A416 · BS 4449 B500B/C · JIS G3112 SD295–SD490 · GFRP · mechanical couplers
Structural steelTIS 1227 (SS400–SM570) · ASTM A36, A572, A992, A588, A500, A53 · EN 10025-2 (S235–S355J2) · JIS G3466 · high-strength bolts · fireproofing
Piles (90 items in 12 groups) Driven prestressed I-section piles I-12 · I-15 · I-18 · I-22 · I-26 · I-30 · I-35 · I-40 (TIS 397) · Solid square 0.15–0.50 m · Hollow hexagonal 0.25–0.45 m · Hollow spun round (Spun) Ø0.25–1.00 m (TIS 396) · Dry-process bored piles Ø0.35 · 0.40 · 0.50 · 0.60 m · Wet process Ø0.40 · 0.50 · 0.60 · 0.80 · 1.00 · 1.20 · 1.50 · 1.80 · 2.00 m · Micropiles square 0.18/0.22 · round Ø0.21/0.25/0.30 · Steel piles H-Pile 200–400 · steel pipe Ø406–813 mm · Sheet piles FSP-II/III/IV · Barrettes 0.80×2.00–1.50×2.80 m · CFA Ø0.40–0.80 · Deep cement mixing (DCM) · Jet grouting · Timber piles eucalyptus/pine
Slab systemsCast-in-place · precast planks · Hollow Core · Post-tension · composite · Double-Tee · Waffle · Bubble Deck
FormworkFilm-faced plywood · steel forms · aluminium · climbing forms · Tunnel form · Table form · Jump form
⚠ What the "No price set" tag means Many of the items added from international standards have no real market price yet, so they carry this tag. You can select them as usual, but the system will not include them in the price average — it keeps using the code's existing price until you set a price yourself on the Price database page · This is deliberate: a cost-estimating tool should not contain guessed prices · Bored piles do not state the depth in their names because the length is already entered in Dim 3 of the row, per the drawings · Every pile in the catalog already has its own price code (STR-101–176, price per meter × the row's length), so piles never carry this tag See Piles — price codes
💡 Material not listed? Type your own Type the material name in the search box and press Use this value. The system stores it as free text and uses the price of the element's original price-database code This is safe because the price is tied to the price-database code, not to the material name · You can also search by standard number, e.g. type ASTM or TIS 24

7Roadway, bridge and irrigation works

These three menus work like the building pages: fill in the table and read the results in the gray-shaded columns — but each uses its own set of formulas

Roadway

Enter the start–end chainage (km), carriageway width, shoulders, embankment side slope and pavement layer thicknesses. The system calculates the total length, carriageway area, pavement layer volumes, embankment fill and cut

Road types to Thai and international standards

In the Standard / road class column, pick a type and the system sets the width, surface type, pavement layer types and thicknesses, shoulders, curbs and median for you (every field remains editable · defaults are approximate — check them against the project drawings) · The cross-section is drawn to match the chosen type (surface colored by type · shoulders · median · curb/sidewalk · gutter/drain pipe) · Below the drawing, the extra items for that type are listed with quantities · Existing rows (AC/PCC surface, default layer types) compute exactly the same numbers as the previous version

GroupAvailable types
Department of Highways (DOH)Special class (4 lanes + median) · Classes 1–3 (7.0 m AC surface) · Classes 4–5 (6.0 m DBST surface) · Class 6 (laterite)
Department of Rural Roads (DRR)DBST asphalt, 6.0 m surface · JRCP concrete road, 6.0 m surface
Local (local government / rural road standards) · urbanCommunity RC road, 0.15 m thick · laterite road · crushed-rock road · 4-lane urban road + sidewalks + drain pipes · housing-estate road, 8 m right-of-way
AASHTO (Green Book)Freeway/Interstate · Arterial · Collector · Local Road
Maintenance/rehabilitationAC Overlay · Mill & Overlay (milling ROD-248) · Recycling + AC (ROD-249) · Micro-surfacing
FieldOption → code charged
Surface type (20 types)AC (ROD-010) · 2-layer AC + Binder (ROD-011 per “binder thickness”) · Para AC (ROD-163) · PMA (162) · SMA (164) · Porous (165) · DBST (167) · SBST (166) · Cape/Slurry (013) · Micro-surfacing (168) · PCC/JPCP (012 incl. joints) · JRCP (170 thickness ≥ 0.18 / 171) · CRCP (172) · community RC (171) · interlocking blocks (231 + bedding sand 004) · laterite (158) · crushed rock (159) — items in tonnes are computed as area × thickness × 2.35
Prime / TackBy surface type: AC = Prime over the whole base + Tack on the surface · DBST/SBST/Cape = Prime · Overlay/Mill = Tack (can be unticked under Auto-calc)
Base · subbase · selected materialCrushed rock (007) · CMCR (152) · soil cement (151) · ATB (153) · AC Base (160) — aggregate (006) · laterite (149) · soil cement (150) · bedding sand (154) · crushed-rock base under concrete roads (155) — selected material A (005) / B (148)
Shoulder surfaceSame as carriageway · DBST (167) · crushed rock (156) / laterite (157) in place of base under the shoulder · graded soil (138) — when the shoulder differs, the carriageway surface is charged on the traffic lanes only
Road edge · medianCurb (014) + RC sidewalk (015) / blocks (231) · raised RC median (235) + fill (236) · concrete barrier (211) · cable barrier (212) · double-sided W-Beam (022)
Roadside drainageEarth ditch (019) · concrete-lined ditch (187) · V-gutter (186) · covered U-channel (018) · RC pipe under sidewalk (183) + manholes @30 m (184) — both sides are charged when “Roadside ditch” is ticked
Concrete pavement jointsJRCP: transverse joints @10 m, dowel bars (174) Ø ≥ T/8, 0.50 long @0.30 · tie bars DB16 (175) · joint sealant (177) · CRCP: tie bars + longitudinal sealant · community RC: sawn joints @5 m + sealant

Each road segment has 3 consistent views — the cross-section, symmetric about the CL with carriageway crossfall (asphalt/concrete 2% · unpaved 4%) · the plan, a 40 m sample strip showing traffic lanes according to width (≈ 3.5 m/lane), pavement markings (yellow centerline: dashed = overtaking allowed · double solid = 4 lanes without median · white dashed lane lines · white solid edge lines), keep-left traffic arrows · shoulders · median/barrier · curb + sidewalk · ditch/drainage channel · manholes · guardrail · cross culverts · and the longitudinal profile, with existing ground and finished road level (fill or cut over the whole segment), pavement layers, Sta. markers in km+m and cross culverts · Concrete pavements with dowel bars get an extra joint-detail strip at the end

⚠ ROD-1xx items have no default price yetTheir quantities already go into the BOQ — enter unit prices on the Price database page before relying on the totals

Bridge / box culvert

Uses bridge-specific element types — bridge footing · pier/bridge column · pier cap · bridge deck · wing wall · box culvert

💡 Box culverts are computed differently from other elements The system computes the volume of the culvert walls (outer box minus inner box), not a solid volume, so you must enter the wall thickness in the designated dimension field otherwise the concrete quantity comes out as zero

Bridge and box culvert types to Thai and international standards

The bridge page has 2 tables — Bridge spans · superstructure type (one row = one bridge, or a set of identical spans) and RC bridge elements (footings, piers, pier caps, walls, box culverts). Choose a Bridge type and the system fills in the span length, width, girder spacing, deck thickness, bearings, expansion joints and railings from the standard design (still editable), then computes the girders/precast planks, cast-in-place deck, diaphragms, formwork, falsework, rebar, prestressing strand, bearings, joints, railings, sidewalks, deck drains, waterproofing and AC wearing surface for you. Once span rows exist, the girder, bearing, joint, railing, sidewalk, drain, waterproofing and AC surface items from the bridge's overall input fields (length/width/number of spans/girders) are not counted again · Do not enter the bridge deck or girders again in the element table

StandardBridge type → items computed
Department of Highways (DOH) · Department of Rural Roads (DRR)RC slab bridge (Slab), spans 5–10 m · precast plank girders (Plank Girder) 5/6/8/10 m (BRG-140/141/142/009 by span length) · cast-in-place RC T-beam 10–20 m · prestressed I-girder 20 m (BRG-010)
AASHTO LRFD · PCIPrestressed I-girder Type IV–VI 25–30 m (BRG-143 + erection BRG-146) · Adjacent Box Beam (BRG-144) · steel Plate Girder / steel box girder (BRG-150 steel · 151 bolts · 152 shear studs · 153 coating system · 155 weld inspection) · steel Truss · cast-in-place prestressed box girder / Balanced Cantilever (+ form traveler BRG-135) / precast segmental (BRG-005 prestressed concrete · 008 strand · 147 anchorages · 148 ducts · 149 strand stressing tests)
Elevated roads · FHWAU-Girder (BRG-145) · jointless bridge, Integral Abutment (no bearings or expansion joints at the ends)
Pedestrian bridgeComplete steel structure (BRG-156 per bridge) + roof and railings (BRG-157 by length)
Bearings · joints · railingsElastomeric pads (BRG-013) / Pot Bearing (159) — simple spans: 2 sets per girder per span · continuous spans: 1 set per girder per support line · Strip seal joints (014) / Modular (162) — simple spans: at every support line · continuous spans: at bridge ends only · RC/steel railing (015) · concrete barrier (165) · steel railing (166) · pedestrian railing (167)

Drafting conventions for bridges and box culverts — the bridge cross-section is Section A-A, taken at mid-span of the first span in the plan, with the centerline CL and a 2% carriageway crossfall to both sides · the longitudinal elevation shows the high water level (HWL ▽) · Box culverts have 3 views: Section A-A (transverse, with CL and ▽) · a plan symmetric on both sides (headwalls, wing walls flared at 45°, scour-protection apron, road over the culvert, cut lines A-A and B-B) · Section B-B along the flow (culvert under the embankment, headwalls, apron + cutoff walls at both ends) · piers and cantilevered pier caps show their centerlines

The Configuration field of the bridge element table (options depend on the type · nothing selected = computed the original way):

TypeConfiguration → how it is computed
Bridge footingOn driven piles · on bored piles · spread footing on firm soil/rock · footing in water + temporary cofferdam (adds BRG-104, 1 per footing) · abutment footing — footings on piles show the pile layout in plan/section
Pier/bridge columnRectangular · round with spiral/hoop ties (Dim 1 = diameter, circular concrete) · wall pier · hollow pier (thickness/Dim 4 = shaft wall · concrete = outer − inner) · pile bent (piles extended as the pier)
Pier capOn multiple columns · Hammerhead (thickness/Dim 4 = depth at the tip · outer 1/3 tapered · concrete = a × c × (2b + d)/3) · on piles · abutment · inverted T
Bridge deck · approach slabDeck on girders · topping on Planks · slab bridge · Link slab · cantilever deck/sidewalk · approach slab (adds a sleeper beam BRG-169) · Apron + end cutoff wall (BRG-182) · slope paving at the abutment
Wing wall/retaining wallStraight wing · flared wing · wing parallel to the road (U-wing) · wing sloped with the embankment (thickness/Dim 4 = height at the tip · average height) · abutment wall · Backwall · culvert headwall
Box culvertCast-in-place, 1–4 cells (Dim 1 = width per cell · outer width = kB + (k+1)t · interior walls as thick as the outer walls) · precast, 1 line / 2 lines side by side — charged per meter by size 1.20 (BRG-171) · 1.50 (172) · 1.80 (173) · 2.10 (174) · 2.40 (019) · 3.00 (175), other sizes BRG-176 + crushed-rock bedding 0.15 m (BRG-183) + joint sealing per 1.00 m segment (BRG-184) · concrete/formwork/rebar are not charged separately

Each bridge span has 3 consistent views — the cross-section, symmetric about the centerline, drawn by type (slab · I-girder · box · U · steel girder · truss · box girder) with railings/barriers, sidewalks, AC surface, bearings and girder spacing · the plan, with girder lines, support lines A1–P–A2, expansion joints (orange) and deck drains · and the longitudinal elevation, with abutments on the embankment, intermediate piers, footings, piles, the watercourse, bearings, each span length and the total length (balanced cantilevers show the deep soffit at the piers · trusses are shown above the deck). Elements with a configuration selected are drawn in that configuration (e.g. 3-cell box culvert · hollow pier · tapered pier cap · sloped wing wall) — the rebar detail from the manual can still be chosen in the detail field

⚠ BRG-1xx items have no default price yet · per-area figures are estimatesTheir quantities already go into the BOQ — enter unit prices on the Price database page · box girders, steel girders and trusses compute concrete/steel/prestressing strand from rates per m² of deck for preliminary cost estimates — once you have drawings, take off from the drawings and overwrite the values
💡 Each segment's add-on items can be unticked At the bottom of the page is the quantity take-off table by code for all other ROD · BRG · IRR items · Below the tables is the Elevation · section panel — road segments show the cross-section (pavement layers, shoulders, fill/cut, slopes) · canals show the trapezoidal section, banks and water level · In the Auto-calc column at the end of the road segment · bridge element · canal · irrigation structure tables, click the ✓ tag to turn it into ✕ and stop charging that item for that row only e.g. an urban road segment with no roadside ditch or slope turfing · precast elements that need no formwork. See the full list in Section 5

Irrigation

Canals use a trapezoidal section: enter the bottom width, depth and side slope. For concrete-lined canals the system adds a standard 0.30 m freeboard · Irrigation structures are entered as walls and slabs, just like building works

Canal and irrigation structure types to Thai and international standards

The irrigation page has 3 tables — Canals by km segment · Irrigation structures by type (computed from the main dimensions) · RC irrigation structures (element take-off per drawings). Pick a value in the Standard / canal class field and the system fills in the canal type, bottom width, depth, slope, lining thickness, bank size and bank-road surface (still editable) · Existing rows (concrete-lined / earth canal) compute exactly the same numbers as the previous version

StandardAvailable types
Royal Irrigation Department (RID)Main canal · lateral canal · sub-lateral canal · RC rectangular flume through communities · precast U-flume · elevated flume · on-farm supply/drainage ditches · main/lateral drainage canals
Special areasGrouted riprap-lined canal (steep slopes) · concrete block lining (drainage canals/bank protection) · earth canal planted with vetiver grass (Royal Development Projects Board)
USBR · FAOHard-surface / Reinforced Concrete Lining · Buried Geomembrane · Unlined Earth Canal · Precast Concrete Slab Lining
Pipe systemsHDPE water supply pipe (Pipe Irrigation) · RC drain pipe Ø1.00 m
Canal / lining typeMethod → code
Trapezoidal liningLining area = length × (b + 2(d + 0.30)√(1+z²)) · concrete (IRR-005) · 10 cm reinforced concrete (122 + joint sealant 125 + weep holes 126) · precast slabs (123 + sealant) · Geomembrane (124) · grouted riprap (013) / dry riprap (167) · slope paving blocks (170) — riprap/blocks have a geotextile underlay (017)
Earth canalExcavation + canal banks · the vetiver type adds vetiver rows @1 m along both slopes (IRR-121)
RC rectangular flumeConcrete IRR-006 = length × ((b + 2t)t + 2(d + 0.30)t) · formwork on both wall faces · steel 90 kg/m³ · lean concrete · backfill (IRR-119)
Precast flumes · on-farm ditchesU-flume (IRR-127) / elevated flume (128, no earthwork) charged per meter · supply ditch (129) / drainage ditch (130) including earthwork + ditch banks (131)
Pipe systemsTrench b × d · HDPE pipe (020 / 189) · PVC (191) · steel (190) · RC Ø0.60–1.20 (018 / 144 / 019 / 145) · bedding sand 0.10 m (016) · backfill (119) · pressure pipes get air-release valves @500 m (192)
Bank-road surfaceLaterite (026) · crushed rock (195) · concrete (196) · surface-treated asphalt (197 + crushed-rock base 195) — tick “Road on bank”

Each canal segment has 3 consistent views — the section, by canal/lining/flume/pipe type · the plan, a 40 m sample strip showing canal banks, the bank road, canal slopes, lining colored by type, lining joints @3 m, weep holes, vetiver grass, elevated-flume piers, pipe alignment with air-release valves, and flow direction · and the longitudinal profile, with existing ground, bank top, canal bed sloped per design, design water level, lining/pipe alignment and Sta. markers in km+m — concrete-lined canals and rectangular flumes get an extra lining-rebar strip at the end

Irrigation structures by type — pick a type and the system fills in the bay width B · number of bays/pipes/units · height H · length along the flow Ls · thickness t and gate type, then computes the concrete (floor, side walls, intermediate piers, wing walls, cutoff walls, walkway bridge, weir body), formwork, rebar, foundation excavation (IRR-113), backfill (119), lean concrete, gates + gate grooves (176) + hoists (178), trash racks (177), upstream/downstream riprap + geotextile, joint waterstops (135), railings/walkway bridge (031) and staff gauges (206):

GroupType
Flow-control structuresRegulator/sluice gate (steel gates + hoists IRR-022) · check structure (cast-iron gates 021) · drop structure · measuring structure (Parshall / broad-crested weir) · energy-dissipation structure (USBR Type II–IV)
WeirsSide spillway on the canal · RC overflow weir (trapezoidal weir body, 0.60 m broad crest) · rubber weir (IRR-154) · collapsible weir (155 + hoist)
Pipe structuresFarm turnout · siphon under a road/canal · culvert under a road/canal bank · canal-end drain pipe (Flap gate 175) · reservoir outlet pipe (steel pipe 190) — pipes by size + headwalls (147) at both ends
OthersFish ladder (baffle walls forming pools every 2 m) · pumping station (sump + pump 183 + motor 184 + control panel 185 + transformer 186 + pump house 187)

Drafting conventions — every irrigation drawing is symmetric about the centerline (CL, dash-dot line) · water levels use the ▽ symbol · structure plans show cut line A-A along the flow (matching the section in the right-hand panel) · the canal section is centered in its frame, labeling the canal slope 1:z and bank slope 1:z2 on both sides, the bank widths on both sides, top width, bottom width and water depth

Structures have 3 views — the plan (flow direction left to right, walls, intermediate piers, wing walls, gates, walkway bridge, riprap) · the section along the flow (floor, cutoff walls, water levels, gate/weir body/rubber weir, drop steps, energy-dissipation blocks) · and the front elevation looking from upstream (bays with gates, hoists, railings, multiple pipe lines, pumps). Canal sections are drawn by lining type (in different colors and hatches), as are rectangular flumes, U-flumes, elevated flumes on piers, and pipe trenches with bedding sand

⚠ IRR-1xx items have no default price yet · structures by type are estimatesTheir quantities already go into the BOQ — enter unit prices on the Price database page · structures by type are computed from the main dimensions for preliminary cost estimates — once you have drawings, take off the elements in the RC irrigation structures table and delete the corresponding by-type structure row (otherwise it is counted twice)

8Measuring quantities from PDF drawings and photos

The Drawings menu lets you attach drawings and measure on them directly — ideal when dimensions are not written on the drawing, or when shapes are not rectangular · It also works with site photos — see Take site photos and compute quantities · or let AI read the drawings and fill in the tables for you — see AI quantity take-off

  1. Attach drawing files

    Press Attach drawing / photo and pick PDF or image files, several at a time · or press Take site photo to open the camera · PDF files and photos are stored on the device you attached them from and come back by themselves when you reopen the app · Drawings belong only to the project they were attached to — open another project or start a new one and you see only that project's drawings · removing a drawing from one project does not delete the same file attached to another project · Markups and measurements are saved with the project — see Drawings stored on your device

  2. Calibrate the scale

    This step cannot be skipped — drag a line over a distance whose true length you know on the drawing; a card appears asking for the real length in meters. Type it or use the shortcut buttons 1 / 2 / 5 / 10 / 20; only then can the system convert pixels to distances · Each page is calibrated separately. Until a page is calibrated, its measurements show "Not calibrated"

  3. Measure on the drawing

    Choose the length, area, volume or count tool · When you finish measuring, a card pops up so you can name the item in one step. It shows the measured value clearly, and you can enter a thickness on the same card — the area becomes a volume in m³ and the number updates as you type · For openings, turn on the deduct-mode switch before measuring; the card turns red to show you are deducting · You can type distances as in AutoCAD and lock straight lines with F8 — see Drawing and measuring tools · The count tool starts by choosing a work type on the card, then you click on the drawing to count one point at a time

  4. Choose the destination on the same card

    In the Send to take-off list section at the bottom of the card — send it as a row in a take-off table (RC members · rooms · doors & windows · electrical points · fixings · steel, etc. — see Sending to the take-off list from the card) or link it to a BOQ code directly · The item-name dropdown also lists codes from the price database; pick one and the system links the item into the BOQ right away · You can type a name without choosing a destination and pick one later in the measurement table · Choose Don't send if you only want the measurement for reference

  5. Check the result

    The green box at the bottom of the card shows the result before you press the button · Sent quantities go into the BOQ immediately · If you edit the measurement line or add counts later, the destination updates accordingly · If the unit does not match the type of measurement, the system shows a Unit mismatch tag so you can check first

The item-name dropdown has two groups Common names are the terms quantity surveyors use every day, and they switch sets according to the unit you are about to get — before you enter a thickness they are area-work names (2nd floor slab · concrete yard · ceiling) and once a thickness is entered and the unit becomes m³, they switch to volume-work names by themselves (slab concrete · excavation · sand bedding under footings)
Price database codes are filtered down to codes whose unit matches what you actually measured, so an area measurement shows only codes in m²; after you enter a thickness they switch to codes in m³ automatically, preventing wrong-unit links from the start · You can search this field by work name or code, and you can also type your own name that is not in the list
⚠ PDF drawings are stored on the device you attached them from, not in the cloud Markups, measurements and destination links are saved with the project every time they change · The PDF file itself is stored in the browser of the device it was attached on (photos too — see the next section) — close and reopen the app on the same device and the files come back by themselves, reopening the file you were working on at the same page · zoom · scroll position (go to another page of the app and come back, and you continue where you left off) · Drawing files are not uploaded to the cloud because they are often very large — to open the project on another device, attach the same drawing files again; the markups come back by themselves when the file names match · Removing a file also deletes it from the device

Drawing and measuring tools — typed distances · ortho lock · panning · full screen

TaskHow
Type distances as in AutoCAD
(length · area measurement)
Click the first point, move the mouse in the direction you want, then type the real distance — no need to click exactly on the drawing's lines · 5 = 5 m in the mouse direction · 5<90 = 5 m at an angle of 90° · 3,4 = horizontal, vertical distance from the previous point · 1.8+2*8 arithmetic works · add mm / cm when the drawing is dimensioned in millimeters/centimeters · Enter / Space / click = place point · C = close shape · U = undo last point · double-click = finish shape · Lengths use the numbers you typed exactly and do not shift when you recalibrate · Points beyond the drawing edge are refused
Lock straight linesThe Ortho lock F8 button on the toolbar, or hold Ctrl / Shift while dragging — straight lines horizontal, vertical or at 45°, with a guide line · Works with the pen, line/arrow, length measurement, area measurement and calibration · While the lock is on, hold Ctrl to drag freely
Pan the drawingHold down the mouse wheel and drag with any tool (as in AutoCAD) — even mid-measurement, panning adds no points · You can also drag on the gray area around the drawing
Full screenThe button at the end of the toolbar expands the drawing over the whole web page (and requests browser full screen) · Exit with the same button or Esc
Dropdowns in the cardSame as other pages of the app — color dots · ✓ on the current choice · a search box when there are more than 8 items · ↑ ↓ Enter · Esc closes only the dropdown, not the card · Drag the card's bottom-right corner to enlarge it (see Resizing windows)

Deleting measurements · eraser · recovering lost quantities

  • The eraser always asks for confirmation — when you finish dragging the eraser, a confirmation box lists what will be deleted (count points · measurement lines · markups) and the take-off quantities that will disappear if they have already been sent · Cancel = restore what was erased · Confirm = delete, and delete/adjust the quantities as listed, in one step
  • Deleting measurement lines or count points that were already sent (eraser · clear page · undo/redo) — the system asks first; once you confirm, the rows sent to the tables are deleted too · Deleting some of the count points = the count in the row decreases; the row itself is not deleted
  • Recalibrating a page does not lose quantities already sent · If quantities that were sent earlier went missing in a previous version, the Drawings page shows a bar “Found N items of quantities previously sent from drawings that have gone missing” — press it to restore them (the system looks in the saved data, the local backup and cloud versions · it restores only measurement lines that still exist and never overwrites what is currently sent)
  • Continue counting on another page with the same name — the system adds a row for that page by itself · Tick Merge with points already counted on the card = add to the existing item instead of starting a new one

Take site photos and compute quantities (phone / iPad)

The Drawings page works with photos just like PDF drawings — ideal for site surveys: take a photo, measure it and see a rough price right away, and show the customer on the spot

  1. Press Take site photo

    On phones and iPads the rear camera opens immediately (on a computer a file picker opens) · or press Attach drawing / photo to choose photos you have already taken (JPG · PNG · WebP), together with several PDF files

  2. Calibrate against something of known size in the photo

    Press the scale icon, then drag over an object whose real size you know — e.g. an extended tape measure, a door leaf (0.80–0.90 m), a tile or a paving block — and enter its real length

  3. Measure and choose the destination

    Every length, area and count tool works; then choose Send to as described in the next section — you can draw on the screen with your finger or a stylus

  4. See a rough price and show the customer

    The Rough price from measurements card shows the direct cost and the total price including VAT as soon as a destination is linked · press Show customer in the page header (or Show customer (full screen)) to open a large-type summary page for the customer to view on screen

How the rough price is computedDetails
BOQ codes and structural steelThe difference in the project's direct cost and total price before and after adding the measured quantities — exactly what actually flows into the BOQ, including waste allowances per the rules
Rebar (Bar-Cut)Weight from total cut length including waste × the material + labor rate of the rebar code for that size (not in the BOQ until you press send from the Bar-cut plan page)
Total price incl. VATDirect cost × the project multiplier (total price ÷ direct cost — including Factor F, or overhead, profit and VAT as configured)
💡 Taking photos that measure accurately Stand square to the wall or area you are measuring · Keep the calibration object in the same plane as what you are measuring · Use the normal lens (1×), not the wide-angle lens · Photograph one wall or one area at a time — in photos taken at an angle, near and far distances are not equal, so the figures are estimates for preliminary decisions
⚠ Photos are stored on the device that took them Photos are downsized (long side no more than 2,400 pixels) and stored on that device; they survive opening a new page or refreshing · The project stores only the list of photos plus the markups and measurements — opening the project on another device shows the measurements and prices, but not the photos themselves · Delete a photo with the ✕ button in the drawing-sheet list (the system asks for confirmation first)

Sending to the take-off list from the card while measuring

The Count from drawing and Quantity from drawing (length · area) cards have a Send to take-off list section — choose a group (Building · Steel · Roadway · Bridge · Irrigation · BOQ code), then choose the table; the system adds a row to that table immediately with no need to go back and enter it on the Building page · The green box at the bottom of the card shows the result before you press the button, e.g. + 1 row in the room electrical-points table · 24 sockets

  • Floor / zone — for projects with floors set up (Section 9) the card has a floor field for every destination. It guesses from the item name first (e.g. “2nd floor slab”); failing that, it uses the floor of the last row in that table · Structural steel and rebar sent from drawings can also carry a floor, which flows on to the bar-cut plan and the rebar schedule
  • Remembers the last destination — the next time you measure the same kind of shape, the card opens with the destination and values you used last time, ready to send
  • Structural steel — the section field searches all 451 sections, filters by type, and accepts the notation written on drawings (H350x350 · CHANNEL 150x75 · L-40x40x3) · The system guesses the section and “Used as” from the item name or the label on the drawing, and shows the weight, paint area, dimensions and standard of the selected section

Work-type chips (count card) — one press gives you the item name, destination and default values together — covering every table that can be counted: 106 chips in 10 categories (the category tabs at the top show the chip count · the card remembers the last category used): RC structure piles · footings · columns/piers · stairs → RC members · form chips set the type and the form together (the full drawing sheet follows that form straight away): tension piles · batter piles · slab-support piles · pile retaining walls · pile caps · strip footings · combined footings · mat foundations · round spiral columns · round hoop columns · pedestals · tie columns · sawtooth stairs · cantilever steps — the RC members destination has a Form field you can change in the card · Precast footings · columns · beams · slabs · walls · precast stairs → RC members (precast types) · Steel · fixings steel columns · steel beams · steel bracing → structural steel · steel trusses · house roof framing · PEB buildings · cellular beams → each work's own table · dowel bars → Bar-Cut · anchor bolts · connection bolts · wall plugs/anchor points → fixings · Timber · stainless steel · aluminium timber work · timber posts and beams · timber stairs · timber fences · stainless steel work · stainless steel guardrails · accessible grab bars · flagpoles · bollards · aluminium work · aluminium windows/doors · louvers · insect screens → that work's table with a default configuration · Electrical 14 point types (light fixtures · downlights · LED Panel · T8 · sockets · switches · A/C outlets · emergency lights · exit signs · CCTV · LAN · telephone · TV · speakers) → that field of the room electrical points · Sanitary 9 types (sanitary fixtures · washbasins · urinals · showers · bidet sprays · sinks · Floor drain · garden taps · water heaters) → room sanitary fixtures · Doors · windows · roofs doors · windows · sliding glass doors · fire doors · roller shutters · fanlights → doors & windows (code per chip) · stair finishes · roofs · roofing materials · truss roofs · Bridge bridge footings · piers · pier caps · Irrigation footings · columns · sluice gates · check structures · drop structures · road culverts · farm turnouts · siphons · overflow weirs · pumping stations · External · BOQ code manholes · drain manholes · electrical pull boxes · garden lights · street lights · trees · traffic signs · fire extinguishers · fire hydrants · septic tanks · water pumps · room name signs → links the matching price-database code directly · You can always change the destination on the card (including sending directly as a BOQ code, as before)

TableMeasurement typeChoose on the card · what you get
RC membersCount · length · areaElement type and size · when counting piles, choose the type (price code) and the size is filled in · all types covered:
count = piles, footings, columns, stairs, precast footings/columns/beams/stairs ·
length = beams, RC walls, shear walls, load-bearing walls, lift/stair core walls, precast beams/walls (length × height × thickness) ·
area = slabs, footings, columns, walls, precast slabs (thickness = concrete topping), precast walls, wall-system walls ·
precast rows have a Precast connection field
Bolts · fixingsCount · length · areacount = column bases/connections/points · length = pipe hanger runs (hanger spacing · number of runs) · area = screws per m² · The Main item field searches every code, has filter chips for 9 groups (anchors · bolts · nuts/washers · wire rope · hangers · wall plugs · form ties · screws/rivets · stainless steel) and shows default prices · column bases have a plate-size field · column bases and connections have a Connection type field (25 types) — the system guesses from the item name, e.g. “Haunch” · “Gusset” · “Shear tab” · “beam-to-beam End plate” · “Stiffened” · “BFP” · “RBS” · “Flush end plate” · “Seated angle” and sets the count per member/point and the plate size for that type (types with plates therefore show the plate field)
Doors – windowsCount · areaType (14 codes) · width × height set from the code name (0.90×2.00 m) · interior/exterior wall · count = number of leaves from symbols D1 W2 · area = windows/fanlights from the elevations
Room electrical pointsCount14 point types (lighting points · sockets · switches · A/C outlets · downlights · LAN · CCTV …) — the count goes into that field
Room sanitary fixturesCount12 types (WCs · washbasins · sinks · Floor drain · showers …) — the count goes into that field
Stair finishes (per flight)CountCount stair flights on the plan · finish material (guessed from the name, e.g. “granite” · “tile” · “timber”) · tread width · number of risers · going · riser height · landing width × length · handrails on 0/1/2 sides — the table computes the stair finishes, handrails and stair nosings for you
Room air conditioningAreaBTU per m² (default 700 · meeting rooms/restaurants/kitchens 800) · the unit size chosen is the smallest unit that can carry the load
Rooms · ceilings · metal sheet · masonry walls · built-insArea / lengthBy table type (wall height · board type · cabinet type)
Bridge · irrigation structuresCount · length · areacount = piers, footings, pier caps (bridge) · footings, columns (irrigation) of identical size at multiple points, with size and excavation depth
Roadway · canalsLengthSta. range continuing from the last segment in the table · road surface / canal type and size
💡 The system guesses from the item name Name items as on the drawings and the card picks the values for you — “Anchor bolt column base C1” → steel column base · “Beam connection B1” → connection · “Chemical anchor” → point count · “A/C outlet” → A/C outlet point · “Kitchen sink” → sink · “Bathroom door” → uPVC door · “Meeting room” → 800 BTU/m² · Choose a FAS code from the item-name dropdown → the Main item field is set to that code
💡 Add or delete count points later and the table count follows Rows created by counting stay linked to the count item — click to add or delete points on the drawing and the count in the row (or in the socket/WC field of the per-room tables) = points counted × multiplier, instantly · Deleting the measurement also deletes the rows it sent (the system asks for confirmation first)

Every take-off table can now be sent to from the card, except the Rebar schedule, which uses the Bar-Cut destination instead (bars need a shape and a cut length)

Sending measurements to the BOQ · structural steel · rebar

The Measured items from drawings table has a Send to column — each measurement can have one destination. Once chosen, a settings bar appears under the row with the result straight away (e.g. = 37.50 m² or DB16 4 bars × 5.40 m · 34 kg) Whenever you edit the measurement line on the drawing, the destination updates immediately

DestinationUsable measurementsSettings and result
BOQ code (price database)All types, including opening deductionsFirst choose a Work category to filter the codes (electrical · sanitary · air conditioning · fire protection · architecture/interiors · built-in · external · structural, etc.), then choose the code — codes whose unit matches the measurement come first · The Multiplier can convert units, e.g. wall length × height = m² for plastering, painting, tiling · area × thickness = m³ · a unit mismatch shows a red warning bar
Structural steelLength · countChoose the section from the steel table (searchable) and “Used as” · length: each piece as long as measured × number of sets (e.g. how many runs of the same purlin) · count: count × length per piece as entered · Becomes a row in Building → Structural steel tab, its name starting with [Dwg]; weight and paint area flow into the BOQ as usual
Rebar (Bar-Cut)Length · area · countChoose the rebar pattern and size — Bars along a line (length): length = measured + end adjustment on both sides × number of bars × number of sets · Stirrups along a line (length): count = ⌊length ÷ spacing⌋ + 1 stirrups of width × depth · Mesh over an area (area): two directions at the spacing × number of mesh layers; width and length are derived from the area and perimeter · Bars per point (count): length per bar × bars per point × number of points · Becomes rows tagged P1 P2 … in the Rebar from PDF drawings card of the Bar-cut plan page and is included in the cutting plan immediately
💡 End adjustment can be negative In the End adjustment, each side field, enter a positive value when bars project into or embed in the support, and a negative value when concrete cover must be deducted (slab mesh default −0.05 m) · Mesh width and length are exact when measured as a rectangle; for other shapes the system uses a square of equal area and shows a warning — measure one rectangular panel at a time
⚠ Rows from drawings — edit length/count on the Drawings page [Dwg] rows in the structural steel table and P… rows in the bar-cut plan are recomputed every time the measurement changes — values that come from the measurement line (length · number of pieces) must be edited on the measurement line on the drawing · values you set yourself in the destination table are kept (floor/zone · to floor · paint · bolts · used as …) even when the Drawings page is reopened, until the drawing side changes that value itself · To stop sending, choose — Not sent — and the row at the destination disappears by itself

Below the table, the Taking off each trade from drawings card summarizes what to measure for each work category, e.g. electrical work counts light fixtures, sockets and switches and measures the lengths of cable and conduit · sanitary work counts fixtures and measures pipe lengths · external works measure fence lengths and paved areas

AI quantity take-off

The AI quantity takeoff card at the top of the Drawings page lets AI read PDF drawings or images and take off quantities for every category in the drawings in one pass — building works · roadway · bridges and box culverts · irrigation and work with no supporting table (e.g. fire protection, external works) as BOQ items by code (see Take off every category in one pass) · Prices follow automatically from the price database, because the AI chooses element types, steel sections and codes directly from the price-database lists · Every row must pass through the review page before import · It uses Your AI (MCP) — Claude · ChatGPT · Gemini or any other AI you already use · The system remembers your choices on this device — AI provider (Claude / ChatGPT / Gemini / others) · ticked work groups — so a new page or another day starts with the same settings

AI sourceHow it worksBest for
Your AI (MCP)Connect Claude · ChatGPT · Gemini or any other AI you use with a private link · attach the drawings in the AI's chat and give the instruction; the AI sends the results back into AI results waiting to import on this cardAny file size your AI accepts · AI costs follow your own plan · files never pass through Chang Pile's servers

Your AI (MCP) — connect once, use in every project

MCP (Model Context Protocol) is a common standard that many AI providers use to connect to external software · BOQ Studio exposes 4 tools your AI can call — boq_takeoff_guide (dimension definitions and options for every table) · list_boq_codes (all 1,616 BOQ codes in every category, including new codes under the work-category structure, searchable by category or keyword) · submit_boq_takeoff (submit take-off results) · list_boq_takeoffs (view submissions)

💡 Added the connector before 14 Oct 2569? Your AI still remembers the old tool list (3 tools) — in Claude, go to Settings → Connectors → BOQ Studio, press Disconnect and reconnect (or Refresh) · For other providers, remove it and add the same link again · The existing link keeps working; no need to create a new one · Once you see list_boq_codes you can take off every category
  1. Create the connection link

    Your AI (MCP) tab → step 1, press Create AI connection link, then press Copy link · The system remembers the link in this device's browser for your account, so after opening a new page you can still copy it to add to another AI · Other devices cannot see the link (the database stores only a verification hash) · If you lose it or are on another device, press Create new link (the old link stops working immediately, and you must add the new link to your AI again)

  2. Add the link to your AI

    Press a provider's name on the card to see that provider's steps — see the table below · Do it once; it works in every chat and every project

  3. Attach the drawings in the AI's chat and give the instruction

    Shortcut: press AI quantity takeoff in step 3 — the system copies the instruction text and opens the chat for you (see The take-off-with-your-AI button) · or step 2 of the card has a ready-made instruction; press Copy text and paste it into the chat along with the drawing file · The AI reads BOQ Studio's guide, takes off the quantities, then tells you it has sent them to BOQ Studio (#item number)

  4. Review and import

    Step 3 AI results waiting to import refreshes itself every 20 seconds (or press Refresh) · Press Review & import to open the same review page described below · Once imported, the item changes to Imported · If you don't need it or want to redo the take-off, press the trash-can button at the end of the item — see Deleting items from the inbox

The take-off-with-your-AI button — copy, open the chat, wait for results, in one click

Step 3 AI results waiting to import has a dark-blue AI quantity takeoff button next to Refresh · Your AI reads files in its own chat and a web page cannot hand files to it, so this button prepares everything else, leaving you only to attach the file

  1. Press AI quantity takeoff

    The system copies the instruction text together with the file name (e.g. · Drawing file: F1_Foundation.pdf) and opens the chosen provider's chat in a new tab — Claude opens claude.ai/new · ChatGPT opens chatgpt.com · Gemini CLI / others only copy the text

  2. In the chat, attach the file and paste the text

    Attach the same PDF file → paste the text with Ctrl + V (Mac: Cmd + V) → send · When the AI asks for permission to use the BOQ Studio tools, allow it

  3. Wait for results — no need to press refresh

    The card shows a bar Waiting for results from Claude · file … with the elapsed time; the system checks the inbox every 5 seconds (for up to 10 minutes) · When results arrive it shows AI has sent results and opens the review page by itself · If you don't want to wait any longer, press Stop waiting (results arriving later still go into the inbox as usual)

Once connected, no setup again — when your AI uses the link for the first time, step 1 shows a green box ✓ Your AI is connected with the time the AI last used it, and the connection instructions fold away (press How to connect / add to another AI to view them) · The link keeps working in every chat and every project until you press Revoke link or Create new link · Your choices (AI provider, work groups) are also remembered on this device

Deleting items from the inbox — every item has a trash-can button at the end of its row. Pressing it opens a pop-up Are you sure you want to delete this item from the inbox? showing the file name, time, the AI that sent it, number of rows and status · Press Delete item and the item disappears from the inbox immediately; it cannot be recovered · Use it when the drawings have been revised and you will attach a new PDF for the AI to take off again, or when the AI got the take-off wrong and you don't want to keep it · Imported items can be deleted too — this deletes only the inbox record; rows already imported into the project remain. If you don't need them, delete them in the take-off tables, or import new results with Replace existing work (see The system asks before importing) · If you currently have that item open for review, the review page closes as well

AIHow to add the link
ClaudeSettings → Connectors → + Add → Add custom connector → paste the link → Authentication: choose No sign-in → Add · See the detailed steps below in Adding the connector in Claude
ChatGPTSettings → Plugins (earlier versions called it Apps & Connectors) → Advanced settings → turn on Developer mode → create a connector and paste the link into the MCP Server URL field · Authentication = No authentication · Requires a plan that can turn on Developer mode — free accounts do not have this menu (checked 13 Oct 2569: the Plugins page of a free account offers only ready-made plugins)
Gemini CLIAdd to ~/.gemini/settings.json — "mcpServers": { "boq-studio": { "httpUrl": "link" } } then reference the drawing file with @filename.pdf
OthersSoftware that supports MCP over Streamable HTTP, such as Claude Code · Cursor · VS Code — enter the link as the URL of an HTTP-type MCP server; no additional authentication setup is needed · Claude Code: claude mcp add --transport http boq-studio <link>
⚠ Keep the link secret Anyone with the link can send results into your import inbox (but cannot change the project — everything must pass your review first) · One link per account · If you suspect the link has leaked, press Revoke link or Create new link · Each AI provider's menus may be renamed between versions · The remembered link lives in the same browser as your sign-in — if you share the device with others, press Revoke link or sign out when you are done

Adding the connector in Claude, step by step

Works in both claude.ai and the Claude desktop app · Your Claude plan must allow adding custom connectors

  1. Copy the link from BOQ Studio

    Drawings → AI quantity takeoff → Your AI (MCP) tab → press Create AI connection link → Copy link

  2. Open Claude's Connectors page

    Click your account name at the bottom left → Settings → Connectors in the left menu → the + Add button at the top right → Add custom connector

  3. Enter the name and link

    In the name field enter BOQ Studio · In the URL field paste the whole copied link (it starts with https://…supabase.co/functions/v1/boq-mcp/ and ends with cpmcp_ followed by a long string of characters)

  4. Authentication: choose “No sign-in”

    Claude detects it for you (with a Detected tag) · Do not choose Sign in now or Sign in when needed · Do not press Add header and leave Advanced unchanged — the token is already in the link

  5. Press Add

    BOQ Studio appears in the Connectors list · If a Reconnect button appears or it fails to connect, create a new link in BOQ Studio and add it again

  6. Use it in a chat

    Open a new chat → press + or the tools menu next to the input box → turn on BOQ Studio → attach the drawing file → paste the instruction from step 2 of the card → send · If Claude asks for permission to use boq_takeoff_guide · list_boq_codes or submit_boq_takeoff, press Allow

  7. Come back to BOQ Studio to review

    When Claude replies that it has sent the results to BOQ Studio (#item number), the item appears in AI results waiting to import within 20 seconds → press Review & import

What you see in the Add custom connector windowWhat it means · what to do
No sign-in · Detected tagClaude has checked that this server does not use OAuth sign-in — correct; choose this option
Yellow box “Without sign-in, anyone with the server URL can use this connector…”A normal warning meaning anyone with the link can use it — which is why the link must be kept secret · submitted results can only reach your import inbox and cannot change the project
Request headers · + Add headerFor servers that take an API key in a header — BOQ Studio does not need it; leave it empty
Text at the bottom of the window “Only use connectors from developers you trust…”Claude's general warning for every custom connector you add
⚠ The whole link is visible in this window Be careful about screenshots or screen sharing while filling it in · If the link leaks, press Create new link in BOQ Studio and update the link in Claude to the new one — the old link stops working immediately

Site AI — turned off

Since 14 October 2569 the AI card no longer has the Site AI tab, and the Drawings page header no longer has the AI quantity takeoff button — use Your AI (MCP), which has no web file-size limit, with AI costs following your own plan · If this tab was the saved choice on your device, the system switches it to Your AI automatically

Per-file AI takeoff button

Every PDF and image in the Drawing sheets in the project card has an AI takeoff button — press it and the system copies the instruction text with that file's name, opens the AI chat in a new tab and waits for results, just like the button in step 3 of the card (see The take-off-with-your-AI button) · If you have not created a link yet, the system tells you to create one in step 1 first · With several files (e.g. structural and architectural drawings in separate files), press each file in turn, then import with Add as new work (see The system asks before importing)

Status of each file — the button and the tag under the file name change as the work progresses

ButtonTag under the file nameMeaning
AI takeoff—The AI has never taken off this file
Waiting…Waiting for results from your AI…The text has been copied and the chat opened; waiting for the AI to send results back · press the button to scroll to the waiting bar
Review (green)Your AI has sent results · awaiting reviewThis file's results are already in the import inbox — file names the AI sends back that differ slightly are still matched · press to review and import
Re-run AIAI imported N rowsAI results for this file have already been imported · hover over the tag to see the import date and time · press the button to have the AI take it off again, e.g. after the drawings are revised
  • The imported tag is saved with the project, tied to the file name — PDF drawings stay attached only for the current session; open the project another day, attach the file with the same name and the tag comes back · If you press Back after importing, the tag is rolled back too

Take off every category in one pass

The instruction text from the AI quantity takeoff button tells the AI to take off every kind of work in the drawings and send it back in one go — a single drawing set containing a building, roads and box culverts can be reviewed and imported in one pass for all categories, with no need to take off separate files

  1. The AI reads the guide

    boq_takeoff_guide gives the dimension definitions for every table, the allowed options (element types, steel sections, A/C sizes, road surface types, canal types) and the procedure

  2. Always fill in the tables first

    For work with a supporting table, the AI fills in the table and the app then computes the concrete, formwork, steel, excavation/fill, finishes and labor by itself — more complete than entering lump-sum quantities

  3. Work without a table goes in by code

    The AI looks up codes with list_boq_codes and sends code + quantity + source, e.g. FIR-001 · 4 units · fire extinguishers at 4 points, page 3 · Steel sections not in the TIS 1227 list are sent as STR-023 (kg) and STR-026 painting (m²) · They can be sent one section at a time; the system keeps each line as a sub-item of STR-023 in the BOQ (see Sub-items)

  4. The system prevents double counting

    Codes already computed by tables in the same submission (e.g. a structural table is sent and STR-005 concrete is also added) are removed automatically · Codes not in the price database or with zero quantity are not sent · The AI reports the removed items in the chat

Price-database categoryHow the AI takes it off
Structural works · architectural worksTables for RC members, rebar, structural steel, rooms, doors & windows · the rest (e.g. precast slabs, waterproofing) by code
Bolts and fixingsThe fixings table (steel column bases · connections · pipe hangers · panel fixing · point counts) from Base plate details, connections and bolt schedules · the built-in AI chooses from anchors, structural bolts and wall plugs · your AI can search every code with list_boq_codes, category FAS
Electrical · sanitary · air-conditioning systemsPer-room tables · distribution boards, main feeders, septic tanks, pumps, fans, ductwork, etc. by code
Built-in interior worksBuilt-in table · under-cabinet LED lighting by code or the LED field
Roadway · bridge · irrigation worksRoad segment / bridge and box-culvert element / canal and irrigation structure tables · signs, street lighting, bridge piles, gates, riprap by code
Fire protection · external works · preliminariesAll by code

The review page is split into sections by table — items by code show the code, item name, quantity, unit and source · Untick rows you don't need, just as in the other tables

Review and import

  1. Review

    Split by table; each row shows the page the value was read from, the value obtained and its source, with a confidence tag · Untick rows you don't need, or click the group-header box to select/deselect the whole group · The orange AI notes box lists anything incomplete or unreadable in the drawings

  2. Press Import N rows into the take-off tables

    The system takes you to the page of the first category imported (Building → that tab · Roadway · Bridge · Irrigation · or BOQ by system if there are only items by code) and reports the row counts by category, e.g. Imported 10 rows from AI — Building 6 · Roadway 1 · Bridge/box culvert 1 · Irrigation 1 · items by code 1 · The quantities and prices in the header bar update immediately — check the tables once more; you can edit values just like rows you entered yourself · The project name, area and number of storeys from the drawings are filled in only where those fields are still empty

CategoryAI fills in the table · imported into
Building works — structuralReinforced concrete elements — footings, columns, beams, slabs, RC walls, stairs, piles, with quantities and dimensions · Rebar schedule — size, bars per element, length per bar · Structural steel — TIS 1227 sections (H I C L box pipe), usage, number of pieces, length per piece
Building works — architecturalRooms / areas — width, length, height, floor, floor/ceiling/wall finishes · Doors – windows — type, count, size, interior/exterior · Built-in furniture — kitchen cabinets, wardrobes, countertops, etc.: type, finish material, length, height, doors, drawers
Building works — systemsRoom electrical points · Room sanitary fixtures · Room air conditioning — room area, BTU/m², unit size, refrigerant pipe length
RoadwayRoad segments, one row per Sta. range with an identical section — carriageway width, shoulders, surface type (AC/PCC), thickness of each layer, average fill/cut, side slopes, cross culverts, guardrails → Roadway page
Bridge and box culvert worksFootings, piers, pier caps, bridge decks, wing walls, box culverts (cell width × inside height × length × thickness × number of cells), approach slabs → Bridge page
Irrigation worksCanals, one row per Sta. range — concrete-lined/earth canal, bottom width, depth, slopes, lining thickness, canal banks · RC irrigation structures — footings, walls/slabs, wing walls, box culverts → Irrigation page
BOQ items by codeWork without a table, e.g. fire protection (FIR-), external works (EXT-), preliminaries (PRE-), traffic signs, bridge piles, gates, special steel sections — code + quantity → added as manually added quantities in BOQ by system (see Adding, deleting and hiding empty items)
Confidence tagMeaning · what to do
ClearRead directly from a schedule or dimension on the drawing · spot-check
DerivedCalculated from dimensions on the drawing, e.g. beam length from grid spacing · check the source
EstimatedNot specified on the drawing; the AI estimated it, e.g. room height · check every row, or enter the correct value in the additional-information field and run the take-off again

If the project already has work, the system always asks before importing — when you press Import N rows into the take-off tables, if a table that will receive new rows already contains rows, a This project already has work window appears, showing the number of existing items and incoming rows for each table · If the tables are still empty, the import goes ahead without asking (the bottom of the review page tells you in advance whether it will ask)

OptionResult · when to use it
Replace existing workDeletes all existing rows in the tables receiving new rows, then inserts the new set · other tables are not touched · rows from the bar-cut plan are not deleted · Use it when the drawings change revision (rev.) or the existing work is sample/old data no longer in use · If you change your mind, press Back on the header bar (Undo and redo)
Replace only previous AI rowsAppears when a table has both AI rows and rows you entered yourself — deletes only the rows previously imported from AI and keeps your own rows · Use it when taking off the same drawings again
Add as new workKeeps all existing work and appends the new rows · Use it when importing different parts of the drawings, e.g. the foundation drawings followed by the upper-floor structural drawings · If it is the same drawing set, quantities will be counted twice
Cancel — do not importCloses the window; the results stay on the review page so you can import them again

BOQ items by code count existing work as the number of codes with manually added quantities in BOQ by system · Replace existing work clears the manually added quantities of every code and inserts the new set · Replace only previous AI rows deducts only the quantities the AI added previously and keeps what you typed yourself · Quantities measured from PDF drawings are never touched

If there is rebar from the AI, a Use AI bar list instead of auto rebar checkbox appears, stating how many structural elements in the whole project it covers (including rows you already entered yourself) · The system ticks it when coverage is 80% or more — below that, switching away from automatic calculation would make the rebar of the remaining elements disappear (see How rebar is computed)

⚠ AI helps with take-off; it does not replace the estimator's review AI can misread drawings, especially unclear scans, small numbers, or drawings whose information is spread across many sheets · Check every Estimated row, and compare the totals with your experience before use · Work without a table is entered by the AI as items by code, which are lump-sum quantities with no dimension details to check — look at the Source field and page number of every row · Pile types use default values; check the material/grade field of pile rows again
💡 Permissions, quota and files Available when signed in with an account that can edit projects (lifetime VIP, staff, administrators) · Your AI (MCP) — results can be sent to the inbox up to 60 times per day · Files stay with your AI and never pass through Chang Pile's servers · Results stay in the inbox until imported or discarded

Quantity take-off from SketchUp / Revit models (plugin)

The Chang Pile BOQ & CPM plugin (version 2.0) reads the type and size of the elements in the model (floor · work category · width × depth × length · area · volume) and the BOQ items assigned to elements in the model, then sends them to BOQ Studio — through the same review page as the AI, then into the take-off tables, with prices following immediately from the price database · It is the same plugin as for CPM Studio (4D scheduling); see CPM Studio manual

InstallHow
Revit 2025 · 2026 · 2027
(recommended — has an installer)
Download ChangPile-BOQ-CPM-v2.0.0.zip → extract it → close Revit and double-click Setup.exe → tick the versions you want (detected automatically · SketchUp can be installed on the same screen) → Install → open Revit and press Always Load · The buttons are on the Chang Pile tab (panels BOQ Studio · CPM Studio (4D) · Chang Pile BOQ & CPM) · If Windows shows “Windows protected your PC”, press More info → Run anyway · No administrator rights needed · Installs straight over version 1.x · Uninstall from Settings → Apps → Chang Pile BOQ & CPM · To install manually without Setup: install.cmd in the zip file
SketchUp 2017 or laterDownload changpile_cpm.rbz → in SketchUp Extensions → Extension Manager → Install Extension (or use the Setup.exe above) · the Chang Pile BOQ & CPM toolbar or the menu Extensions → Chang Pile BOQ & CPM → Send model for BOQ take-off (BOQ Studio) · Right-click an element → Chang Pile BOQ & CPM → Assign BOQ item…
Automatic sending (optional)Enter the connection link from Your AI (MCP) step 1 in the plugin's settings menu (the same link you use with your AI) → the model appears in the AI results waiting to import inbox as soon as you press send · Without a link, save it as a .json file and press Import model file (.json) on card B

Buttons on the SketchUp toolbar and on Revit's Chang Pile tab — each icon shows what its button does:

IconButtonWhat it does
Send model for BOQ take-offSends the element types/sizes and the assigned BOQ items to BOQ Studio
Assign BOQ itemSelect elements, then assign a BOQ table (truss · roof · PEB, etc.) to them
BOQ item summarySee how many elements each table has · click to select those elements in the model
Send model for schedulingSends the elements to CPM Studio for automatic scheduling
4D schedulePulls the schedule from CPM Studio to color the model (Revit opens the 4D player)
Show status on date (SketchUp)Colors elements by work status on the chosen date
Play 4D / Stop (SketchUp)Plays the construction sequence week by week (red button = stop)
Reset colorsClears the applied colors and shows hidden elements
SettingsPrivate MCP link · turn automatic assignment to BOQ tables on/off
AboutPlugin version and manual link
Model elementGoes toPrinciple
Piles · footings · columns · beams · slabs · RC walls · stairsRC members tableActual dimensions from the model; the app computes concrete, formwork, rebar and excavation/fill itself · Footings get their excavation depth from the lowest level · names containing Shear wall / Core / precast → that type · non-rectangular slabs use equivalent dimensions from the area
Doors · windows · curtain wallsDoors & windows tableCode from the type name — fire-rated · roller · automatic · bathroom/uPVC · sliding (or width ≥ 1.6 m) · aluminium · solid timber · fixed windows/curtain walls · awning windows · others = sliding · exterior walls get "Exterior" ticked
Masonry / lightweight partition wallsBOQ items by codeNet one-side area (openings deducted in Revit) · type from the name (lightweight block by thickness · half/full-brick clay brick · concrete block · gypsum · fiber cement · glass) · masonry walls add plaster on 2 sides and stiffener columns/lintels 0.5 m/m² (approximate) · painting on 2 interior sides, or one exterior + one interior side
Ceilings · floor finishes · roofsBOQ items by codeArea from the model · code from the type name (T-bar · fiber cement · moisture-resistant · granito · laminate · vinyl · metal sheet · concrete roof tiles, etc.) · roofs of unknown type use metal sheet (Estimated tag) · RC roofs go in as slabs
Steel framing (columns · beams · steel roof framing)STR-023 · STR-026Weight = steel volume × 7,850 kg/m³ · painting 35 m²/t (approximate)
MEP systems · othersWarningReports the number of elements not yet taken off — enter them in the electrical, sanitary or A/C tables, or have the AI take them off from the drawings
Elements with an assigned BOQ item or auto-assigned to a table (below)That table directlyEvery field as chosen in the plugin · sizes measured from the element · quantity = number of elements with the same floor, name and values · these elements are not counted again in the rows above (e.g. members of a Revit truss do not go into structural steel STR-023) but are still all sent to CPM Studio for scheduling

Assigning BOQ items to model elements (plugin version 2.0)

Select elements → Assign BOQ item (Revit: Chang Pile tab → BOQ Studio · SketchUp: toolbar or right-click) → choose the table → set every field just as on the take-off page (configuration, steel sizes, connections, roofing material, insulation, gutters, etc. — options that depend on other fields update accordingly) → Assign to selected elements · The data is stored in the model file (.rvt / .skp) and can be re-sent any time · The Model summary tab shows how many elements each table has; click to select those elements in the model

TableMeasured from the element automaticallyAuto-assigned to the table (can be turned off in settings)
Structural steelLength/piece = longest side—
Steel truss (Truss)Span = long horizontal side · heightRevit: Structural Truss category · name contains truss / khrong thak (Thai for truss)
House roof framingWidth · length · pitch (from height, or the Slope of a Revit roof)—
PEB buildingWidth · length · eave heightName contains PEB / pre-engineered / akhan samret rup (Thai for prefab building)
Cellular beams · castellated beamsLength/beamName contains cellular / castellated / cellular spelled in Thai
Timber workLength · width/span · heightName contains the word timber/wood (or its Thai equivalent) together with rafter · joist · frame · truss (in Thai or English)
Roof · roofing materialWidth · length · pitch—
Truss roof · roofing materialWidth · length · height—
Metal sheet walls · sign facesWidth/length · heightName contains phanang metal sheet (Thai) / metal sheet wall / cladding

Size fields have Measure from model ticked — select several elements and each is measured individually · Untick it to type values yourself · All BOQ items in the plugin are generated from the same engine as the web pages (plugins/catalog/boq-catalog.json), so they always match the options in the tables · Values not among the current options are reset to the table's default on the review page

  • Give types meaningful names — the code-selection rules read the type name (Revit: Family · Type) or the Tag/element name (SketchUp), e.g. Lightweight block wall 10 cm · Door uPVC 0.70x2.00 · T-bar ceiling 60x60
  • SketchUp — organize elements into groups/components and set Tags by category and floor (e.g. L2-Column) · dimensions are read from each element's bounding box along its own axes · include the word exterior (Thai: phainok) in the names of exterior walls/windows · a name or material containing lek (Thai for steel)/steel = steel framing
  • Try it first — Try the sample model (3-storey building) on card B · after importing you can press Back, just as with AI results
⚠ Your quantities are only as good as your model Elements that are not modeled (rebar, bracing, temporary works) are computed from the tables or standard values · Overlapping/duplicate elements in the model are counted twice · Always check the codes on the review page before importing

9BOQ by system and work categories

The BOQ by system menu is the full bill of quantities, split into tabs by work group · Quantities in the grey-background columns come from the take-off pages and cannot be edited here, but the unit price can be edited on every row and you can add quantities yourself or delete what you added — see Add, delete and hide empty items

⚠ Two items whose price cannot be edited PRE-006 Contractor's All Risks insurance (CAR) and SAN-012 Pipe fittings, valves and accessories are shown as grey dashed boxes because the system calculates them automatically as a % of the work cost To change them, edit the rate on the Project settings page instead
New work groups for building works In addition to the existing work groups there are tabs for Demolition and site clearance · Vertical transportation · Gas systems · Special systems · Furniture, fixtures and equipment · Provisional sums and contingency following the new work-category structure · They have no take-off tables yet; enter quantities with + Add item · All six groups belong to the building works group and use the building-works Factor F (loose equipment that must be separated as procured equipment should be entered in Form PR.2 (A) instead)

Add, delete and hide empty items

The BOQ by system page (By system view) shows only items that actually have a quantity, so it is easy to read and prints only the items that are actually priced

What you seeWhat it does
Number on the work-group tab · table headerThe count of items with quantity in that group — groups with no work yet show 0
Show items without quantity (N)Price-database items with no quantity yet are hidden; press to show them (the rows appear faded), press again to hide them
The + button at the end of an empty rowOpens the add-item form with that item already selected; enter the quantity and press Add
+ Add item in the table headerChoose an item in the open work group, enter the quantity, choose a sub-category or let it be assigned automatically · That row gets the label Added manually +quantity
Typing a name that is not in the listIn the item picker of + Add item, type a name and press Use this value = a custom item (OWN-001 …) You can put the unit after the name, e.g. Remove existing sign / job (if omitted = job) · The price starts at 0; enter the price in this table or on the price-database page · In the work-category (WBS) panel you must choose a sub-category first
Bin button at the end of the rowRows labelled Added manually → asks for confirmation, then deletes only the manually added part · Rows calculated from the tables → a pop-up shows the source, with a button that takes you to that tab to edit it
Preview & print A4/A3Prints only the items with quantity in the open work group, renumbered, with no zero rows mixed into the document · Sub-items are shown under the parent line; turn them off with the Sub-items: shown button on the preview bar — see Sub-items
Export ExcelAn .xlsx file in which every amount cell is an Excel formula — edit it and it keeps calculating in the file on its own — see BOQ by system Excel
Export all groups to CSVStill exports every item, including zero items, with the sub-items under each line — it is a data-exchange file, and it can be used to set prices for any code through Import CSV
The ▸ N button before the item name · Expand all sub-items (N)Expands to show which take-off rows the line is summed from — see Sub-items
💡 Same system as the assign-items-to-categories panel Quantities added on this page and in the Assign items to work categories panel are one and the same set — add them on either page and they appear on both, and they can be deleted from both · Manually added quantities are added to the quantities calculated from the tables or drawings; they do not replace them — see Add and delete items

BOQ by system Excel — amounts as formulas

The Export Excel button at the top of the BOQ by system page gives a file Project name - BOQ by system.xlsx with 3 sheets + the Quantity source backup sheet (projects with floors defined also get BOQ by floor and Floor × work category summary) · The sheet matching the open view (By system / By WBS category / By floor) comes first · It can be pressed in every mode, including the sample mode

SheetContents · formulas
BOQ by systemWork groups in screen order · Quantity and unit price are orange cells that can be edited · Total material = quantity × price · Work-group total = SUMIF over “main” lines only · Sub-items sit under the parent line (level “sub”) Parent line = sum of its sub-items, and the parent line's unit price = amount ÷ quantity · CAR insurance = rate (summary sheet) × direct cost of all groups except preliminaries, as in the program · Items the program prices automatically (e.g. pipe fittings %) are plain numbers, not orange cells
BOQ by WBS categorySame tree and numbering as on screen (category STR → STR.06 → STR.06.001 · roadway ROD.05 → ROD.05.03 → ROD.05.03.001 · item no. 1.1.1) · The quantity, price and amount of each line reference the By system sheet — edit the price in one place on the first sheet and this sheet follows · Sub-category / main category / all-category totals are formulas · Share of a main category = category amount ÷ total project direct cost
BOQ by floor
when floors are defined
Floor → main category → sub-category → item (numbering L2-STR.06.001 · common CM-… · floor not set NA-…) · Under every line are the floor's sub-items = the source take-off rows for that floor (level column = sub), as supporting rows that are not counted twice in the totals · Floor quantities are values · The unit price references the By system sheet, so editing the price in one place updates every floor · Sub-category total = sum of the main lines · Floor total · All floors + common = direct cost · Floor share
Floor × work category summary
when floors are defined
Budget-control table — rows = main categories (in WBS order) · columns = floors · not set · common · total · Every cell references the floor's main-category amount on the BOQ by floor sheet · At the bottom: total per floor · floor area · THB/m² per floor · share of the project
Price summaryGovernment — direct cost per work group × Factor F (orange cell) + equipment cost + special expenses = median price (Factor F already includes VAT) · Private — A direct cost → B contingency → C overhead → D profit → E equipment/special expenses → F total before VAT → G VAT → H total offer price (the % rates are orange cells) · The final amount equals the program's header bar
Quantity source backup
last sheet in the file
The source and calculation formula of every line's quantity — see the next topic

Quantity source backup sheet — show the client the source and formula of every item

Both the Export Excel file (BOQ by system) and the Excel — PR. forms file attach the Quantity source backup sheet at the end of the workbook The client or a checker can see at once which take-off table rows each line's quantity comes from, and how it was calculated

ColumnContents
No. · code · itemOrdered by work group as in the BOQ sheet · The main line of each code has a light-blue background · Sub-items under the main line (code STR-005.01 …), one line per row in the take-off table
Data sourceThe table the quantity comes from — RC members · rooms · wall runs · structural steel · road segments · canals … or lump entry · measured on drawing/photo · AI take-off · added manually
Method (formula)The formula in words with the actual numbers, e.g. count 28 × width 2.8 × length 2.8 × thickness 1.2 × (1 + waste 5%)
QuantitySub-items are Excel formulas built from the same numbers, e.g. =28*2.8*2.8*1.2*(1+0.05) — click the cell to see the formula in the formula bar; the numbers can be edited · Main line = SUM of its sub-items · Values that do not come from a formula (lump entry · measured on drawing · AI · added manually) are orange cells · Codes with a single source are combined on one line
  • The BOQ sheet references its quantities from this sheet — edit the numbers in a formula on the Backup sheet and the quantities in the BOQ, the prices and the price summary recalculate throughout the workbook
  • The sheet header lists the constants used in the formulas — waste allowance: concrete 5%, steel 7%, brick 5%, tile 5%, paint 3% · default excavation working margin 0.30 m · lean concrete / sand bedding 0.05 m · tie wire 15 kg/t · stairs × 1.5 · automatic steel ratio
  • The formulas are written following the program's formulas for every table (footings, columns, beams, slabs, walls, stairs, piles, precast, steel, rooms, masonry walls, metal sheet, ceilings, doors and windows, building systems, built-ins, roads, bridges, canals, irrigation structures) and have been checked so that every formula gives the same value as the BOQ quantity for every item · Typical-floor rows repeated over several floors are written as (formula)*number of floors
💡 How it differs from the PR. forms Excel The PR. forms Excel (the Summary — PR. forms page, see section 14) is laid out according to the government forms · The Excel from this page is laid out as seen on the BOQ by system screen, for further work, sending to contractors or comparing prices · In both files the amounts are formulas and the final totals are equal

Sub-items — expand to see where each line comes from

A BOQ line is the total for that code from all sources, e.g. STR-023 Structural steel = every row in the structural steel tab + lump-entry values + AI take-off results + manually added quantities Lines summed from two or more sources have a ▸ N button before the item name (N = number of sub-items); press it to expand them one by one or press Expand all sub-items (N) in the table header to expand the whole work group

  • Sub-items have their own codes following the parent code — STR-023.01, STR-023.02 … and item numbers 16.1, 16.2 … under line 16
  • Each item shows its name/section/size, quantity, unit, material cost, labour cost and total, with a label showing its source
  • The unit price starts equal to the parent line — edit the price on the parent line and the sub-items follow · or you can enter your own price for each sub-item — see Entering sub-item prices
  • The sub-items add up to the parent line to the last satang — amounts are rounded by the largest-remainder method so they total exactly · Expanding does not change the direct cost, Factor F or the median price
  • Sub-items are a display only; edit the quantity at the source (the take-off tab, the drawings page or a manually added item) and the sub-items update on their own
Source labelComes from
Structural steelEach row in the structural steel tab — section · use · remarks · number of pieces × length (for STR-023 weight, STR-025 bolts, STR-026 anti-rust paint)
RC memberEach row in the structure tab — excavation, backfill, sand bedding, lean concrete, concrete, formwork, rebar (automatic method), piles · Bridge works and irrigation structures are broken down the same way
Rebar by bar · rebar cut listEach row in the rebar table (when the rebar method is set to manual), including rows sent from the rebar cut list
Rooms · doors & windows · electrical points · sanitary fixtures · air conditioning · built-insEach room / each piece in the tab for that work
Road segment · canalEach Sta. segment on the roadway and irrigation pages
Measured on drawing/photoEach measurement on a PDF drawing or site photo linked to a BOQ code (shows the file name and page)
AI take-offEach line the AI sends as a BOQ item by code, e.g. H-300x300x10x15, C-150x65x20x3.2, L-50x50x5 for STR-023
Added manuallyQuantities added with + Add item on this page or in the assign-items-to-categories panel
Lump entry · program formulaThe remainder that does not come from table rows, e.g. values entered in parameters, or painting of the steel roof frame estimated from the roof area

Headings and prices by the selected material/grade (concrete · formwork · lean concrete)

The Material / grade column in the structure tab of the Building page sets both the price and the name of the BOQ line so they match

  • Heading — choose a single grade, e.g. Ready-mixed concrete fc′ 210 ksc, and the STR-005 heading becomes Ready-mixed concrete fc′ 210 ksc (TIS 213-2552) incl. placing and vibrating · several grades become Structural concrete, 2 types — fc′ 280 ksc (1 member) · fc′ 210 ksc (1 member) · You can type your own concrete name and that name becomes the heading (the price of the original code is used)
  • The small line under the heading shows where the unit price comes from — Price by the material selected on the take-off page · Price from the price database · or Unit price entered manually with the name of the code in the price database (e.g. STR-005 Structural concrete fc′ 240 ksc), so you know which code it is and do not confuse it with the selected grade
  • Sub-items show the grade of each member and use that grade's price — the parent line is the volume-weighted price, and the total stays the same
  • If you edit a line's unit price in the BOQ yourself so it no longer matches the material price, the label ⚠ Price differs from selected material · use material price appears; press it, confirm, and it goes back to the material price (undo with Ctrl+Z)
  • Change the grade in the structure tab → the heading, sub-items, price and documents (CSV · printouts · PR. forms · Excel) change immediately

Entering sub-item prices

The Material/unit and Labour/unit cells of a sub-item can be edited, e.g. when structural steel H costs a different price per kg than angle L

  • On the first entry the line switches to sub-item pricing — sub-items not yet entered (including items added later) use the parent line's original price; manually entered cells are orange
  • The parent line shows the quantity-weighted average price in an orange dashed box that cannot be edited there — the line amount = Σ quantity × price of each sub-item, which then flows into the direct cost, Factor F and median price as usual
  • The Sub-item prices · use one price button on the parent line — asks for confirmation, then clears the sub-item prices and goes back to a single price (the price before sub-item entry began) · Undo with Ctrl+Z
  • Sub-item prices are tied to the source + text of the sub-item, not its sequence number — adding/deleting source rows does not swap prices · If you edit the text of a source row, that row's price goes back to the line's original price
  • CSV: export, edit the prices of rows with level = sub and import back — the system matches by parent code + source + item and imports only rows whose price changed (a pop-up shows the count)
  • Printouts, CSV, Excel and PR. forms use the price of each sub-item

Filtering sub-items

Lines with 6 or more sub-items (e.g. STR-023 structural steel with dozens of sections) show a filter bar at the top of the sub-items when expanded with ▸

  • Search box — you can type several words, and all of them must match · Spaces are optional: typing H300 finds H 300x300x10x15 · Searches the name, sub-code and source
  • Quick-filter chips are built from the line's actual data — Source (AI · structural steel · added manually …) · Section (H · C · L · □ …) · Used as (steel beam · bracing …), with the number of items · Several chips in the same group = show any one of them · Different groups = must match every group · Groups with only one value are not shown
  • Totals of the filtered items are shown at the end of the bar — Showing 9 / 30 items · 20,335.50 kg · 1,016,775.00 THB · Press Clear filters to show everything
  • Filtering applies on screen only and is not saved to the project — the parent-line total, printouts, CSV and PR. forms still contain all sub-items

Piles — headings and price codes by the type actually used

Each pile row in the structure tab is priced with that row's code · The price database has 80 pile codes — the four original codes and the size-specific codes STR-101–176, one code per type/size in the pile catalogue

CodeTypeQuantity
STR-017Prestressed concrete I-pile I-22, 21 m long (driven pile) — default · The original catalogue set (I-18/22/26 · square 0.30/0.40 · Spun Ø0.40 · micropile) is weighted into this code's priceNumber of piles
STR-018Prestressed concrete I-pile I-30, 21 m long (driven pile)Number of piles
STR-019Dry-process bored pile Ø0.35 m, 21 m deepNumber of piles
STR-020Wet-process bored pile Ø0.60 m (choosing Wet bored Ø0.60 from the catalogue gives this code)Metres = number of piles × length per pile (dimension 3)
STR-101–176Every type by size — I-section · solid square · hexagonal · Spun · dry bored · wet bored · micropile · H-Pile · steel pipe · sheet pile · barrette · CFA · DCM · jet grout · timber pileMetres = number of piles (sheets) × length (dimension 3)
List of all 76 size-specific codes and their default prices per metre
CodeItem (unit m)MaterialLabour
STR-101Prestressed concrete I-pile I-12 (0.12×0.12 m) (incl. driving)6545 (W809 1.2.1.1)
STR-102Prestressed concrete I-pile I-15 (0.15×0.15 m) (incl. driving)10045 (W809 1.2.1.1)
STR-103Prestressed concrete I-pile I-18 (0.18×0.18 m) (incl. driving)15045 (W809 1.2.1.1)
STR-104Prestressed concrete I-pile I-22 (0.22×0.22 m) (incl. driving)22046 (W809 1.2.1.2)
STR-105Prestressed concrete I-pile I-26 (0.26×0.26 m) (incl. driving)30053 (W809 1.2.1.3)
STR-106Prestressed concrete I-pile I-30 (0.30×0.30 m) (incl. driving)40074 (W809 1.2.1.4)
STR-107Prestressed concrete I-pile I-35 (0.35×0.35 m) (incl. driving)55089 (W809 1.2.1.5)
STR-108Prestressed concrete I-pile I-40 (0.40×0.40 m) (incl. driving)720101 (W809 1.2.1.6)
STR-109Prestressed concrete solid square pile 0.15×0.15 m (incl. driving)14045 (W809 1.2.1.1)
STR-110Prestressed concrete solid square pile 0.18×0.18 m (incl. driving)19045 (W809 1.2.1.1)
STR-111Prestressed concrete solid square pile 0.22×0.22 m (incl. driving)29046 (W809 1.2.1.2)
STR-112Prestressed concrete solid square pile 0.25×0.25 m (incl. driving)38051
STR-113Prestressed concrete solid square pile 0.30×0.30 m (incl. driving)54074 (W809 1.2.1.4)
STR-114Prestressed concrete solid square pile 0.35×0.35 m (incl. driving)73089 (W809 1.2.1.5)
STR-115Prestressed concrete solid square pile 0.40×0.40 m (incl. driving)960101 (W809 1.2.1.6)
STR-116Prestressed concrete solid square pile 0.45×0.45 m (incl. driving)1,220120
STR-117Prestressed concrete solid square pile 0.50×0.50 m (incl. driving)1,500130
STR-118Prestressed concrete hollow hexagonal pile 0.25 m (incl. driving)21051
STR-119Prestressed concrete hollow hexagonal pile 0.30 m (incl. driving)30074
STR-120Prestressed concrete hollow hexagonal pile 0.35 m (incl. driving)41089
STR-121Prestressed concrete hollow hexagonal pile 0.40 m (incl. driving)540100
STR-122Prestressed concrete hollow hexagonal pile 0.45 m (incl. driving)680120
STR-123Centrifugal round pile, Spun Pile Ø 0.25 m (incl. driving)30064 (W809 1.2.1.7)
STR-124Centrifugal round pile, Spun Pile Ø 0.30 m (incl. driving)41096 (W809 1.2.1.8)
STR-125Centrifugal round pile, Spun Pile Ø 0.35 m (incl. driving)520120 (W809 1.2.1.9)
STR-126Centrifugal round pile, Spun Pile Ø 0.40 m (incl. driving)690128 (W809 1.2.1.10)
STR-127Centrifugal round pile, Spun Pile Ø 0.45 m (incl. driving)840136 (W809 1.2.1.11)
STR-128Centrifugal round pile, Spun Pile Ø 0.50 m (incl. driving)1,040144 (W809 1.2.1.12)
STR-129Centrifugal round pile, Spun Pile Ø 0.60 m (incl. driving)1,410162 (W809 1.2.1.13)
STR-130Centrifugal round pile, Spun Pile Ø 0.80 m (incl. driving)2,310199 (W809 1.2.1.14)
STR-131Centrifugal round pile, Spun Pile Ø 1.00 m (incl. driving)3,400240
STR-132Dry-process bored pile Ø 0.35 m (incl. concrete and rebar)570290
STR-133Dry-process bored pile Ø 0.40 m (incl. concrete and rebar)750330
STR-134Dry-process bored pile Ø 0.50 m (incl. concrete and rebar)1,160410
STR-135Dry-process bored pile Ø 0.60 m (incl. concrete and rebar)1,680500
STR-136Wet-process bored pile Ø 0.40 m (incl. concrete and rebar)1,560670
STR-137Wet-process bored pile Ø 0.50 m (incl. concrete and rebar)2,4301,040
STR-138Wet-process bored pile Ø 0.80 m (incl. concrete and rebar)6,2202,670
STR-139Wet-process bored pile Ø 1.00 m (incl. concrete and rebar)9,5004,500
STR-140Wet-process bored pile Ø 1.20 m (incl. concrete and rebar)14,0006,000
STR-141Wet-process bored pile Ø 1.50 m (incl. concrete and rebar)21,8809,380
STR-142Wet-process bored pile Ø 1.80 m (incl. concrete and rebar)31,50013,500
STR-143Wet-process bored pile Ø 2.00 m (incl. concrete and rebar)38,89016,670
STR-144Micropile, square 0.18×0.18 m (incl. jacking/driving, per section)250150
STR-145Micropile, square 0.22×0.22 m (incl. jacking/driving, per section)380180
STR-146Micropile, hollow centrifugal round Ø 0.21 m (incl. jacking/driving, per section)290160
STR-147Micropile, hollow centrifugal round Ø 0.30 m (incl. jacking/driving, per section)530200
STR-148Steel H-Pile 200×200×8×12 (49.9 kg/m) (incl. driving)1,500250
STR-149Steel H-Pile 250×250×9×14 (72.4 kg/m) (incl. driving)2,170300
STR-150Steel H-Pile 300×300×10×15 (94.0 kg/m) (incl. driving)2,820350
STR-151Steel H-Pile 350×350×12×19 (137.0 kg/m) (incl. driving)4,110420
STR-152Steel H-Pile 400×400×13×21 (172.0 kg/m) (incl. driving)5,160500
STR-153Steel pipe pile Ø 406.4×9.5 mm (93.0 kg/m) (incl. driving)3,250450
STR-154Steel pipe pile Ø 508.0×12 mm (146.8 kg/m) (incl. driving)5,140550
STR-155Steel pipe pile Ø 609.6×12 mm (176.8 kg/m) (incl. driving)6,190650
STR-156Steel pipe pile Ø 711.2×12 mm (206.9 kg/m) (incl. driving)7,240750
STR-157Steel pipe pile Ø 812.8×14 mm (275.8 kg/m) (incl. driving)9,650850
STR-158Steel sheet pile Larssen FSP-II per sheet (rental, incl. driving and extraction)580190
STR-159Steel sheet pile Larssen FSP-III per sheet (rental, incl. driving and extraction)720240
STR-160Steel sheet pile Larssen FSP-IV per sheet (rental, incl. driving and extraction)910300
STR-161Barrette pile 0.80×2.00 m (incl. concrete and rebar)20,8008,800
STR-162Barrette pile 0.80×2.80 m (incl. concrete and rebar)29,12012,320
STR-163Barrette pile 1.00×2.80 m (incl. concrete and rebar)36,40015,400
STR-164Barrette pile 1.20×2.80 m (incl. concrete and rebar)43,68018,480
STR-165Barrette pile 1.50×2.80 m (incl. concrete and rebar)54,60023,100
STR-166Continuous flight auger bored pile CFA Ø 0.40 m (incl. concrete and rebar)1,300500
STR-167Continuous flight auger bored pile CFA Ø 0.60 m (incl. concrete and rebar)2,9001,000
STR-168Continuous flight auger bored pile CFA Ø 0.80 m (incl. concrete and rebar)5,2001,700
STR-169Deep cement mixing column (DCM) Ø 0.60 m260200
STR-170Deep cement mixing column (DCM) Ø 1.00 m700450
STR-171Jet grout column (Jet Grouting) Ø 0.60 m1,200800
STR-172Jet grout column (Jet Grouting) Ø 1.00 m2,6001,500
STR-173Eucalyptus timber pile Ø 4 in (incl. driving)2524
STR-174Eucalyptus timber pile Ø 6 in (incl. driving)6022
STR-175Pine timber pile Ø 6 in (treated, incl. driving)18022
STR-176Pine timber pile Ø 8 in (treated, incl. driving)30025

Labour figures with W809 in brackets = the driving cost from labour price list W 809 (100 piles or more, within Bangkok) ÷ the length specified by that clause, e.g. clause 1.2.1.6, pile 0.40×0.40×21 m, 2,122 THB/pile → 101 THB/m · All other figures (material prices for every code, labour for bored piles, steel piles, etc.) do not yet reference any agency's price list; they are set from market price ranges — the price-database page labels every such code estimate Before an actual submission, adjust them to provincial commerce prices or quotations from pile manufacturers/contractors

Choose the pile type and size in the Material / grade column of the pile row — the drop-down is grouped by type (I-section · square · hexagonal · Spun · dry bored · wet bored · micropile · steel · sheet pile · barrette · special bored/ground improvement · timber) and you can type to search, e.g. wet Ø0.80 or I-30 · The selected name appears in the BOQ heading and sub-items after the row's remarks · Once a type is chosen, the row immediately uses that type's size-specific code (e.g. wet bored Ø1.20 → STR-140); price per pile = price per metre × length in dimension 3 · Original-set items whose name includes a length (e.g. I-22, 21 m long) stay in STR-017 and keep their price per pile as before · You can type your own name; the row then uses the original code

  • The heading of a pile line shows the type from the take-off rows (remarks + length/pile), e.g. BP1 bored pile Ø0.50 m Safe Load 56 t/pile, 21 m long · The small line underneath shows which code the unit price comes from · Several types in one code become Piles, 2 types — …
  • The ⚠ Use code … button appears when the pile type does not match the price code (e.g. a bored pile in the driven I-22 pile code) — rows whose type was chosen from the catalogue get that type's size-specific code suggested · For rows with only remarks, the system guesses the code from the name (bored + dry, or Ø below 0.50 m → STR-019 · bored + wet · barrette, or Ø 0.50 m and up → STR-020 · I-30 and larger → STR-018 · driven piles, Spun, micropiles, steel piles, timber piles → STR-017 · ground improvement (DCM, jet grout) gets no code-move suggestion) Pressing it opens a pop-up showing the rows to be moved, the quantity in the new unit and the direct cost before → after, before you confirm
  • Choose the code yourself per type — expand the pile line with ▸ and choose a code in the Price code box at the end of each type's sub-item (all 80 codes are available; type to search, e.g. STR-14 or barrette)
  • Existing projects do not change on their own — rows that never had a code chosen are priced as STR-017 as before until you confirm the move · Newly imported AI take-off results get the suggested code straight away
  • After changing the code, the amount changes according to the new code's unit price — check that code's unit price again (e.g. STR-020 in the price database is priced for Ø0.60 m) · Undo with Ctrl+Z
  • Prices by the original-set pile type (Material / grade column) apply only to rows in code STR-017; rows in other codes use that code's price — the Selected materials and market prices table shows prices and total lengths by the row's code
  • Pile head cutting (STR-022) and pile testing (STR-021) still count every pile of every code
⚠ AI take-off results imported before 20 Oct 2569 Earlier versions stored the AI's BOQ items only as a total per code, so a line such as STR-023 expands to just one AI takeoff result line To see each section separately, open the original list in the AI (MCP) box and import it again, choosing Replace only previous AI rows (or Replace existing work if the work in those tables all came from AI) — the total stays the same, but you get all the sub-items · Do not choose Add as new work, because the quantities would be counted twice
💡 Sub-items in exported files The CSV lists the sub-items after the parent line, with the columns Level (main/sub) · Parent code · Source — filter the level column to “main” and the sum gives the original total Edit prices in the file and Import CSV back — main lines set the code's price, while sub-item rows whose price changed become sub-item prices (see Entering sub-item prices) · The Excel — PR. forms and PDF — PR. forms also have sub-items under each line — see section 14

Work categories (WBS)

The By WBS tab in the building menu maps price-database codes to main and sub-categories, so that PR.1 summarizes the totals by the work structure the agency requires

The standard structure has 3 levels across all four work groups, following the company's BOQ work-category file (Rev.0 · 23 Oct 2569) — level 1 main category · level 2 sub-category · level 3 item (price-database code), 50 main categories and 221 sub-categories in total

Work groupMain categoriesSub-categories
Building works15 categories · PRE DEM STR ARC BLT ELE SAN HVA FIR LFT GAS SPE FFE EXT PSM109 categories, e.g. STR.06 Structural concrete works
Roadway14 categories · ROD.01–ROD.1448 categories, e.g. ROD.05.03 Base course
Bridges and box culverts11 categories · BRG.01–BRG.1130 categories, e.g. BRG.07.01 Precast RC box culverts
Irrigation10 categories · IRR.01–IRR.1034 categories, e.g. IRR.03.01 Canal lining and joints
  • The work-group buttons above the category list (All · Building · Road · Bridge · Irrigation) filter the view to one group — the default is the group(s) the project has items in · Sub-categories that apply only to certain buildings/projects carry a label, e.g. Basement/high-rise · Hover over a category name to see the reference standard and MasterFormat number
  • 756 new item codes from the file (e.g. STR-201… ARC-101… DEM-001… ROD-101…) are already in the price database but have no price yet (default price 0) — on the price-database page choose the New codes · no price yet button to enter prices, then add quantities with + Add item on this tab or in BOQ by system · The new building categories demolition · lifts · gas · special systems · furniture and equipment · provisional sums and contingency are new work groups in BOQ by system and have no take-off tables yet
  • Projects saved with the first-generation structure (categories A–K) switch to the new structure on their own when opened, if they still use the unedited standard set — items whose category you chose yourself move to the closest sub-category · If you had edited the first-generation structure, it is kept as it was; press Restore standard when you want the new structure
  • The system maps items automatically first; rows still on the automatic value carry the label auto
  • As soon as you choose a category yourself, the auto label disappears and that value is remembered with the project
  • Press Restore standard work-category structure (the system asks for confirmation first) to clear all mappings back to automatic

On the BOQ by system page you can switch between two views — By system (ordered by the price-database groups) and By WBS category (ordered by the mapping)

Price summary by work category — Factor F · VAT · overhead · profit · contingency

Under the By WBS category table is the Price summary by work category card, which works from the direct cost of each main category through to the final price · The card's bottom bar equals the header-bar total to the last satang (label ✓ Matches header)

ModeColumns · calculation
GovernmentDirect cost · Factor F · Construction cost (incl. Factor F) · of which VAT · share — Construction cost = each item's amount × the Factor F of the price group that item belongs to (building · road · bridge · irrigation), as in PR.5 · Work categories containing items from several price groups show a weighted-average Factor F (marked *) · Factor F already includes VAT, so the VAT column is the portion contained within = construction cost − construction cost ÷ (1 + VAT), not an addition · Preliminaries set as excluded from the direct cost get Excluded (Factor F 0) · Ending with procured equipment cost + special expenses (if any) = median price
PrivateDirect cost · Contingency · Overhead · Profit · VAT · total — Compounded in the same order as the header bar: contingency = A × % · overhead = (A + contingency) × % · profit = (A + contingency + overhead) × % · VAT = (everything before) × % · Equipment cost + special expenses are also subject to VAT = Total offer price

Adjust the rates with the button at the top right of the card — Government takes you to the Factor F page · Private takes you to the Project settings page (contingency, overhead, profit, VAT)

In the printed report — press Preview & print A4/A3 while the By WBS category view is open and the same price-summary table is printed after the bill of quantities, before the signature boxes (the same numbers as the on-screen card, and the table is not split across pages) · It ends with the median price row (Government) or the Total offer price row (Private), including VAT

BOQ by work category, split by floor

The By WBS category view has a View bar under the table header — Whole project (as before) or By floor (floors must first be defined in Building take-off → By floor · if they are not defined, a button takes you there) · Split by floor, the bill is ordered as floor → main category → sub-category → item, with item numbers starting with the floor code, e.g. L2-STR.06.001 · common items are CM-… · items with no floor set are NA-…

  • The orange bar is the floor header — floor total, share of the project, area and THB/m² · Click a floor header or main category to expand/collapse that floor's items · Buttons Expand all floors / Collapse all floors
  • Floor quantities come from the same floor split as the By floor page · The unit price equals the BOQ line · All floors + common = the direct cost to the last satang · Items rounded at whole-project level show ≈ before the quantity
  • Preview & print A4/A3 while the by-floor view is open gives the report Bill of quantities and prices by work category, split by floor — orange floor header → main category → sub-category → item → the floor's sub-items (the source take-off rows for that floor, e.g. column C2 · beam B1 on floor 5) → floor total · At the end is the Direct cost summary by floor table (area, material, labour, total, THB/m², share) · The Sub-items: shown / hidden button works as in the other reports
  • Export Excel while the by-floor view is open puts two sheets first — BOQ by floor (same layout as the printout, with the floor's sub-items, level column = main/sub · sub-items are supporting rows not counted twice in the totals · the unit price references the BOQ by system sheet, so editing the price in one place updates every floor) and Floor × work category summary (main category × floor, referencing the totals from the by-floor sheet + total per floor, area, THB/m², share) · All floors + common = direct cost

Send to CPM — continue the schedule in CPM Studio

The Send to CPM button (only in the By WBS category view) sends this bill as a starting schedule to CPM Studio — work categories, activities, budget, crews and estimated durations, with no retyping

OptionResult in CPM
Plan structureWhole project — main category → activities · By floor — CPM work category level 1 = floor (FDN · L1 … · floor not set · common), level 2 = that floor's main categories (STR · ARC …) activities = that floor's sub-categories or items; budget and duration are calculated from that floor's share · Opening the window from the by-floor view selects this option automatically
Activity level1 sub-category = 1 activity — main categories A, B… become work categories 1, 2… and each sub-category becomes an activity (suited to a master schedule) · 1 BOQ item = 1 activity — main category → sub-categories 1.1, 1.2… → every item with a quantity becomes an activity (detailed tracking)
Budget (BAC)Direct cost or median price / offer price — the selling price is calculated per main category with the same rates as the Price summary by work category card and used as the budget for the S-Curve and EVM in CPM
DurationActivity labour cost ÷ average wage (THB/person/day) ÷ crew size · If it exceeds the max days per activity, the system adds people instead (same person-days) · Items with no labour cost get 1 day · Crews are guessed from the category/item name (piles, formwork, rebar, concrete, electrical, etc.)
Initial linksFinish-to-Start in list order — Chain within main category (main categories start in parallel) · Chain whole project · No links · The preview table in the window shows the project duration along the longest path · By floor has Floor-by-floor construction sequence (the default) — structural work rises one floor at a time (lower-floor structure finished → next floor starts), other categories on a floor (architectural, building systems) start after that floor's structure is finished, and activities in the same category on a floor are chained in order

Press Send and open CPM Studio and CPM Studio opens with the Receive plan from BOQ Studio window, where you choose Create as a new project or Update the existing project previously received from this BOQ (if any)

💡 Edit prices and send again Choose Update the existing project and the system updates only the budgets of the activities it can match · Durations, links and progress adjusted in CPM stay as they are · New items are added at the end of the category · CPM backs up the schedule on the device before every import · You must be signed in to CPM with a VIP or staff account to import

Adding and deleting items in the assign-items-to-categories panel

The Assign items to work categories panel shows every item with a quantity in the project · If there is work the take-off tables do not cover, you can add it yourself here and the quantity flows into the BOQ and price immediately · The BOQ by system page has the same set of buttons — see Add, delete and hide empty items

  1. Press + Add item

    At the top right of the panel — an entry row appears under the panel header

  2. Choose an item from the price base

    You can search by code or name · Under each item it shows the unit and either how much is already In project or Not in project yet

  3. Enter the quantity

    The unit fills in automatically from the selected item · It must be greater than 0

  4. Choose a sub-category

    or leave it as Auto by code · You can change it later in the row's drop-down like any other item

  5. Press Add

    The row gets a green label Added manually +quantity to show it contains a manually entered part

Pressing the bin button at the end of a rowResult
Rows labelled Added manuallyA pop-up asks for confirmation first, then deletes only the manually added part · If quantity calculated from the tables or drawings remains, the item stays in the work category · If there is nothing else, the item disappears from the work category, the BOQ and the price
Rows calculated purely from the tablesCannot be deleted from this page because the quantity is calculated from the take-off tables · A pop-up shows the source, with a button to go and edit it, e.g. Go to the Architecture tab or Go to the Drawings page — edit or delete at the source and the item disappears from the work category on its own
💡 Manually added quantities are added to the existing ones If you add an item that already exists in the project, the quantity is added to the quantity calculated from the tables or drawings; it does not replace it · Contractor's All Risks insurance (CAR), calculated as a % of the work cost, adjusts automatically · The bin button is pinned to the right edge of the table and stays visible even when the table scrolls left and right
Kept separate from quantities measured on drawings On the Drawings page, the estimated price from measurements and the items sent to the BOQ count only the measurement results, not mixed with manually added items · Measuring again from the drawings does not remove the manually added part · Pressing Clear all quantities also clears the manually added part

Quantities and budget by floor / zone

The By floor tab on the Building take-off page ties three things together — floor / zone × work category (WBS) × take-off row · Each row in a table specifies its own floor, and the row's price code goes to a sub-category according to the By WBS tab, so you get the budget and quantities split per floor for budget control and floor-by-floor quantity checks · The totals of all floors always add up to the BOQ

  1. Create floors

    Press Create floors from project — you get FDN foundation/basement works · L1…Ln according to the number of storeys on the project settings page · RF roof · EX external works · Default area per floor = building area ÷ number of storeys · You can edit the code, name, floor number and area, add, delete and reorder floors (after you change a code, rows referencing the old code follow automatically)

  2. Assign floors to rows

    Every building take-off table gets the columns Floor / zone and To floor (typical) next to the name column · Press Auto-assign floors to rows to let the system guess from the row name (floor 2 · 2F · roof · footing · pile · ground beam · external) and from room names that match the room table · The room and ceiling tables can use the rows' existing floor numbers directly · A new row goes on the same floor as the last row in the table

  3. Check and control the budget

    The Floors / zones and key quantities per floor table (concrete, rebar, formwork, cost, THB/m²) · The Budget — floor × work category table (THB or % of floor · sub-categories can be expanded) · Click a floor to see that floor's BOQ items by sub-category together with the source take-off rows — click a row to jump to it in the table and edit it · Export CSV by floor gives a floor × work category × item file

ColumnMeaning
Each floor (FDN · L1 …)Quantities from that floor's rows — calculated with the same engine as the BOQ (only that floor's rows, excluding footings with no rows), so the per-floor quantities match what the BOQ actually calculates
Floor not setRows with no floor chosen yet — press this row in the floor table to see the list of rows, then go and choose their floors
Common (whole project)Lump-entry values and formulas calculated for the whole project, e.g. preliminaries, fire protection, external works from parameters, insurance, pipe fittings % · roadway, bridge and irrigation works (combined into one row, not split by floor) · Press Spread common cost by floor area to see the total budget per floor (only the building-works common part is spread, by the areas entered · the BOQ does not change)
💡 Start from a sample project Every building sample is fully split by floor (every row has a floor · every floor has an area) and has the guide How this sample is split by floor on the By floor tab · 8-storey office building shows typical-floor rows in full (office area, air conditioning, electrical points L2 → L7 · floors, toilets, fire stairs L1 → L8 · columns C1 B1 → L4) · Warehouse separates the steel-frame roof (RF) from the external yard (EX) · 2-storey house — three samples where rows that used to combine two floors are split per floor, with the same totals · Principle used: a member belongs to the floor it stands on — floor n columns stand on the floor n slab · floor n beams and slabs are at level n · footings, piles and ground beams are in FDN · Samples loaded earlier get a floor set and floor assignment from the row names automatically when opened (without typical-floor ranges) — press Load all 7 samples into the project list to get the fully floor-split versions
💡 Typical floor rows For a building whose floors 2–10 are identical, you do not need to enter 9 sets — enter the rows for one floor, choose Floor / zone = L2 and To floor (typical) = L10 (shown as L10 ×9) · The BOQ multiplies the quantity by 9 floors, and each floor gets an equal share · Typical-floor rooms get the floor number of their own floor (under-roof insulation is counted only for top-floor rooms) · The rebar cut list multiplies the number of pieces by the number of floors, and rebar-by-bar rows sent from the cut list get the floor of their source member · Floor ranges follow the order in the floor table — moving or deleting a floor within a range changes the number of repeated floors accordingly
💡 Floor codes can be renamed, and everything that refers to them follows Type a new code in the code cell of the floor table (e.g. L1 → 1F) — once the code is valid, the system changes it immediately across the whole project: every take-off table (floor and to floor) · the rebar cut list · rebar-by-bar tables created from the cut list · quantities sent from drawings, and then reports how many places were updated · A blank code, or one duplicating another floor, gives the cell a red border and leaves it for you to keep editing — if it is still invalid when you leave the cell, the system reverts to the last code and tells you why
Items rounded to whole numbers for the whole project e.g. pile testing 1 pile per 50 piles · concrete compressive strength tests — calculating them per floor could add up to more than the actual total, so the system splits them proportionally so they add up to the BOQ line, and marks the quantity with ≈ · Floor deductions from items calculated for the whole building (external openings deducted from external painting) go into the common part and are not shown as negative quantities per floor · For projects without floors, the take-off tables stay exactly as before and prices do not change

10Price database and government prices

The Price database menu holds the material and labour unit prices for all 1,616 items. Edit them here and every BOQ updates immediately · The default prices are Bangkok/metropolitan-area market prices, excluding VAT

  • The N items edited chip shows how many prices you have changed from the defaults
  • Press Reset prices to clear all edits back to the original values — a pop-up shows how many codes will be cleared, and your work is backed up first
  • The search box accepts codes, item names and work-category names · The table shows 160 rows at a time; if there are more, search or choose a category
  • The New codes · no price yet (756) button gathers the new codes from the 3-level work-category structure, for which the company file defines the name, unit and sub-category but which have no price yet (material 0 · labour 0); each row carries the label No price yet — enter the price before adding quantities, otherwise the item will have a quantity but an amount of 0 THB
  • The Custom items (N) button shows the items typed in yourself in this project (OWN-001 …); you can enter their prices like any other code — see section 5
  • The estimate label = the default price is set from market price ranges and does not yet reference a government price list (built-in work · size-specific piles)

Bolts and fixings category (FAS-001–444)

This category has 444 codes, built from two product catalogues — NPI Technology and Supply (FAS-001–308) and Nguan Hong Panich (FAS-309–444, only items not already in the first catalogue) Bolts are priced as sets (bolt + nut + washer as stated in the name) at one standard length per size

GroupContents
Anchors · platesAnchor Bolt J/L SS400 and F1554 Gr.55 M16–M48 · priced per kg (made to order) · cut-and-drilled plates · setting templates
Bolts · screwsMetric white (zinc) · BSW · UNC 4.6 · 8.8 · A307 · A325/A325M · A490/A490M · A193 B7 · F10T · S10T · socket head 12.9 · carriage bolts · fully threaded studs
Nuts · washersHex nuts DIN 934 · A194 2H · nylon lock · cap · wing · flange · Unistrut channel spring nuts · flat washers · spring washers · F436
Wire rope · lifting gearWire rope 6x36 IWRC · 7x7 · fibre-core wire rope · shackles · eye bolts/eye nuts · turnbuckles · wire rope clips · thimbles
Hangers · clampsU hangers · strap · split ring · U-bolts · riser clamps · beam clamps · threaded rod · stainless steel bands · omega/PVC clamps · adjustable clamps
Anchors (wall plugs)Drop-in · nail-in · wedge · sleeve anchors · chemical anchors · plastic · umbrella · gypsum · lightweight-block · lead · ceiling-hanger · cast-in concrete · three-leg
Self-drilling screws · rivetsSelf-drilling screws with rubber washer (metal sheet fixing) · wafer head · ceiling/gypsum screws · SmartBoard · self-tapping · Lag Screw · blind rivets
Form ties · tie rodsInner rods · poly cones · clamps · Dywidag tie rods · wing nuts — labour 0 because it is already included in the formwork labour of STR-008
Stainless steel 304Hex head screws · self-tapping · anchors · U-bolts · turnbuckles
⚠ All default prices in this category are estimates Both catalogues list only standards, grades and sizes, with no prices, and government price lists do not include these items — material prices are calculated from weight by dimensions × market price per kg by grade (e.g. zinc-plated mild steel 85 · A325 135 · A490 175 · stainless steel 304 450 THB/kg) Labour is set by size (tightening · pretensioning · anchor setting), Bangkok market prices Oct 2569, excluding VAT · Every row carries the label estimate · Before an actual submission, request quotations for the sizes and lengths in the drawings, then edit them on this page · For bolts whose length differs from the item name, adjust the price in proportion to weight or use a per-kg code

Drag to resize columns in the pricing tables (Excel-style)

Tables in the Pricing menu group — BOQ by system · Factor F · Summary — PR. forms · Price database · Composite materials · Road and bridge unit costs (21 tables) let you widen/narrow columns as in Excel to see truncated text (…)

  • Point at the edge of a column header and the cursor becomes a left-right arrow with an orange guide line · Drag = widen/narrow (the header and all rows resize together, with a width readout while you drag)
  • Double-click the edge = fit the width to the longest text in that column on a single line (up to 640 px)
  • Point at truncated text = see the full text immediately, without widening the column
  • Tables wider than the screen scroll left and right · Widths are remembered on the device for each table separately (they stay when you change category or reopen the program)
  • The ↺ Reset column widths button appears at the right corner of the header of a table you have resized, when you point at the header

The take-off tables on the building page can be resized by dragging the column-header edges in the same way, and have a Reset column widths button on the table header · The labour price list and work item list pages already wrap their text onto new lines, so they have no columns to drag

Fetching the latest prices from government agencies

Press Fetch latest prices and the system compares the published price with the price in use item by item, showing the % difference — red means more expensive, green means cheaper · Choose item by item which ones to accept, then confirm

⚠ The province on the project settings page matters here The system fetches prices for the selected province; if that province has no price, the national median price is used instead · This is why the construction-location field is a pick list — if you type it yourself and it does not match a province name, the system cannot find that province's prices
💡 Why it goes through a central server Government agency websites do not allow browsers to call them directly across domains, so the system has a server fetch the data and cache it once, and every device then reads the fetched data together — faster, and without burdening the source

Importing provincial commerce prices yourself

The Import provincial commerce prices button accepts prices copied directly from the announcement

  1. Choose the province and the price announcement period

    Up to 14 months back

  2. Enter the data

    Press Fetch automatically or copy a table from the web/Excel and paste it, one line per item · You can also upload a CSV file

  3. Check the matching results

    The system matches material names to price-database codes automatically, e.g. "Ready-mixed concrete 240" is matched to STR-005 · Items that cannot be matched are skipped and reported to you

  4. Confirm the import

    Select only the items you want, then confirm

⚠ Imported prices are material prices They exclude labour and VAT — the labour costs in the price database are not touched

11Composite material cost per unit

Some construction items cannot be priced per unit straight from the take-off; they have to be built up from a mix of several materials combined. For example, one cubic meter of site-mixed concrete requires knowing how many kilograms of cement, how many cubic meters of sand and stone, and how many liters of water it uses · The reference-price rules call this method composite material cost per unit and already provide the mix tables for it.

The Composite materials menu brings in that entire set of tables — 11 work groups, 367 items, 1,558 material rows — and multiplies them straight away by the unit prices this project actually uses.

The current set is taken from Section 7, Calculation of composite material cost per unit in building construction, pages 106–174 of the Rules for Calculating Reference Prices of Building Construction, B.E. 2569.

GroupWork coveredResult unit
1–21:3:5 mix concrete (site-mixed) · concrete to the Department of Public Works and Town & Country Planning standard, grades C.2–C.8THB/m³
3–4Topping concrete over precast floor planks · RC tie columns, lintel beams and countersTHB/m² · THB/m
5Ceilings in prefabricated materials, 47 typesTHB/m²
6Masonry walls — clay brick, hollow brick, firebrick, concrete block, lightweight (AAC) block, glass blockTHB/m²
7–8Plastering and wall cladding, 62 types · drywall partitions, 68 typesTHB/m²
9Floor finishes, 141 types — tiles, granito, marble, granite, timber floors, sidewalksTHB/m²
10Painting — acrylic emulsion, oil paint, wood stain, lacquer, polyurethaneTHB/m²
11RC drainage pipes — the new edition has a single fill-in form; you enter the size and quantities yourselfTHB/m

How the 2569 edition differs from the old one

Previously the program used the tables from the October 2560 edition (15 groups, 360 items). The 2569 edition regroups everything, so every section number has changed.

What changedDetails
4 whole groups removedReady-mixed concrete (truck mixer) · integral waterproofing admixture for concrete · bathroom/kitchen counters in marble/granite · doors and windows with timber frames
Drainage pipes changed formatFrom 7 fixed sizes to a single fill-in form with no size specified, where the estimator enters the size, earth quantities, pipe cost and labour cost
Expanded groupsDrywall partitions 52 → 68 types · floor finishes 121 → 141 types · ceilings 43 → 47 types · plastering and wall cladding 59 → 62 types
TIS numbers updatedBlended cement TIS 80/2566 · Portland cement TIS 15-2562 · hydraulic cement TIS 2594-2567 · lightweight block TIS 1505/2541
⚠ Older projects that had prices or quantities entered on this page Prices you entered yourself are migrated automatically, because they are now tied to the material name instead of its position. Any material the new edition no longer contains is removed, and a message tells you how many when the project opens · Quantities entered in fill-in forms, however, cannot be migrated, because they are tied to section numbers that now point to different items, so the system clears them and lets you know — they must be entered again.

How to use it

  1. Choose a work group

    The row of chips at the top holds the 11 groups of the handbook · or type in the search box to search across all groups, by section number or item name

  2. Choose an item from the list on the left

    Under each item name you see the composite material cost already calculated and the price-database code it is linked to · Items that still have unpriced materials show a dash instead of a figure, with a Missing price N tag

  3. Check the mix table on the right

    Each row is one material, with the handbook quantity, unit price and amount · The bottom line is the Total material cost per 1 unit

  4. Every row's unit price can be edited

    Just type over the Price/unit field; the system remembers it for this project · Press Clear prices entered manually in the header to go back to the prices from the price database

Where each material's unit price comes from

The system looks in this order, and under each material's name it tells you which source the price in use came from.

Price you entered yourself → Material cost of the linked price-database code → Built-in starting price

Because it looks things up this way, editing a price on the price-database page moves this page immediately; there is no hidden second price set that you have to chase and fix in two places. For example, coarse sand reads from STR-003 · RB6 and RB9 rebar read from STR-009 and STR-010 · tie wire reads from STR-016.

⚠ Finishing materials come without prices Tiles, marble, granite, paint, doors and windows and their hardware vary widely in price by brand and grade, so the program leaves them blank with a No price set yet tag rather than guessing — a guessed figure would flow silently into PR.1 and end up as a price the client actually uses · The 86 basic materials (cement, sand, stone, water, rebar, tie wire, nails, formwork timber, bricks, blocks, masonry/plaster/grout mortar) already come with starting prices.

Quantities can be edited only in rows the handbook leaves blank

The quantity figures in groups 1–12 are fixed by the rules, so they are locked against editing — if they could be edited, the result would no longer be a “value calculated according to the rules”.

Groups 13–15, on the other hand, are fill-in forms in the handbook that leave the quantity fields for the estimator to complete from the drawings of that job, such as counter length, number of hinges, or the depth to excavate for laying pipe · These fields accept input, and the system remembers them for this project.

Compare with the price database, then use the lower value

The bottom card places two values side by side — the material cost per unit the price database currently uses and the value calculated by the composite material method — and tells you which is lower and by how much.

💡 Why compare Section 4 of the rules states that where a construction item can be calculated both by the composite material method and by the normal take-off reference-price method, the case with the lower result shall be used · So this page does not choose for you; it shows both figures together with the difference, and you make the decision.

If you decide to use the calculated value, press Use this value for <code> and the system puts the material cost into that code in the price database, and the whole project BOQ updates immediately · Press Restore this code's original price to undo.

  • The button appears only for items that are actually linked to a price-database code — 38 items are linked, only pairs that are definitely the same item with matching units, e.g. item 1.1 lean concrete 1:3:5 ↔ STR-004 · item 8.1 half-brick clay brick wall ↔ ARC-001 · item 12.2 interior painting ↔ ARC-039
  • Items with no linked code still calculate and print normally; you just have to copy the figure and enter it yourself on the Price database page — pairs whose scope does not match are deliberately not linked, such as a bare RC counter versus a counter already finished with tiles, because a careless link would let the value flow into PR.1 without anyone noticing
  • For items whose prices are not yet complete, the button does not appear, because the total is not yet a real total
  • For groups 13–15, where the handbook also gives labour costs, the system splits the material cost and labour cost onto separate lines and writes them into separate fields in the price database

Sister page for road, bridge and box culvert work

The Unit work cost — road & bridge menu is the same kind of table, but taken from Section 4, Assessment of direct unit work cost, of the Rules for Calculating Reference Prices of Road, Bridge and Box Culvert Construction 2569 — 129 items, 903 material rows

How it differs from the composite materials pageDetails
It has sub-parts A, B, CThis book prices things in parts and then adds them up — for example, a catch basin prices the basin body and the cover separately — so this page shows a subtotal for each part before the grand total at the end
Some rows take prices in THB/t126 rows, mostly rebar and tie wire, where the handbook asks for a price per tonne but the quantity is in kilograms; the input field is marked with an Enter as THB/t tag · If the price comes from a price-database code that is already in THB/kg, the system does not divide it again
Most prices must be entered by youUnlike building work, this book asks the estimator to survey prices from local material sources under Section 5 and does not set median prices · So the system leaves them as "No price set" instead of entering guessed prices
⚠ Section 4 is not yet complete Section 4 has 348 items in total; this page has the 129 items for which the handbook fixes material quantities. The other 219 items are blank forms in which every line refers to machinery operating cost and depreciation (Section 8) or material haulage cost (Section 7), such as removal of existing pavement and all of the earthwork group. All three parts are now included — Section 8 is in the Machinery cost table view, Section 7 is in the Material haulage table, and the blank forms themselves are in the Calculation sheets (blank forms) view on the same page (see the calculation sheets topic) · You no longer need to open the book and fill them in line by line yourself.
📄 A misprint in the original that the program corrects Page 146, item 6.3 (5.2) reads Formwork (1) 2.40 m² @....(THB/t)/1,000, which makes no sense: formwork is measured in square meters, not tonnes, and the rebar line in the same item does not carry that marker, as if the marker slipped onto the wrong row · Left as is, the formwork cost would be divided by a thousand to almost zero, so the program removes that marker in this row only, and keeps every other row exactly as in the book.

Bill of building construction items — Section 2 of the building book

The Building work item list menu opens the bill of construction items for building construction under the Rules for Calculating Reference Prices of Building Construction 2569, Part 2, Section 2 — 3 parts · 3 work groups · 9 categories · 203 items · 910 sub-items

📋 This is a list of “items that should be there”, not a mandatory list The book itself says this bill collects the construction items that building construction in general should have, for those responsible for calculating median prices to use alongside the take-off, to survey and define the construction items · Some projects may have items beyond these; in that case the estimator may add items · Use it as a checklist of whether the take-off is complete.
⚠ A different set from the company's work categories Work categories A · B · C used to group the BOQ on the BOQ by system page are the company's own document format, whereas this bill is the government's, under the rules · The two sets do not overlap and do not replace each other · Its counterpart in the road, bridge and box culvert book is in the topic Bill of construction items.
PartContents
Part 1 Direct costDivided into 3 work groups — group 1 building work (1.1 structural engineering · 1.2 architecture · 1.3 plumbing, sanitary and fire protection · 1.4 electrical and communications · 1.5 air conditioning, ventilation, elevators) · group 2 contracted furniture and equipment · group 3 landscaping
Part 2 Purchased equipmentLoose furniture, audiovisual equipment, computers, security systems · priced at the manufacturer's or supplier's price plus VAT, and not added to the Part 1 work cost
Part 3 Special expenses per specification15 items, such as special scaffolding · BENCHMARK · settlement testing · CPM schedule
🔤 This book cannot be machine-read directly; its character codes must be converted first The font of the building book places vowels and tone marks in the Private Use area of Unicode, so the raw text layer reads ko-sa-rang instead of ko-sang (“construction”) throughout the book · The extractor has a conversion table of 14 characters, each worked out from the actual context of that character (e.g. k[F70A]osr[F70B]ang = ko-sang, with the tone marks restored) rather than guessed from the code range
After conversion not a single Private Use character remains in the book, checked across all 183 pages · This also unlocked extraction of other parts of the building book, not just Section 2
✓ Checkpoint — cross-checked against the W809 labour rate schedule scripts/check-bldwbs.js checks four layers
1 · Rules that must always hold — section numbers are complete with no gaps, never go backwards, never repeat · each child item's category must actually exist · pages must lie within the range of their part · and no Private Use characters or vowel-less spellings may remain, which is the symptom of a broken conversion table
2 · Cross-book check — work group 1 must have 5 categories, and the names of the first two categories must match the W809 labour rate schedule exactly · The two are separate documents but divide building work into the same categories; if they do not match, one side or the other was extracted wrongly
3 · SHA-256 fingerprint · 4 · --from-pdf re-extracts from the book and compares item by item
Tested to actually catch faults in all 13 scenarios
📖 An odd printing in the book — kept as printed Page 21 prints kha chài-jai phiset (“special expenses” with the wrong tone mark); the correct spelling is kha chái-jai · The printed page was checked and the book really is printed this way, not an extraction error, so it is kept as printed and a note is shown alongside it on screen.

Part 1 of the building book rules — Sections 1-6, the framework of the whole book

The Rules Part 1 (Sections 1-6) tab on the Building work item list page opens Part 1 of the building book, which is the framework for the whole book — 5 key components · 6 required documents · 7 report forms · 11 calculation steps · It is the counterpart of Part 1 of the road, bridge and box culvert book; the two books share the same structure, but the forms and steps differ according to the type of work

SectionContents
Section 1 OverviewThe rules consist of 5 components — direct cost (Direct Cost) · operating expenses (Indirect Cost, i.e. Factor F) · purchased equipment cost · special expenses per specification · and summarizing into the median price with the report identical, word for word, to the road and bridge book
Section 2 ScopeApplies to projects in the building construction work group, as defined in meaning and scope in the guidelines and practices · The purpose is to serve as the basis for comparing the prices offered by bidders, under the Government Procurement and Supplies Management Act B.E. 2560
Section 3 Required documentsSix items, usable as a checklist before starting the calculation — drawings and specifications · the designer's preliminary estimate · contract conditions (performance security and advance payment rates) · data current as of the calculation date (Factor F tables · price and material source requirements · labour rate schedule) · details of special expenses · and the report forms
Section 4 Report forms7 forms — PR.1 and the PR.1 (A) cover sheet · PR.2 and the PR.2 (A) cover sheet · PR.3 · the calculation and justification form for special expenses · and PR.4, the median price summary
Section 5 Calculation method11 steps, from the construction take-off to summarizing into the median price and preparing the report · Steps 5-6 are where it says to total the direct cost of the whole project and use that total to look up Factor F
Section 6 Additional provisionsItems that cannot be taken off under the rules shall use the method set by the Reference Price Committee; if none has been set, sound engineering practice may be applied, together with a memo recording the reasons and necessity
✓ Checkpoint — tying the text of the book to the program's actual behaviour Part 1 is almost entirely prose; stored as is, it would be just text. So scripts/check-bldpart1.js finds two points that can actually be checked against the program
1 · Section 4 specifies 7 forms — the checkpoint takes all seven names and verifies that the web page implements every one and that the report generator has all of PR.1 · PR.1 (A) · PR.2 · PR.3 · PR.4 · If one day any form is removed, the checkpoint flags it immediately
2 · Section 5, steps 5-6 say to total the direct cost of the whole project and look up Factor F from it — the checkpoint pins the calculator's default to ffbase = 'project' and requires every category to actually use the whole-project total (see the Factor F comparison basis topic)
3 · Rules that must always hold — the number of sections is complete and in the right order · no Private Use characters or vowel-less spellings remain (the symptom of a broken conversion table) · Section 2 must cite the 2560 Act · Section 6 must mention the justification memo
4 · Cross-book check — the 5 key components of the building book and the road and bridge book must all five begin with the same phrase; if they do not match, one side or the other was extracted wrongly
5 · SHA-256 fingerprint · 6 · --from-pdf re-extracts from the book and compares all 29 sections
Tested to actually catch faults in all 11 scenarios

Measurement standards, work quantities and allowances — Sections 3-4 of the building book

The Measurement standards and allowances (Sections 3-4) tab on the Building work item list page opens two paired sections of the building book — Section 3 is the rules for measuring and presenting figures, 13 clauses · 5 measurement principles, and Section 4 is how to measure and how much to allow for each work item — 5 categories · 240 clauses · a 32-line electrical systems allowance table · rebar allowances for 16 sizes · earthwork allowances for 8 items · pages 62-100 of the book
The two sections share one tab because Section 4 opens by citing Section 3 directly ("measurement of work quantities shall follow the standard for measuring and calculating work quantities in building construction")

Section 3 clauseWhat it specifies
1 Measuring work quantitiesUse Arabic numerals · two decimal places (except for counts) · round the decimals
2 Units of work quantityPer international standards · trade standards · or the manufacturer's standards
3 Where quantities may be measured fromFrom a survey · from the actual site · or from the construction drawings
4 Measurement methodsFive principles — use the dimensions annotated on the drawings · beware of errors when scaling · measure net and add a percentage allowance · measure net and include the allowance in the composite material cost · or count the actual number
✓ Section 3, clause 1 is not just text to read; it is actually checked against the program These three rules are rules for presenting figures, so the checkpoint has the program actually print the PR. forms of all five sample sets and inspects the resulting figures cell by cell, 4,255 cells — they must be Arabic numerals, two decimal places, and rounded, not truncated
The single exception is Factor F, which the book requires to four decimal places, and which is not a work quantity · The checkpoint allows four decimal places only where the value lies within the Factor F range
If one day someone changes the number formatter to Thai numerals, one decimal place, or truncation instead of rounding, the checkpoint flags it immediately — all three cases have been tested
📌 This section is where all the allowance percentages in the book live When you are doing a take-off and wonder what percentage to allow for this item, the answer is in Section 4 · Commonly used examples — excavation allows 30 percent · fill allows 60 percent · water supply pipe allows 10 percent of length · air ducts allow 30 percent of area · steel roof framing allows 3 percent · roof tiles allow 3 percent for gable roofs and 5 percent for hip roofs
The program does not apply them for you — the quantities entered in the BOQ belong to the person doing the take-off; this page is there for you to check whether the allowances meet the book
CategoryContents
4.1 Structural engineering work (18 clauses)Earthwork · reinforced concrete · formwork and shoring · reinforcing bars for concrete · waterproofing · roof framing · materials testing
4.2 Architectural work (36 clauses)Roofing · ceilings · walls and surface finishes · floors · doors and windows · sanitary ware · stairs · painting
4.3 Plumbing, sanitary and fire protection systems (22 clauses)Separates countable materials from those measured by length · 10 pipe types · pipe allows 10 percent of length · fittings and elbows priced as a % of the pipe cost
4.4 Electrical and communication systems (152 clauses)The longest in Section 4 · goes system by system, from high voltage to CCTV · every system states both what must be specified in the pricing list and how to count or measure · ends with a Breakdown Sheet and an allowance percentage summary table
4.5 Air conditioning, ventilation, elevator systems, etc. (12 clauses)Chilled water and refrigerant pipes allow 10 percent of length · ducts allow 30 percent of area · pipe insulation and sundries priced as a % of the pipe cost
✓ Checkpoint — the book has its own summary, so the two can be cross-checked scripts/check-bldqty.js checks six layers
1 · Cross-check the summary table against the prose — pages 97-98 have an allowance percentage table for electrical and communication systems, which summarizes what the prose of Section 4.4 states scattered in many places · Systems 1-8 of the table correspond exactly to clauses 2.1-2.8 of the prose · The checkpoint re-extracts the figures from the prose and cross-checks them with the table: 28 of 29 pairs match
2 · Rebar allowances for 16 sizes must run from smallest to largest, with the allowance increasing with size and never reversing — a single wrong figure breaks the order
3 · Cross-section check — the names of categories 4.1-4.5 must match categories 1.1-1.5 of the bill of building construction items exactly · Different sections, different tables, different pages, but the same division of building work
4 · Rules that must always hold — clause numbers must follow the actual table-of-contents order (only the first child or the next sibling) · percentage ranges must not be inverted · no Private Use characters or vowel-less spellings remain
5 · Tie Section 3 to the figures the program actually prints (see the box above)
6 · SHA-256 fingerprint · 7 · --from-pdf re-extracts from the book and compares every clause
Tested to actually catch faults in all 23 scenarios
⚠ One row of the summary table does not match the prose — kept as printed The table on page 97 has the row branch-circuit conduit (watertight or compression fittings), length allowance 15-20%, sundries allowance 30-35%
But the prose of Section 4.4 does not state this pair anywhere — clause 2.1.8 mentions only ordinary branch-circuit conduit (15-20% / 15-20%) · The whole 183-page book was searched: the word "compression" and the figure "30 - 35" appear on only one page, the table page
So it is not an extraction error but something the book writes in the table alone · Kept as printed, pinned in the checkpoint, and noted on screen; if one day another row stops matching, the checkpoint flags it immediately

Labour/operating rate schedule — Section 6

The Labour rates menu opens the labour/operating rate schedule for take-off and reference-price calculation of construction work, under Comptroller General's Department letter No. Kor Kor 0433.2/W 809 dated 14 November 2568 (the same set scanned and attached in Section 6 of the road and bridge book), which cancels the previous schedule under letter W 851 dated 28 December 2564 — the complete schedule, 44 pages · 5 work categories · 104 work groups · 1,266 items · 1,471 labour lines · The number 1266 at the end of the Labour rates menu is the number of items in the whole schedule; see Numbers after menu items

⚠ Not a replacement for the labour costs on the price-database page The labour costs on the Price database page are estimated market prices, whereas this schedule is the labour cost the rules require for reference-price calculation ("use the labour rates specified in the labour rate schedule for take-off and reference-price calculation") · The program does not overwrite them for you; it opens the schedule for you to search and compare, and the estimator decides
TopicDetails
How to browseChoose the work category first, then the work group — everything follows the book's order at every level · Two levels are needed because the electrical systems category alone has 716 lines in 58 groups; dumped out all at once, you could never scroll to what you want
How to searchType a job name, item number or condition · The search always runs across all categories and groups, because most people know the job name but not which category the book puts it in · Words separated by spaces must all be found, e.g. pile dia. 6 finds "pile, size dia. 6" x 6.00 m." even though the word "size" sits in between · You can also search directly by item number, e.g. 2.4.6
Why one item has several pricesThe book writes the name once and then splits it into several lines by the conditions in the remarks column; for example, pile driving is priced differently by the number of piles — 200 piles or more 95 THB · 100–200 piles 97 THB · 50–100 piles 133 THB · so this page shows a price range and expands the sub-lines so you can see the conditions
The schedule has three levelsWork group → sub-type → labour line · The middle level exists only in some groups; for example, item 4.58 luminaires is first split by luminaire type (Downlight · bare steel box fixture · high-bay/industrial fixture, etc.), and each type then has its own sizes · The web page shows the sub-type name as a divider where it changes
Remarks appear in two placesConditions the book states for the whole group are shown once at the group header — very important in the sanitary category, because these are the rules for pricing fittings, pipe supports and testing as a % of the pipe cost · Remarks for an individual item number are shown under that item
Work categories1 structural engineering 126 · 2 architecture 388 · 3 sanitary and fire-fighting systems 104 · 4 electrical and communication systems 716 · 5 air conditioning and ventilation systems 137 (labour lines)
📄 The data is not equally reliable on every page The W 809 PDF has 45 pages, but only the first 13 pages of the schedule have a machine-readable text layer; the other 31 pages are pure scanned images. This dataset therefore uses a tabular transcription of the whole schedule (an Excel file) as its source, not the letter itself directly
Pages 1–13 can be cross-checked directly against the letter's text layer, and have been verified to match on all 464 lines
Pages 14–44 come from the transcription alone, with no text layer for the machine to re-check — they are checked by structural rules instead (item numbers complete with no gaps · pages never go backwards · units must belong to the set the schedule uses · the number of lines in each category must match what the source file itself declares)
If you are going to use figures from pages 14–44 for an important decision, check the letter again — the web page states this throughout
✓ Checkpoint — cross-check against the letter where possible, and record the differences permanently scripts/check-wage.js checks four layers, the fourth being the only one that checks against the letter itself rather than the transcription
1 · Rules that must always hold — item numbers complete with no gaps · the group number must be the first two levels of the item number · units belong to the set the schedule uses · labour rates are positive integers · the labour rate must not equal a figure that appears in the remarks of the same line (the signature of picking a value from the wrong column) · and lines within the same item must not be exact duplicates, which catches a lost "sub-type" level
2 · SHA-256 fingerprint of the whole set
3 · --from-xlsx re-extracts from the source file and compares every line · it also pins that the extractor still cross-checks both sheets of the source file, all 1,682 rows (the source file keeps the same data in two sheets, so they can be checked against each other)
4 · --from-pdf cross-checks pages 1–13 against the letter's text layer, 464 lines · the accepted differences are recorded permanently: three points, and why; if the differences change from that, the checkpoint flags it
Tested to actually catch faults in all 24 scenarios
📌 Three points where the transcription and the letter's text layer disagree — every one checked In all three, the transcription is right and the PDF extractor is wrong, so the transcription is kept
· Page 2: the PDF extractor dropped the whole row of item 1.2.1.14, pile dia. 0.80 x 21.00 m, so the value 4,187 was lost and this pile size was merged into 1.2.1.13
· Page 4: the extractor dropped the third row of item 1.10.3, plain/deformed bars with a diameter over 16 mm, value 3,500
· Page 9: the OCR-derived text layer read the number with an extra digit as 151 · Checking the printed page for item 2.4.12 (including labour for applying primer adhesive) reads 51 — the file uses 51
The first two points mean the previous dataset, extracted from the PDF, was missing two rows, and the third means it had one wrong labour rate — this version fixes all three
📖 An odd printing in the book — kept as printed, not corrected Item number 2.68 (bath mixer tap with hand shower and flexible hose) should properly be 2.6.8, because it sits between 2.6.7 and 2.6.9 · The printed page was checked and the letter really is printed missing the dot, not a transcription error, so it is kept as printed, with a note shown on that item · The checkpoint pins that this number must be present; if one day someone corrects it, the checkpoint flags it, because it would no longer match the book
Grouping, however, uses the corrected number (2.6.8); otherwise 2.68, which looks like a two-level group number, would become a group of its own and drag items 2.6.9 to 2.6.32, another 24 items, under the wrong group too — which is exactly what happened in the "work group" column of the source file, so that column is not used; the group is derived from the item number instead

Calculation sheets (blank forms) — the rest of Section 4

Section 4 divides its items into two kinds · The first is the 129 items for which the handbook fixes material quantities, found in the Unit work cost items view · The second the book prints as step-by-step fill-in forms rather than material tables, found in the Calculation sheets (blank forms) view — 178 sheets, 2,404 steps

⚠ The book does not print the result of any step Unlike the Section 8 table, where the book prints totals that can be compared on every row · in the blank forms every field is a dotted line, so there is no way to check whether a calculated figure is right; the program therefore does not guess, and fills in only values that can be verified
Kind of lineWhat the program does
Set by the bookValues the book prints directly, such as volume of material removed = 0.05 m³ or @ 400 THB · filled in for you, nothing to enter
Section 8 (machinery cost)Lines like operating cost + depreciation (AC surface 5 cm) · the Section 8 table is looked up automatically from the name in brackets, and the line shows which row was used · 90 lines in the whole set, 72 found; for the rest, the book is ambiguous or names nothing, so you must enter them yourself
Section 7 (haulage cost)Lines like haul away……km · enter the distance and the Section 7 table is looked up for you, using the truck type and fuel price set in the haulage table view
Material row<name> <quantity> <unit> @ <price> · whichever field the book leaves blank, you fill in, and the system multiplies for you · rows where the handbook asks for the price in THB/t are labeled
Multiplybulking = ……X 1.70 · the multiplier comes from the book, but the multiplicand must be entered by you
Total · direct costAdded up automatically · only lines whose unit is THB are summed; lines such as thickness or volume are input values, not money amounts, so they are not counted
⚠ Why the multiplicand of a multiply line is not filled in For a line like concrete breaking cost = ……X 400, the book does not say which line's result the blank refers to. A reader can guess it is probably the previous line, but the book does not say so, and there is no answer key to check against. If the program guessed and guessed wrong, you would get a median price that looks reasonable but is wrong, without anyone noticing, so the estimator enters it, and the program multiplies and totals
💡 Which sheets benefit from Sections 7 and 8 In the list on the left, green tags show how many lines of each sheet refer to the Section 8 table and how many to Section 7. Sheets with tags are the ones that give you figures on many lines as soon as you open them · Group 6, miscellaneous work, mostly leaves the quantities blank as well, because they must be taken off from the drawings, so almost the whole sheet must be entered by you
📄 Where the figure of 178 sheets comes from The first extraction of Section 4 counted 219 blank forms, but that figure included item numbers that duplicated each other, because the book restarts the numbering (1)(2)(3) in every subsection · This round rebuilt the structure and prevents lines in remarks tables from being counted as subsections (page 93 has the row 4.50 45.00 10.350 169.81, which looks like subsection 4.50 and made the whole set of items under 4.6 drop out), leaving 178 sheets that are real, unique items · The item numbers of the blank forms and of the items with material tables never collide, and a checkpoint verifies this every time
✓ What the checkpoint can verify scripts/check-rbform.js re-extracts the whole set from the PDF and compares 178 sheets, 2,404 steps, including text, step type and unit · But it cannot verify that the calculations are right, because the book has no answer key · What it also checks is that item numbers do not collide with the items that have material tables, and that the number of lines that find a Section 8 match must not decrease, because if one day someone edits an item name in the Section 8 table, the referencing lines would silently fail to find it, and those fields would turn into manual entries without anyone knowing

Machinery cost table — Section 8

On the Unit work cost — road & bridge page there are view-switching chips at the very top; press Machinery cost table to switch to Section 8, Table of machinery operating cost and depreciation of the same book — 20 work groups, 58 work types, from clearing and grubbing, earthwork and selected material work through to surfacing and surface repair

FieldMeaning
Diesel price in the provincial capital districtThe book does not give a single table but 12 sets by fuel price, from 29 to 40.99 THB/liter. Enter the price for the province where construction takes place and the system picks the set for that range by itself (default 32 THB/liter)
Table set usedShows which set is currently being read, for reference when attaching documents showing which page of the book was used · If you enter a price outside the book's range, the system uses the nearest set and shows a warning bar, rather than extrapolating values itself
Area zoneFollows the Heavy-rainfall zone set on the project information page · This book distinguishes only normal and heavy rainfall, not zone 1 and zone 2 as the Factor F tables do, so whether you set zone 1 or 2, the heavy-rainfall column is read the same way
Operating cost · depreciation · totalOperating cost is fuel, maintenance and operator wages, while depreciation is based on the average machine price · The figure used is the total column, with the heavy-rainfall column already selected according to the project's zone
Lump-sum costs (end of table)The book prints mixing plant installation costs within the same table — asphalt mixing plant 250,000 THB/time and concrete batching plant 150,000 THB/time · These two items are priced per occurrence, not per unit of work, and do not change with the fuel price, so this page moves them to the end of the table so they do not mix with the per-unit rows

The values in this table are what the Section 4 blank forms call on, for example the line operating cost + depreciation (selected material work, laterite subbase : excavate - haul). Open this view, find the row with the same name, and you have the figure to fill in right away

📄 Where the figures come from Taken from pages 362–386 of the road and bridge book 2569, all 12 price sets · The figures in the book are based on 2558 machinery prices, as stated in the table header, not current machinery prices — usable as median prices under the rules, but not the contractor's actual cost
✓ Verified to match the book in every cell The book also prints the totals, so the checkpoint scripts/check-rbmach.js re-extracts the figures from the whole PDF and compares them with what the program stores, all 696 rows, including work groups, subheadings, units and every figure, and compares the totals the program adds up itself with the totals printed in the book, in both the normal and heavy-rainfall columns, and double-checks that no value decreases as the fuel price rises · No discrepancies anywhere

Material haulage table — Section 7

The third chip on the Unit work cost — road & bridge page is Material haulage table, taken from Section 7, Construction material haulage cost table of the same book — 3 truck types × 12 fuel price ranges × distances of 1–200 km, a total of 14,400 figures, the largest dataset in the program

⚠ The figures in the table are not per-kilometer rates They are the total haulage cost for that distance, because they already include loading/unloading costs that do not depend on distance; for example, a 6-wheel truck at a fuel price of 29 THB costs 13.65 THB/t for 1 km, but 15.39 for 2 km, not double · Use whatever value you look up as it is; do not multiply it by the distance again
FieldMeaning
Truck type6-wheel truck · 10-wheel truck · 10-wheel truck with trailer — the book gives a separate table for each · Larger trucks are always cheaper per tonne, but you must choose to suit the site conditions and the material actually being hauled, per the book's provisions
Diesel priceUses the same field as the machinery cost table, because the book divides price ranges the same way; enter it once for both views · The table header also shows the average price at which the book calculated that set
Haul distanceEnter the distance from the material source to the site · The book tabulates whole kilometers, so the program rounds up to match what a reviewer would look up themselves, rather than interpolating between two rows, and states in the description what it was rounded from
Road surface factorThe table at the bottom of the page, used when hauling on roads that are not flat asphalt or concrete surfaced — multiply the actual distance of each stretch by the factor to get an equivalent flat-road distance first, then look up the table above
📐 Beyond 200 km the book changes method The table goes only up to 200 km · For distances of 201–1,000 km the book says to multiply the distance by the per-kilometer rate printed at the end of the table for each range (e.g. a 6-wheel truck at 32 THB/liter costs 3.32 THB/t per kilometer). The program switches method by itself and states in the description field which method was used · Beyond 1,000 km the book sets nothing, so the program does not guess but shows a warning bar that it must be calculated separately
📄 Observations about the book itself The description on the first page of Section 7 says the table covers 25.00–69.99 THB/liter, while the attachment printed right after it says 15.00–50.99 THB/liter, but the tables actually printed cover 29.00–40.99 THB/liter for all three truck sets. The program follows the actual tables, not the descriptions · If you enter a price outside this range, it uses the nearest set and shows a warning bar, rather than extrapolating values itself
🚫 Trailer trucks cannot be used on mountain roads In the mountain-road column for the 10-wheel truck with trailer, the book prints a dash, not a number, meaning trailer trucks are not to be used on mountain roads · The program shows a dash as in the book, and if asked to calculate an equivalent distance for a trailer truck on a mountain road it answers that this is not allowed, rather than treating the factor as zero, which would give a haulage cost equal to a flat road without anyone noticing
✓ Verified to match the book in every cell The checkpoint scripts/check-rbhaul.js re-extracts the figures from the whole PDF and compares all 14,400 figures · It also checks rules that must always hold, such as haulage cost increasing with distance and with fuel price · THB/m³ must equal THB/t times 1.4 · the per-kilometer rate times 200 must be close to the table's value at 200 km · and larger trucks must be cheaper per tonne at every distance in every price range, which would catch it immediately if truck sets were swapped

Rules Part 1 — Sections 1-6, the framework of the whole book

The Rules Part 1 chip on the Unit work cost — road & bridge page opens Part 1 of the book, which is the framework for the whole book — 5 key components · 6 required documents · definitions of the 16 fields of the summary form · calculation methods of 9 and 11 steps

SectionContents
Section 1 OverviewThe rules consist of 5 components — direct cost (Direct Cost) · operating expenses (Indirect Cost, i.e. Factor F) · purchased equipment cost · special expenses per specification · and summarizing into the median price with the report
Section 2 ScopeApplies to projects in the road construction work group and the bridge and box culvert work group · The purpose is to serve as the basis for comparing the prices offered by bidders, under the Government Procurement and Supplies Management Act B.E. 2560
Section 3 Required documentsSix items, usable as a checklist before starting the calculation — drawings and specifications · the designer's preliminary estimate · contract conditions (performance security and advance payment rates) · data current as of the calculation date · details of special expenses · and the report forms
Section 4 Summary form field definitionsThe 16 fields of the median price summary form (Form 4.1), with formulas for the calculated fields · The screen shows the formula against every field that has one, and the checkpoint verifies every field's formula against the figures the program actually computes every time it runs
Section 5 Calculation methodTwo cases — without special expenses, 9 steps, and with special expenses, 11 steps · press the button to switch between them · The final step of both cases is the list of documents to attach to the report
Section 6 Additional provisionsItems that cannot be taken off under the rules shall use the method set by the Reference Price Committee; if none has been set, sound engineering practice may be applied, together with a memo recording the reasons and necessity
📐 The basis for looking up Factor F — the whole project, not each work group Clause 3 of the “Conditions for using the Factor F tables” in all three books says, word for word, “For a construction project contracted as a single contract, the direct cost of the entire construction project shall be totaled to look up Factor F from the relevant Factor F tables” (building W 481 page 180 · road work page 453 · bridge and box culvert work page 473)
The calculation steps of the building book (page 17, items 5–6) and Section 5(1.3) of the road and bridge book likewise say to total the whole project and look it up “from both tables”
So it is one total as the basis, but different F values according to each work group's table — not the total of that work group as the basis
The program's default is Single contract — whole-project total, because it is the only case for which the books state a clear rule · None of the three books states any rule for projects split into separate contracts, but by implication each contract would use its own contract total as the basis, so the option Separate contracts by work group is provided
Switch it in the Factor F comparison basis field on the Project settings page · The number of contracts is a fact the program cannot know; the person entering the data must choose
⚠ Projects saved before this version will show different figures Previous versions looked up Factor F using separate totals per work group, which matches no rule in any of the three books · Old projects reopened will use the whole-project basis by default, which makes the median price lower, because Factor F decreases as direct cost rises, and the overall total can never be less than the total of any single group
In the program's sample project (building 6.64 · road 38.98 · bridge 7.84 · irrigation 28.39 million THB, total 81.86 million THB) the difference is 3,479,003 THB (3.43%)
If that project really is split into separate contracts by work group, switch back to “Separate contracts by work group” and the figures return to exactly what they were, to the baht
Work groupDirect costPer-group basis · FWhole-project basis · F
Building work6,642,1866.6422 million · 1.298281.8559 million · 1.2048
Road work38,979,81138.9798 million · 1.216181.8559 million · 1.1938
Bridge and box culvert work7,843,0677.8431 million · 1.260881.8559 million · 1.1727
Irrigation work28,390,85328.3909 million · 1.251081.8559 million · 1.2053
Median price101,431,72897,952,725
📌 The “Custom Factor F” field cannot substitute for this That field is a single value that overrides every work category, but the whole-project basis gives F values that differ by category, because each category uses a different Factor F table (in the example above, the same basis of 81.8559 million gives 1.2048 / 1.1938 / 1.1727 / 1.2053) · Use that field only when the project has a single work category
✓ Checkpoint — using the book's definitions to check the figures the program computes scripts/check-rbpart1.js does not just check that the text is complete; it takes the field definitions of Section 4 and verifies the formulas field by field against the figures the program actually computes from a test project — cost = work quantity × unit price · reference unit price = unit price × Factor F · total median price = cost × Factor F · TOTAL = sum of the median prices of all items · the sums of the two work groups added together must equal the form total · and the Factor F in the box at the end of the form must be the same value multiplied in the rows
Another layer checks the Factor F comparison basis in both modes to confirm the right basis is really used — in single-contract mode every category must be looked up with the same overall total; in separate-contract mode each must be looked up with its own category total · It also checks that the default is still single contract, and that the overall total equals the sum of the per-category totals
It closes with --from-pdf, which re-extracts from the book and compares 49 clauses · Tested to actually catch faults in all nine scenarios

Bill of construction items — Sections 1-3 and 5

The Bill of construction items chip on the Unit work cost — road & bridge page opens the standard bill of construction items of the road, bridge and box culvert book — 337 lines · 7 work groups · 266 items with a unit of measurement

💡 The most direct benefit — set up BOQ headings with the right names and the right units This bill is the construction item names with the units of measurement specified by the rules, e.g. removal of existing asphalt surface must be measured in m²/SQ.M · removal of an existing concrete bridge in lump sum/L.S. · round pipe dia. 0.60 m in m/M. If your headings match the bill, the reviewer does not have to work out which item you mean, and there is no problem of units not matching what the rules specify
TopicDetails
The seven work groups1 removal of existing road structures (19 lines) · 2 earthwork (20) · 3 subbase and base course (28) · 4 surfacing (32) · 5 structures (22) · 6 miscellaneous work (215) · 7 traffic control and signing during construction (1)
Five levels deepWork groups 7 · subheadings 47 · items 169 · sub-items 83 · third-level sub-items 31 · press a work group chip to see only that group, or scroll through the whole bill in the order the book prints it
How to searchYou can search by Thai name, English name, item number and unit of measurement · words separated by spaces must all be found · searching GRASSING finds the grassing work · searching round pipe 0.60 finds the removal, laying and headwall work for that size
Searches span levelsSub-item names in the book are very short, such as “small size”, which means nothing on its own · The program includes the parent heading names in what is searched, so you can search trees small, and the results show the path of parent headings so you can see what each one sits under
Units of measurement as printedThe book itself prints them inconsistently — tr.m./SQ.M and tr.m./SQ.M. · trm./SQ.M. with a dot dropped · chut/set printed in lower case (Thai abbreviations romanized) · The program keeps every variant as printed and does not normalize them, because if it corrected them, they would no longer match the book when compared
⚠ This bill can be adapted, and you are not required to choose only from it Section 2 states that if the project has items beyond the bill, the reference-price estimator may “improve, reduce, change, amend or add to” it according to the facts in the drawings and specifications · and items in the bill that the construction drawings do not include need not be considered
So the program opens this bill for you to search and copy from; it does not lock you into choosing only from the bill
For work group 7 the book does not list sub-items; it is priced as a lump sum per the details in Section 4, which is in the Unit work cost items chip on the same page
📄 The provisions of Sections 1 · 3 · 5 are in the buttons at the bottom of the tab
  • Section 1 — eleven matters the rules require the reference-price estimator to study and apply · usable as a checklist of whether everything is covered
  • Section 3 — take-off and calculation of work quantities, seventeen clauses on how each type of work is measured, e.g. reinforcing steel in concrete is measured by weight in kilograms, and how sheet piling for soil retaining is to be assessed
  • Section 5 — provisions on prices and sources of construction materials, four clauses: that material price data may be requested from the local highway office · that for rebar and prestressing wire the haul distance is taken from the actual source · and the cement and fuel sources whose names and locations the book specifies
✓ Checkpoint — focused mainly on catching “level errors” This bill is a table of contents five levels deep, so the risk is not wrong figures but sub-items surfacing as headings or headings swallowing the names of sub-items, which look normal at a glance · So scripts/check-rbwbs.js checks that the sequence numbers at every level run forward in order within the same parent · levels deepen only one step at a time · every unit of measurement has the Thai/English slash separator · lines without a unit of measurement must have sub-items beneath them · and item names must not contain another item's sequence number
While writing this checkpoint it caught 9 lines where the English item name was so long it overflowed into the unit-of-measurement column, so words like CONCRETE or TYPE 1) became units · Fixed by deciding from the content, not from position alone
Another special rule is using Section 1 as a coverage checklist — Section 1 says what must be used, so the checkpoint verifies that the program actually has a dataset file for each of those matters; if one day any file goes missing, it reports which clause of the rules is missing
It closes with --from-pdf, which re-extracts from the book and compares 369 lines · Tested to actually catch faults in all ten scenarios

Material quantity tables, SLAB TYPE bridges and box culverts — Sections 9-11

The Material quantity tables chip on the Unit work cost — road & bridge page opens the material quantity tables the book gives as fixed values by size, referencing the STANDARD DRAWINGS FOR HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION, 1994 — 30 bridge types, 870 rows · 48 box culvert sizes, 624 rows · 20 pile lengths · curbs and bridge railings, 23 rows

This page is a lookup table, not a calculation page, because the book already gives the quantities: choose a size and read off the values, with no formulas to work out · So every selector is a button, not a text field, because the book has only the sizes it prints; if you could type freely, users would enter sizes the book does not have and the program would have to guess

Sub-tabContents
SLAB TYPE bridgesChoose from 10 carriageway widths (7.00–17.00 m) and sidewalks of 0.50 / 1.00 / 1.50 m on each side · The table shows all six spans (5.00–10.00 m) at once, as the book prints them, and highlights the selected column · Broken down by every structural part, from abutments, piers, column extensions and tie beams to the deck slab, sidewalks and railing posts
Box culvertsChoose the size, width S × depth D, from 12 sizes (2.10×1.80 to 3.60×3.60 m) and 1–4 cells · The table runs through 13 fill-height ranges (0.00 to 15.00 m) · The columns are split into two groups on different bases — the Rigid Frame barrel is per 10.00 m of culvert length, while the Headwall is per 1 side at 0 degrees skew · The web page shows a bar spanning the columns so you do not add them together directly
PilesRC piles 0.40 × 0.40 m (DWG.NO.MS-02), lengths 6.00–25.00 m in one-meter steps, with concrete, steel and formwork
Curbs, sidewalks, bridge railingsQuantities per 1 side for bridge railings Type I / II / III and for the part of the deck slab that carries the curb or sidewalk
✓ The box culvert tables get a two-way check for free This set of tables is printed in two books: the road and bridge book, pages 422–445, and the combined book, pages 587–610 · The text layer of the road and bridge book has gaps, missing about 460 cells, while the combined book is complete on every page, so the data is read from the combined book and cross-checked against the road and bridge book · All 5,156 cells for which the road and bridge book has complete values match the combined book in every cell, with no conflicts at all — the most tightly verified dataset in this program, and the checkpoint requires the number of matching cells never to decrease
📄 14 cells of the bridge tables were read from the page image On page 410 (carriageway 10.00 m wide, sidewalks 1.00 m on each side) the text layer is missing 14 cells, and unlike the box culverts there is no other book to cross-check against, so the page was rendered as an image and the figures were read directly from the image · Every value obtained is consistent with this page's pattern, where spans 5–6, 7–8 and 9–10 have equal values in pairs · All 14 values are recorded together with which row they belong to; if one day the book's text layer changes so the number of gaps differs, the extractor stops immediately rather than silently filling in shifted positions
⚠ Four points where the book's printing seems self-contradictory The web page shows a warning bar for these every time this page is opened · The program does not correct the book's figures, because amending the rules is not the program's job
  • Page 390 · deck slab carrying a 1.50 m sidewalk, 1 side · concrete, 7.00 m span — the book prints 0.20, which breaks the sequence from 2.16 to 3.44 · every cell in this row is exactly double the row of the upper part, so this cell should probably be 2.74
  • Page 410 · sidewalks and railing posts (2 sides) · concrete, 9.00 m span — the book prints 3.36, which breaks the sequence from 5.64 to 7.04 · this row increases by about 0.69 per span throughout, so this cell should probably be 6.36
  • Page 390 · structural part names — the book prints "sidewalk 1.50 m wide" for two parts, but their values differ by a factor of two, so the first part should probably be 1.00 m
  • Page 390 · concrete, 10.00 m span — the book prints 2..65 with two dots, which cannot be read as a number at all. This is the only place the program fills in a value: it uses 2.65, following the same row of the upper part, which is identical in every cell
📄 Decimals are shown as printed in the book, not rounded to a uniform number of places The book prints varying numbers of decimal places even within one row; for example, the steel row of the Type III bridge railing is 0.129 to three places, but the last cell is 0.2515 to four places · So the extractor takes the number of decimal places of every cell from the text of the book, not from the converted number (which would turn 2.80 into 2.8 and lose the trailing zero) · The web page and the printout both use the same set
✓ Checkpoint scripts/check-rbqty.js checks four layers — the structure must be complete (30 bridge types · 48 box culvert blocks · 20 pile lengths · curbs 2 blocks, 7 parts, 23 rows) · no empty cells · the longer the pile, the more material · the more cells a culvert of the same size has, the more material · every part of the bridge tables must be concrete, steel, formwork, always in that order · the number of cells matching across the two books must not decrease · and it closes with --from-pdf, which re-extracts both books and compares all 11,054 cells · Tested to actually catch faults in all eight scenarios

Printing calculation sheets for attachments

Press Preview & print A4/A3 at the top right of the page to get a calculation sheet for the currently selected item on one page — every material row with quantity, unit price and amount, ending with the total per unit

If that item is linked to a price-database code, a Compared with the price database in use block is appended as well, placing the two values side by side with the verdict under Section 4 on which value to use — so the source of the unit price is all on one sheet, ideal as a supporting document for PR.1, letting the reviewer see which mix components the figure comes from

The page header uses the same project name, logo and estimator details as the other documents (you can set your company's logo; see Page header and logo). At the bottom of the sheet are three signature boxes — estimator, reviewer, and chair of the median price committee

The road, bridge and box culvert page prints all three views

The Unit work cost — road & bridge page has the same button at the top right and prints the sheet for the view currently open, so you get a different kind of sheet depending on the chip selected

View openSheet you get
Unit work cost itemsThe calculation sheet for the selected item, split into sub-parts A, B, C as the book divides them, with a subtotal for each part before the grand total · rows where the handbook asks for the price in THB/t carry a note in brackets in the material name, so you do not mistakenly read it as THB/kg
Machinery cost tableThe full Section 8 table for the fuel price and area zone set, with headers for all 20 work groups, ending with a separate lump-sum costs block, so no one multiplies them by work quantities
Material haulage tableThe Section 7 table for the selected truck and fuel price, distances 1–200 km, printed in two parallel columns to save paper · the last row of the table is the haulage cost actually used for the distance entered · below the table are the method, the rule for distances beyond the table, and the road surface factors for all three truck types
Material quantity tablesThe Section 9-11 table for the sub-tab currently open, exactly one table per sub-tab — the selected bridge type · the selected box culvert size · the whole pile table · or the whole curb table · the box culvert sheet has 10 columns, best on A4 landscape or larger · below the table it notes that the first three columns and the next six are on different bases
💡 Every sheet states its sources Below the table on every sheet is a Sources and provisions used block stating which section and page of the book the figures come from, along with the cautions for that table, such as the haulage figures being the total cost for that distance, not a per-kilometer rate · So the reviewer can trace the sources from one sheet without opening the book
💡 Print blank fill-in forms to fill in by hand For groups 13–15, which leave the quantity fields blank, if you print before filling them in you get a blank form with every material row listed; take it to fill in by hand on site, then come back and type it into the program later
💡 Choose A4 or A3 paper, in portrait or landscape This table has 6 columns, so A4 portrait fits well and is the default · The program remembers the selected size separately for each page; changing it here does not affect other pages · The Print / save PDF button uses the browser's print dialog; choose “Save as PDF” as the destination to get a PDF file without needing a printer
⚠ The starting prices are not yet prices for a median price The program's starting material prices are market estimates for Bangkok and its vicinity, excluding VAT, like the price database on other pages. Before using them for an actual median price, replace them with the Provincial Commerce Office prices as of the calculation date; see section 10 · The water cost of 0.0164 THB/liter and some fixed labour costs come from the handbook itself
📄 Source of the tables Section 7, “Calculation of composite material cost per unit in building construction”, pages 106-174 of the Rules for Calculating Reference Prices of Building Construction 2569 · The full edition can be downloaded at www.gprocurement.go.th · For any construction item that must be priced by the composite material method but has no formula specified, the rules let the person responsible for calculating the median price define one according to the facts, together with a memo setting out the details

12Steel Section Tables · Timber Tables · Aluminium Tables · Stainless Tables

The Steel tables menu is a catalogue of steel section properties — 602 sections in 16 types to TIS and JIS standards. It works two ways: look up values while checking drawings or reviewing a design, and calculate weights to send into the take-off table without opening a separate manufacturer's table.

TypeCountTypeCount
H H-section73Ø Circular steel pipe35
I I-section20FB Flat bar141
C Channel16SB Solid square bar14
CL Lipped channel45SP Sheet pile2
L Equal angle46RB Plain round bar8
□ Square hollow section32DB Deformed bar10
▭ Rectangular hollow section26PL Steel plate · CP Checkered plate41 · 7
CB Castellated beam with circular openings (Cellular Beam)86See Cellular Beam

Section drawings — section · elevation · plan

Select any section in the table (all 16 types) and the program draws it instantly from the table dimensions, following the drafting principles of ISO 128 / ISO 129.

  • Section A–A — shape drawn to true proportion, including the root radius at the flange (r) · 45° steel hatching · x–x and y–y centrelines (long-short dash) through the centroid (channels/angles show the Cy distance) · dimension lines with arrowheads · small thicknesses (t1 t2 t r) use leader lines
  • Elevation — a continuous long member with break lines at the ends · cutting plane A–A with viewing-direction arrows · flange edges as solid lines, inner walls of pipes as dashed lines · deformed bars show their ribs
  • Plan — same scale as the elevation · the hidden web/inner walls shown dashed · round/solid bars look the same in plan as in elevation, so only one view is shown
  • Type-specific — plate/checkered plate: section with the raised pattern, and a plan of the standard 4×8 ft sheet · sheet pile: plan of a wall of 3 interlocking sheets (Interlock) · Cellular Beam: sections at the web post (A–A) and at the opening (B–B); the elevation shows the openings at spacing S

Castellated beam with circular openings — Cellular Beam (CB)

Thailand has no TIS standard specifically for Cellular Beams. Thai fabricators cut them from TIS 1227 H-Beams — the web is cut along two semicircular lines, shifted by half a pitch and welded back together, giving a beam 40–50% deeper at the same weight as, or lighter than, the parent beam, with greater bending stiffness and openings that services can pass through · The CB tab has 86 sections from 43 narrow- to medium-flange parent beams (H 198 to H 900), 2 variants each.

SeriesProportions (h = parent beam depth)Suited to
1.4× expansionDepth 1.4h · opening Ø 0.9h · spacing S = 1.35Ø (wide web posts)Floor beams, medium spans, heavy loads
1.5× expansionDepth 1.5h · opening Ø 1.0h · spacing S = 1.5ØRoof beams, factories, warehouses, long spans, light loads
  • Code CB depth x flange width x Ø, e.g. CB 450x150x300 = depth 450 mm, flange 150 mm, opening Ø300 mm, cut from H 300x150x6.5x9 — proportions follow the SCI P355 / ArcelorMittal ACB guidance (Ø/H 0.6–0.8 · S/Ø 1.25–1.75), dimensions rounded to 5 mm.
  • Columns — opening Ø · spacing S · web post · tee depth T at the opening · weight (openings deducted) · average/gross/net-at-opening area · gross Ix, and Ix / Zx at the opening (used to check bending at the weakest section) · Iy · paint area (openings deducted, opening edges added)
  • Select a row to see the elevation and sections (at the web post · at the opening) with dimensions, and press Add to the steel take-off table just as for any other section — CB codes are already in the section dropdown of the structural steel take-off table.
  • Calculated from the geometry — flanges + web + root radii of the parent beam; the same method reproduces the parent beam's Ix to within 2.5% of the TIS table for every size used · checked with node scripts/check-steel.js (weight must not exceed the parent beam · proportions within range · tee deep enough)
⚠ For cost estimates and preliminary section selection Cellular Beam capacity depends on web-post buckling, shear through the openings and Vierendeel action in the tees — for actual design, have an engineer check against the tables/software of the fabricator you use · cutting-and-welding labour is extra compared with ordinary structural steel; add it as a separate BOQ item if the fabricator charges it separately.

How to use

  1. Choose a type from the chip row

    or type in the search box to search across all types at once — you can search by code, size or type name; e.g. typing 200x100 returns the H, I and hollow sections of that size.

  2. Click a section in the table

    The selected row gets an orange bar on its left, and the weight calculator card above updates to match.

  3. Enter the number of pieces and the length per piece

    The system instantly calculates the total length, total weight and anti-rust paint area.

  4. Press Add to the steel take-off table

    The selected section, with its quantity and length, is sent into the take-off table under Building → the Structural steel tab, and then flows into the BOQ as usual; see section 5.

Structural steel in this project

If the open project has items in the Structural steel tab of the building works, this page shows a Structural steel in this project card above the section-type chip row. Each item shows the section, item name, quantity × length, total length and weight · Click an item to open that section in the table straight away, to view its properties or calculate more · Click the bin button at the top right of an item to delete it; see Deleting structural steel from the project.

Deleting structural steel from the project

  1. Click the bin button

    It sits at the top right of each item in the Structural steel in this project card — normally pale grey, turning red on hover.

  2. Check the item in the pop-up

    The pop-up Delete this structural steel item? shows the section, member name, number of pieces × length, total length and weight · if the same section appears in several rows, it states that only the one row you clicked will be deleted.

  3. Press Delete item

    The row is removed from the structural steel tab of the building works · weight, painting cost, the structural steel cut list and the BOQ prices are recalculated immediately · to keep it, press Cancel.

⚠ Deleted by mistake? Press Undo on the header bar · rows that come from PDF drawings cannot be deleted here Rows sent from measurements on the construction drawings are regenerated every time the measurement list changes, so if you delete them here they come back · clicking the bin on such a row opens an explanatory pop-up with a Go to Drawings button — choose — Not sent — for that measurement and the row disappears by itself (see Sending measurements to the BOQ) · the delete button works only for accounts that can edit the project · you can still delete or edit cell by cell in the Structural steel tab on the Building page as before.
Sample projectItemsStructural steel available to view
Rural highway + bridge5Bridge railing posts and rails · overhead sign gantry (posts, spanning beam, bracing)
8-storey office building6Machine-room/roof-deck roof frame, rafters, purlins, bracing · entrance canopy frame and posts
Warehouse zone B28Rigid-frame (Portal) columns and beams, 20 m span · trusses, rafters, purlins, bracing, girts · loading-dock canopy posts
Irrigation canal improvement5Inspection walkway bridge · sluice gate lifting frame · guardrails · trash rack frame
2-storey house5Gable roof rafters and wall plates · purlins · bracing · carport roof frame

Structural steel cut list (Steel Cut List)

Below the Structural steel in this project card is the Structural steel cut list card — it gathers the pieces from every structural steel row in the project by section, then plans the cutting from full stock lengths so that you order as little as possible and leave the least waste, using the same cutting optimizer as the rebar cut list (section 5).

  1. Set the full stock lengths

    There are two boxes, one per steel family; you can enter several values separated by commas, e.g. 6, 12 · enter what your supplier sells, and the system picks the length that leaves the least waste for each cutting pattern.

  2. Set the kerf and the offcuts to keep

    Kerf per cut to suit the cutting machine (band saw/cut-off wheel 2–3 mm) · Keep offcuts from — offcuts shorter than this count as scrap.

  3. Read the summary figures and the per-section table

    Full lengths to order · ordered weight versus weight actually used · % scrap · savings compared with unplanned cutting · each section shows the pieces required (quantity × length), how many bars of which length to order, and the welded joints.

  4. Click a section row to see the cutting patterns

    Each pattern shows how many bars to cut, the cut positions, the remaining offcut and labels showing which row each piece belongs to (S1 S2 … in row order of the structural steel table), with a bar of cut positions drawn to true proportion.

  5. Press Preview & print cut sheet

    You get a structural steel cut sheet for every section, with cut-position bars, for the site crew · the print button at the top of the page still prints the section table as before.

Steel familyDefault full stock lengthNotes
Hot-rolled H · I · C (channel) · L (angle) · sheet pile6, 12 mBox Hot-rolled H · I · C · L
Hollow sections □ ▭ · circular pipe · lipped channel · flat bar · solid square bar6 mBox Tubes · pipes · lipped channels · flats
RB · DB bars in the structural steel table10, 12 mAlways use these defaults
Steel plate · checkered plate—Not cut from bars, so not in the cut list (a note under the card says so)
⚠ Pieces longer than a full stock length are joined by welding If a required piece is longer than the longest full stock length, the system welds full lengths together (no lap), cuts only the last piece, and counts the number of joints for you · always check the joint details with the engineer first · if you don't want joints, enter a length that is long enough, e.g. 6, 12, if your supplier sells it.
💡 Example from the 2-storey house Hollow section □ 100x100x3.2 needs 16 pieces × 6.50 m and 8 pieces × 11.00 m · with stock length 6 m → order 33 bars, 24 welded joints, 1.5% scrap · with 6, 12 m → order 24 bars of 12 m, no welded joints, but more steel is used — choose to suit the site · angle L 50x50x4, 20 pieces × 2.20 m, comes from just 4 bars of 12 m.

Values in the table

ColumnMeaning
H · B · D · AOutside dimensions of the section, in millimetres
t · t1 · t2Thickness — t1 web, t2 flange · sections of uniform thickness use a single t
rRoot radius between web and flange
Weight (kg/m)The value used to calculate actual quantities — multiply by total length to get the steel weight
Section area (cm²)Used for design checks, and also to cross-check the weight — area × 0.785 must equal the weight
Ix · Iy (cm⁴)Moment of inertia about the x and y axes — used to calculate deflection
ix · iy (cm)Radius of gyration — used to find the slenderness ratio of columns and braces
Zx · Zy (cm³)Section modulus — used to check bending stress
Paint area (m²/m)Perimeter surface area per 1 metre of length, used to calculate anti-rust painting
💡 Paint area comes from geometry, not from the manufacturer's table Manufacturers' tables do not give surface area, so the system calculates it — open sections (H, I, channel, angle, lipped channel) are taken as 2 × the developed length, while closed sections (hollow sections, pipes) use the outside perimeter · this value does not yet include joint areas and splice plates; if the job has many connections, add an allowance.

Steel plate and checkered plate

These two types are sold by the sheet, not by the metre, so the card switches to a table of weight per sheet for standard sizes — steel plate in feet (3x6 to 6x40 ft), checkered plate in millimetres (914x1829 to 1524x6096 mm).

Because they are area-based products, they are not added to the dropdown of the length-based take-off table · round bars and deformed bars are not added either, because they already have their own Rebar schedule tab.

The section dropdown on the Building page grows too

Every length-based section has been added to the Section (TIS 1227) box of the structural steel tab, so the list grows from 34 to 451 sections · a dropdown this long gets a search box automatically — type H 400 or angle and pick.

Printing the section table for reference

Press Preview & print A4/A3 at the top right to get the section property table of the type currently open, with every column as shown on screen — size, thickness, weight per metre, section area, moment of inertia, radius of gyration, section modulus and paint area.

The end of the table also summarises the weight calculation from the card above, e.g. H 100x100x6x8 · 1 piece × 6.00 m = 6.00 m · total weight 103 kg if you entered the number of pieces and length before printing.

💡 This table defaults to A3 landscape H-sections have as many as 16 columns, which are unreadable on A4 portrait, so the program defaults this page to A3 landscape — unlike other pages, which default to A4 portrait · you can change the size, and the program remembers it for this page only, without changing other pages.
💡 Print only your search results If you have typed a search term in the search box, the document prints only the cross-type search results as a condensed 6-column table — code, type, size, weight per metre, section area and paint area — useful for a comparison sheet of just the group you are interested in, e.g. search 150 and print.
⚠ I-section weights in earlier versions were wrong, and have been fixed The old section table put the H-section weights in the I-section rows, making them 18–24% too low. This version corrects them to match the TIS 1227 table — I 150x75 14.0 → 17.1 · I 200x100 21.3 → 26.0 · I 250x125 29.6 → 38.3 · I 300x150 36.7 → 48.3 kg/m, and hollow section ▭ 100x50x3.2 6.92 → 7.01 · Older projects that use these sections will show higher weights and costs, as they should — open the project and re-check the totals before submitting a price.
⚠ The weight of hollow section ▭ 150x50x6.3 used to be too high, and has been fixed The old table gave a weight of 18.77 kg/m, which is 4.5% too high · the section area of 22.84 cm² × 0.785 gives 17.93 kg/m, while 18.77 would need an area of 23.91 cm², which is more than a perfectly sharp-cornered section (23.61) — so it is impossible · Older projects that use this section will show weights and costs 4.5% lower, the opposite direction to the I-section fix above — open the project and re-check the totals before submitting a price.

All 602 sections are checked with physics formulas

The values in the section table are not independent of one another; they are linked by formulas. If any cell has a typo, it immediately contradicts the other cells in the same row, so the program checks every section with these formulas.

FormulaWhat it checks
Weight = section area × 0.785Steel has a density of 7.85 g/cm³, so weight per metre is always tied to section area
Radius of gyration i = √(I ÷ A)Checks ix and iy against the moment of inertia and area in the same row
Section modulus Zx = Ix ÷ (H/2)Applies to doubly symmetric sections such as H, I, hollow sections and circular pipes
Steel plate = thickness (mm) × 7.85Weight per square metre of flat plate
💡 Values that look wrong but are correct Checkered plate is consistently 1.67 kg/m² heavier than flat plate of the same thickness at every thickness — that is the weight of the standard raised pattern, not an error · and cells that the source rounded to whole numbers, e.g. Zy = 13 where the formula gives 13.33, are normal rounding and were left unchanged.
📄 Data sources and corrected values Taken from steel manufacturers' tables referencing TIS 1227-2539 (hot-rolled structural steel sections) · TIS 107-2561 (hollow sections and pipes) · TIS 55-2559 (flat and square bars) · TIS 20/24-2559 (reinforcing bars), cross-referenced with JIS G3192 · G3350 · G3101 · A5528 · the source tables contain 24 typos; only those whose correct value can be back-calculated from other figures in the same table were fixed, and the rest are kept as published — press the Corrected from source button at the top of the page to see the full list with the reason for each one.

Timber tables — timber sizes, species and plywood to Thai standards

The Timber tables menu (next to Steel tables) works the same way as the steel tables — choose a category, choose a species, click a size row to see the section drawing and values, then send it into the take-off table · The timber sizes are the same set as the dropdown in the timber works tab, so there is no size you can pick in one place but cannot find in the other.

CategoryContents
Thai timber, inch sizes (25)Nominal trade sizes 1×2 to 8×8 in · choose hardwood (Teng, Rang, Daeng, Takhian) or medium hardwood (teak, treated Yang, Tabaek) · actual planed size = nominal − 6.4 mm (¼ in) per side · volume in ft³ is calculated from the nominal size, as actually traded
Imported pine MGP (12)Actual sizes in mm to AS 1684 (e.g. 35×90 · 45×140), H3 treated · measured in ft³
Glulam / LVL (8)Manufacturers' standard sizes · choose Glulam (GL24h–GL32h) or LVL/CLT · measured in m³
Species · stresses (5)Density · bending, shear and compression-parallel-to-grain stresses (kg/cm²) · E · durability · uses · price codes (STR-255 – STR-259) · references
Plywood / OSB (13)Rubberwood plywood 4–20 mm · structural/Marine plywood 12–21 mm · OSB 9–18 mm · 1.22 × 2.44 m sheets · weight per sheet · code STR-262 (m²)
  1. Choose the category and species

    The species chips change the density and stresses used to calculate the weight and allowable moment of every row · the search box searches across categories, e.g. 2×4 · OSB · Teng

  2. Click a size row

    The detail card shows the section drawing (dashed = nominal size · wood = actual size), an elevation of a sample 4 m piece, and the values A · Ix · Sx · allowable M (Fb × Sx) · ft³/m · m/ft³ · kg/m · the line Used as a default in timber works tells you which member of the timber work types uses this size as its default (e.g. 2×6 in = rafters of the timber roof frame)

  3. Enter the number of pieces × length

    You get the volume (ft³ / m³) and total weight instantly.

  4. Press Add to timber works (single pieces)

    Adds a Single timber pieces (choose size × length) row in the Timber works tab with the species, size, length and quantity — BOQ volume = volume × (1 + waste allowance for the species), charged to that species' code.

⚠ Stresses are approximate values by timber group Use them only for preliminary checks and size selection; real values depend on species, moisture content, defects and grade — design must use values from DPT 1201 / test results or manufacturer values (Glulam · LVL), checked by an engineer · plywood and OSB are not sent as single-piece rows; calculate them as area in the timber work types (sheathing box) or in the relevant table.

Aluminium tables — sections, alloys, finishes, sheets and glass

The Aluminium tables menu (next to Timber tables) works the same way as the steel tables — choose a category, choose the alloy and finish, click a row to see the section drawing and values, then send it into the take-off table · Sections, finishes, sheets and glass are the same set as the dropdowns in the aluminium works tab, and the kg/m in the table equals what the BOQ actually charges (ρ 2.70 · frames/sashes including glazing pockets and fins ×1.25 · louvre blades/fins ×1.2)

CategoryContents
Door and window profiles (10)Frames 1"×3" to 2½"×8" (frame · vertical Mullion · horizontal Transom) · sashes 1"×2½" to 1½"×4" — Thai market sizes in inches · section drawings show the glazing pocket
Box · round tube (10)Box 1"×1" to 4"×4" · round tube Ø1"–2" — sub-frames, guardrails, posts
Angle · U-channel · flat bar · fins (11)Equal angle · U-channel · flat bar · Z 75 louvre blade · sun-shading fins 150–300 mm
Alloys (6)6063-T5 (default) · 6063-T6 · 6005-T5 · 6061-T6 for profiles · 3003-H14 · 5052-H32 for sheet — Fy · Fu · E · allowable bending stress Fy/1.65
Finishes (5)Anodized · powder coat · PVDF · wood grain · mill finish — coating thickness · profile price codes ARC-185 / 186 / 187 (kg)
Aluminium sheet · ACP (10)Flat sheet 1–6 mm (ARC-195 · kg) · ACP 3 / 4 mm (ARC-194 · m²) · 1.22 × 2.44 m sheets · kg/m² · kg/sheet
Glass (4)Clear glass 6 mm · tempered 8–10 mm (TIS 965) · laminated (TIS 1222) · IGU Low-E — kg/m² · price codes ARC-188 – 191
  1. Choose the category, alloy and finish

    The alloy chips change the allowable moment of every section (6061-T6 carries about 2 times more than 6063-T5) · the finish chips set the price code sent to the BOQ · the search box searches across categories, e.g. 1"×4" · fin · tempered

  2. Click a section row

    The detail card shows the section drawing with dimensions, an elevation of a standard 6.00 m bar (coloured by the chosen finish) and the values A · Ix · Sx · allowable M · kg/m · kg/bar · perimeter surface · the line Used as a default in aluminium works tells you which member uses this section as its default (e.g. frame 1¾"×4" = sliding door frame · Storefront mullion)

  3. Enter the number of pieces × length

    You get the total length, weight, the approximate number of 6 m bars to buy (excluding cutting waste) and the kg the BOQ will charge (+5% waste allowance).

  4. Press Add to aluminium works (single pieces)

    Adds a Single pieces (choose section × length) row in the Aluminium works tab with the section, length, quantity and chosen finish · in the sheet category, press Add to aluminium works (sheet) to get an Aluminium sheet row of 2.44 × 1.22 m by number of sheets.

⚠ Section properties are calculated from simplified shapes Real profiles have grooves, fins and internal walls according to each manufacturer's die — A · Ix · Sx in the table are calculated from an equivalent box, for preliminary sizing and cost estimating · design for wind load (Mullions · guardrails) must use values from the manufacturer's catalogue, checked by an engineer · ACP and glass are not sent as single rows; calculate them through the work types (ACP wall · glazed panel of that work type).

Stainless tables — tubes, bars, sheets, grades, finishes and balustrade glass

The Stainless tables menu (next to Aluminium tables) works the same way as the steel tables — choose a category, choose the grade and finish, click a row to see the section drawing and values, then send it into the take-off table · Sections, grades, finishes, sheets and glass are the same set as the dropdowns in the stainless works tab, and kg/m is calculated with the density of the chosen grade, equal to what the BOQ actually charges (304 = 7.93 · 316L = 7.98 · 201 = 7.80 · 430 = 7.70 · 2205 = 7.80 g/cm³)

CategoryContents
Round tube (15)ؽ" to 4½", Thai market sizes (some in 2 wall thicknesses) + Ø42.4 × 2.0 (EN handrail) — handrails, balustrade posts, balusters, flagpoles (ASTM A554 / JIS G3446)
Square tube · rectangular tube (12)□19 to □100 · ▭20×40 to ▭50×150 — door frames, fences, table frames, canopies
Round bar · flat bar · angle (17)Solid round bar Ø6–25 · flat bar 20×3 to 75×6 · angle 25–50 (ASTM A276)
Stainless grades (5)SUS304 (default) · SUS316L · SUS201 · SUS430 · Duplex 2205 — composition, density, Fy · Fu · E · magnetic or not · price codes tube ARC-170–174 / sheet ARC-175–177
Finishes (5)Hairline · No.4 · 2B/BA (included in the price per kg) · Mirror No.8 (ARC-178) · coloured PVD (ARC-179) — the last two are charged extra by surface area
Stainless sheet (12)Thickness 0.5–10 mm · 1.22 × 2.44 m sheets · kg/m² and kg/sheet by grade
Balustrade glass (2)Tempered laminated 6+6 (ARC-180) · 8+8 / 10+10 (ARC-181) — TIS 965 · TIS 1222
  1. Choose the category, grade and finish

    The grade chips change the weight per metre, the allowable moment (0.6 Fy) and the price code · the Mirror / PVD finish chips add the special surface area to the result · the search box searches across categories, e.g. Ø2" · flat bar · 316L

  2. Click a section row

    The detail card shows the section drawing with dimensions, an elevation of a standard 6.00 m bar (colour and texture by finish) and the values A · Ix · Sx · allowable M · kg/m · kg/bar · perimeter surface · the line Used as a default in stainless works tells you which member uses this section as its default (e.g. round tube Ø2" = handrail of the guardrail)

  3. Enter the number of pieces × length

    You get the total length, weight, the approximate number of 6 m bars (excluding cutting waste), the kg the BOQ will charge (+5% waste allowance) and the special surface area when Mirror / PVD is chosen.

  4. Press Add to stainless works (single pieces)

    Adds a Single pieces (choose section × length) row in the Stainless works tab with the section, length, quantity, grade and chosen finish · in the sheet category, press Add to stainless works (sheet) to get a Stainless sheet row of 2.44 × 1.22 m by number of sheets.

⚠ Strength values are minimums for annealed material Decorative tubing (ASTM A554) is not made to carry structural loads — the allowable M in the table is for preliminary sizing; guardrails must be checked for the barrier load for the building use (e.g. BS 6180 · IBC 1607.8) and checked by an engineer · the corner radii of square tubes are not deducted (weight slightly higher than actual, same as the BOQ calculates) · balustrade glass is not sent as a single row; calculate it through the glass balustrade/canopy work types.

Timber, aluminium and stainless cut lists, and printing

The Timber tables, Aluminium tables and Stainless tables pages have three parts, just like the steel tables page — all calculated from every row in that work tab of the building works (no re-entry needed), and recalculated immediately when you edit a row.

PartWhat it does
Preview & print A4/A3 (top right)Prints the table of the category currently open with the same columns as on screen (default A4 landscape) · if you have typed a search term, it prints the search results · the end of the table summarises the card calculation (quantity × length → volume/weight) and the chosen grade/finish/species
… works in this projectA card for every row in the timber / aluminium / stainless works tab, with the number of sets and quantity · click a card to open that row's main section in the table · click the bin to delete the row (asks for confirmation first · can be undone with Ctrl+Z)
… cut list · Cut ListGathers every piece from every row, groups them by section (timber: + species · aluminium: + finish · stainless: + grade), then plans the cutting from full stock lengths with the same optimizer as for structural steel, so you order as little and waste as little as possible · shows the number of bars to order by length, the volume (timber, ft³) or weight (kg) ordered versus used, the scrap percentage and the savings compared with unplanned cutting · click a section row to see the cutting patterns with cut-position bars drawn to true proportion
Preview & print cut sheetCut sheet for the site crew — per section: the pieces required with labels (W1 W2 … timber · A1 … aluminium · X1 … stainless = row n in the work tab), then each cutting pattern × number of bars, cut positions, offcuts and the labels produced
Settings (stored per project)TimberAluminiumStainless
Full stock length (m)Thai inch-size timber 3, 4, 5, 6 · imported pine MGP 3.6, 4.8, 6 · Glulam/LVL 6, 9, 1266
Kerf per cut3 mm3 mm2 mm
Keep offcuts from0.30 m0.30 m0.30 m
Pieces longer than a full stock lengthButt-jointed over a supportJoined with a connector (Splice sleeve)TIG-welded and polished
💡 What is not in the cut list Timber without a piece count (battens/purlins measured as continuous length) uses the total length as one piece, butt-jointed at full stock lengths · paired (sandwich) members count as 2 pieces · plywood/floor boards · aluminium sheet/ACP · stainless sheet are area-based, not cut from bars, so they are listed as “Not in the cut list” below the cutting patterns · BOQ quantities are still calculated from the work tabs as before (including each row's waste allowance) — the cut list is for ordering and cutting on site; always check against the drawings before actually cutting.

13Factor F

Factor F is the multiplier that converts the direct cost (PR.1) into the construction cost (PR.1 Kor), bundling overheads, loan interest and profit together.

PR.1 direct cost × Factor F = PR.1 (Kor) construction cost → plus equipment purchases (PR.2 Kor) and special expenses (PR.3) = PR.4 median price
  • The system automatically selects the table row based on each work group's direct cost, then interpolates linearly between the two rows that bracket it.
  • There are separate tables for 4 categories — building · highway · bridge and box culvert · irrigation; each category gets its own Factor F.
  • The variables that change the table column are the advance payment rate, the retention and the heavy-rainfall zone, set on the project settings page.
  • The table sources differ by category — building works use circular W 481 dated 26 June 2569, with 6% per year loan interest · highway, bridge and box culvert and irrigation works use the 2569 handbook of criteria for calculating median prices for highway, bridge and box culvert construction, with 7% per year loan interest — the irrigation tables are bound into this same handbook · VAT 7% for every category
  • Heavy-rainfall zones apply to highway and irrigation works (these two categories have Rain 1 and Rain 2 columns in their tables, while building and bridge works do not) — the criteria are based on an average annual rainfall of 1,600 millimetres or more; provinces with average rainfall continuing for 1 month are Rain 1, and more than 1 month Rain 2
⚠ The highway, bridge and irrigation tables have changed (updated 21 Sep 2569) The program used to use the old tables for these three categories · it now uses the tables from the 2569 criteria handbook. Values rose in almost every cell, by at most +0.0038 in highway · +0.0028 in bridge · +0.0053 in irrigation works (Rain 2 column). For the 103 M THB sample highway project the median price moves by about 145,000 THB (+0.14%) and for the 89 M THB sample irrigation project by about 192,000 THB (+0.22%) · Older projects that are reopened are calculated with the new tables immediately — if you need to confirm a total you already submitted, refer to the files you issued at that time instead.

Where the Factor F values come from — clause 12 of the highway, bridge and box culvert handbook

The Factor F page used to tell you only what the Factor F value was, but not why it is that number · clause 12 of the handbook prints the breakdown in four columns side by side: overheads · interest · profit · total expenses, every cell as a percentage — all 1,392 rows have now been extracted (3 work groups × 12 tables) and are shown in the Factor F breakdown card at the bottom of that page.

💡 The most direct benefit of this card — avoiding double counting The costs in that list are already included in Factor F, so they cannot be added again as direct costs, e.g. contract guarantee fees · stamp duty · site offices and workers' quarters · supervision vehicles with fuel and maintenance · salaries of the project manager, engineers, foremen and safety officers · and construction insurance premiums · press the View clause 12 details button to open the full list.
What was addedContents
Factor F breakdownThe four columns for the cost range the project falls in, also converted into money from the actual direct cost of that category · if the cost lies between ranges, it interpolates using the formula in clause 12.5(2), just as the program does for the Factor F value
Heavy-rainfall zone warningClause 12.4 fixes a list of 22 provinces (14 in Rain 1 · 8 in Rain 2) · the program reads the province name from the project location and compares; if it does not match the setting, a warning appears · it does not change the setting for you, because the construction site may be in a different province from the office address
Items that make up Factor FClause 12.2 (highway) and 12.7 (bridge) · the same four main categories, differing in the list of personnel in category 1.3 — highway lists 6 positions, bridge lists 10 · together with the handbook's interest formula and the meaning of every variable
Rules for using the tablesClause 12.5 (highway, 10 rules) and 12.8 (bridge, 8 rules) · including the interpolation formula for Factor F between ranges, and the case of tax-exempt loans, where the Factor excl. VAT column is used instead
Worked examples with printed answersThree examples from clauses 12.5 and 12.8 with their answers · usable directly as a test set for the program's Factor F tables, and every one matches
✓ A free checker for the Factor F tables These four columns are tied to the Factor F value by pure arithmetic — total expenses = overheads + interest + profit · Factor excl. VAT = 1 + total expenses ÷ 100 · Factor F = Factor excl. VAT × VAT factor
So extracting this set = getting a checker for the Factor F tables inside the calculation engine, a file that must not be edited and that never had a source to check against before · all 2,784 cells were checked, 2,782 match — the remaining two are a row where the handbook contradicts itself (irrigation, 0% advance, 5% retention, 700 M THB range: the total expenses cell does not equal the sum of the three cells to its left), recorded as a quirk of the handbook, not an error in the program
✓ One error found in the program's table — fixed Irrigation construction · 0% advance, 0% retention · cost 290 M THB — page 491 of the handbook prints Factor F as 1.1667, but the program's table had 1.1666
1.1666 is the value of the “interest” column, which is constant in every row of that table, so it was a value picked from the neighbouring column and put in one wrong row, not a rounding issue · the whole Factor F column of that table has been checked: 27 of 28 rows match the handbook, only this one row differs
The handbook itself confirms 1.1667 both from the total expenses cell (9.0464 → 1.0904) and from multiplying by VAT (1.0904 × 1.07 = 1.166728, which gives 1.1667 whether truncated or rounded)
The calculation engine was corrected to match the handbook on 22 Sep 2569 — at a direct cost of 290 M THB the difference amounts to about 29,000 THB · none of the 5 sample projects falls in this range, so their totals do not change
The Factor F tables in the calculation engine now have no remaining differences from the handbook at all · the check gate verifies every cell on every run; if anyone reverts it or changes it to another value, it flags it immediately (tested to catch both reverting to 1.1666 and entering 1.1668)
📄 Interest can genuinely be negative — it is not an error Tables with a 15% advance payment have rows where the interest is negative — because the contractor receives money before actually paying out, no loan is needed, and the interest becomes negative under formula I in clause 12.2 · highway has 2 such rows, irrigation 19 · on the first extraction the extractor dropped the negative numbers from the whole column, because it did not allow for the minus sign; this was caught because the row sums did not add up
⚠ Two places where the printed handbook seems to contradict itself
  • Irrigation table 0%/5%, 700 M THB range — the total expenses cell prints 8.4366, but the three cells to its left add up to 8.4866, and the Factor excl. VAT cell of the same row is 1.0848, which comes from 8.4866 · an 8 misprinted as a 3 · the Factor F value the program uses is not calculated from this cell, so results are not affected
  • Clause 12.8, example at the end of item 8 — it sits under the heading on using the bridge and box culvert tables, but the text says “in this case use the Factor F table for building construction”, which contradicts both the heading and the example's own answers (1.0724 and 1.1475 come from the bridge table · using the building table gives 1.1010 and 1.1780, different answers) · following the text literally gives a Factor F from the wrong category
✓ Check gate scripts/check-ff12.js checks five layers — the structure must have all 3 work groups × 12 tables · every row must add up · profit must be one of the five steps set by clause 12.2 (3.5 / 4.0 / 4.5 / 5.0 / 5.5) · total expenses must fall as the cost rises, which is why the Factor F curve slopes downward · every cell is checked against the Factor F tables in the calculation engine, with known differences pinned and not allowed to grow · the handbook's worked examples must give the same answers · and finally --from-pdf re-extracts from the book and compares all 5,568 cells · tested to catch all nine kinds of corruption
The gate also checks every copied line of text against the handbook page, because the prose sections were not machine-extracted, so the risk is a typo while copying, which nothing else would flag — during the work it caught one line that had been paraphrased rather than copied verbatim

Equipment purchases and special expenses — clauses 13 and 14 of the highway, bridge and box culvert handbook

The last two clauses of the handbook cover part 3 of the construction cost, which is not multiplied by Factor F — clause 13, equipment purchases, to be calculated “at the manufacturer's or distributor's price” · clause 14, special expenses under the specifications, has four steps, and step 4 states plainly that they are added to the median price summary form (BOQ) “without including Factor F”

✓ The program already follows this clause, and now has a gate guarding it Both equipment purchases and special expenses have been added to the median price without multiplying by Factor F from the start · the gate for this clause tests the actual calculation engine, not by reading the code — it adds 1,000,000 THB of special expenses, and the median price must move by exactly 1,000,000 THB; if one day someone accidentally multiplies it by Factor F, the gate flags it immediately
Form in the highway-bridge handbookIn the program
4.3 Summary of special expenses under the specificationsThe PR.3 table on the price summary page · all items are totalled into one figure sent into the median price
4.4 Calculation and justification formA calculation sheet for each item · once you fill in calculation lines, the item total comes from the calculation sheet, not from a typed figure, so the two documents cannot contradict each other · includes a Reason and justification box as required by clause 14(2)
4.5 Calculation form for providing accommodation and facilities for the supervisorA table of 15 items with unit prices printed in the handbook for 13 items — office 1,155,600 · canteen-kitchen 578,600 · 1-bedroom house 327,600 · 2-bedroom house 462,400 · row-house quarters 207,200/room · asphalt laboratory 206,100 · room rental 3,500 THB/month · materials testing equipment 3,000 · asphalt testing equipment 6,500 · computer 2,000 · survey equipment 4,500 · water-power-telephone 8,000 · pickup truck 920 THB/day · off by default; switch it on yourself when the contract has this condition
4.6 Summary of material data and handling costsA table of 20 items · material cost, haul distance, haulage cost, loading/unloading, steel cutting/bending, then totalled into the unit price of that material
⚠ Three fixes found while writing this gate (updated 22 Sep 2569) These two forms were built earlier but had no gate guarding them, so nothing could tell whether they still matched the handbook
  • Form 4.6 was missing 7 lines — the handbook has 20 lines, but the program had 13; the missing ones were concrete sand · laterite subbase material · selected material “A” · selected material “B” · embankment sand fill · embankment soil fill · and the “others, specify” line All added · projects saved earlier get the missing lines back when opened, without touching the figures already entered
  • Two items in form 4.5 were under-calculated — the handbook charges room rental at 3,500 THB/month and pickup truck provision at 920 THB/day, i.e. per-period rates that must be multiplied by the duration, but the program multiplied only by the number of rooms and vehicles, which amounted to one month and one day · a Periods column has been added to the table; these two rows now calculate quantity × periods × rate, while the other rows are unchanged (for items 8–12 and 14 the handbook already puts the months in the quantity column)
  • Table 4.6 never showed any rows — the variable name that sent the data to the screen was the same as that of the material price comparison table on the take-off page, so one table got the other table's data and showed it as blanks · renamed, and both tables now display correctly
📄 The handbook states the computer rental rate in two places, so they can be checked against each other The form 4.5 table prints the computer rental as 2,000 THB per month, and note 2 of the same form says “estimate the provision cost as a rental at 2,000 THB per month per set” · the gate checks the two against each other, and if they ever differ it flags it
✓ Check gate scripts/check-rbspec.js checks seven layers — form 4.5 must have 15 items whose names, drawing numbers, units, quantities and unit prices match the handbook · the two items that are per-period rates must be multiplied by the actual duration · form 4.6 must have 20 items with units matching the handbook (the first nine in THB/t, the rest in THB/m³) · the computer rental rate must match the note · clause 14(4) is tested on the actual calculation engine · clause 13: VAT must be in a separate column, not mixed into the equipment price · SHA-256 fingerprint · and finally --from-pdf re-extracts from the book and compares every line, including checking that the text “without including Factor F” is still in the handbook · tested to catch all ten kinds of corruption
💡 Private mode calculates differently Press the Private button on the header bar and the system stops using the Factor F tables and switches to a Mark-up from the overheads, profit and contingency you set yourself instead — suited to private-sector work that does not need to follow the government tables

14Price summary and file export

The Summary — PR. forms menu shows the government forms one after another in the order set by the B.E. 2569 criteria, with the grand total and the price per square meter · Purchased equipment and special costs per specification can be entered as line items on this page

FormContents
PR.1Bill of quantities and prices — direct cost · one set per work or work group
PR.1 (A)Construction cost summary, direct cost — the cover sheet of PR.1 · direct cost × Factor F, with the box of conditions for using the Factor F table
4.5 · 4.6Forms of the road, bridge and box culvert set — accommodation and equipment for the works supervisor (15 items with the prices given in the set) and the summary of material data and operating costs (20 items); see section 13
PR.2Bill of quantities and prices — purchased equipment · manufacturer's or distributor's price, excluding VAT, with installation cost kept separate from the equipment price
PR.2 (A)Purchased equipment summary — adds VAT on the equipment cost and on the installation cost in separate columns
PR.3Bill of quantities and prices — special costs per specification (if any)
Calculation sheet etc.Calculation and justification sheet for special costs per specification — the announcement gives it no form number, so the top-right corner reads "Page ..../...."
PR.4Median price summary for building construction — totals the construction cost of every part, with the amount in words

The PR.1 table on this page shows the total of each category. Press the ▸ button in front of a category name (or Expand all sections in the table header) to expand the BOQ items of that category, plus the sub-items from the actual quantity take-off under each item; see Sub-items

Road, bridge and box culvert works, and irrigation works

The B.E. 2569 announcement gives no “PR.” number to these two categories — the numbers PR.1 to PR.4 are used only for building construction. The program therefore names them by their full titles in the announcement, and prints the forms of a category only when the project actually has work in that category

Unlike building works, Factor F is applied line by line, not per work group, and the multiplier column is titled “Factor F or VAT”, because purchased equipment items use (1 + VAT) instead of Factor F · Road works have two separate F values: one for road works and one for bridge–box culvert works

FormContents
4.1Median price summary for road, bridge and box culvert construction — printed on A4 landscape, closing with a box of direct-cost totals split into road/bridge, equipment, special costs, and both Factor F values
4.3 / 4.4Summary of special costs per specification, and the calculation and justification sheet — same layout as for building works
4.5Calculation form for when the contract requires the contractor to provide accommodation and facilities — 15 items with the default prices from the announcement; off by default. You must switch it on yourself on the road works card, because if it were on for every project this form would be attached without being asked for
4.6Summary of material data and operating costs — 13 materials, with columns for material cost, haul distance, haulage cost, loading/unloading cost, and rebar cutting/bending cost · Rows left blank are not printed
IrrigationMedian price summary for irrigation construction (columns 1–7), with the amount-in-words line

The 6 specialized calculation forms for irrigation works

On the PR.3 card, press Calculation & justification and choose one of 6 calculation forms — vehicles · computer/scanner/camera/projector · laser printer · inkjet printer · internet + LAN · photocopier

Once chosen, the amount of that item comes from the calculator instead of the figure you typed. Every form works as THB/month → divide by 30 → THB/day → multiply by the period of use, and uses Straight Line depreciation (P − L) ÷ N

Good to know — in the vehicle form, the announcement prints reference letters in the formula that contradict the units the announcement itself specifies on 2 lines: fuel cost and lubricant cost. The program calculates with the correct units and always prints the original wording beneath that line on the form, so reviewers can see where and why it differs from the announcement

Letterhead and logo on printed documents

Every page printed from Preview & print A4/A3 uses the same letterhead — the logo on the left, the project name and details in the middle, and the company information on the right. Both the logo and the company information come from the User profile: set them once and they appear on every document of that project

  1. Open the User profile

    Press the user-name card at the very bottom of the left menu to open the Edit user profile window

  2. Press the circular picture to attach your company logo

    Choose an image file of no more than 1.4 MB · The system shrinks it to a 256-pixel square on a white background without cropping the logo · If you attached the wrong one, press Remove photo

  3. Fill in the company information

    Full name · Company · Company address · Phone · Email · Tax ID · Head office/branch no.

  4. Press Save

    Open Preview & print on any page and the letterhead changes to yours immediately

Field in the User profileWhere it appears on the letterhead
Profile picture (logo)Left corner, at a fixed size whether the original image is wide or tall
Full nameThe details line under the project name, after “Estimator”
CompanyFirst line on the right, in bold
Company addressUnder the company name
Phone · EmailOn the same line, separated by a dot
Tax ID · BranchBottom line on the right — if no tax ID is entered, this line does not appear

The text on the right is right-aligned on every line, while the project name is left-aligned next to the logo · Long text is wrapped so that the lines are of similar length, with no single word left dangling on the last line · Fields left blank do not appear on the letterhead

⚠ The User profile is stored with the project The logo and company information are saved in the project file that is currently open · New projects and blank sheets start with the default information and do not yet have your logo — if you have not attached one, the letterhead uses the Chang Pile logo instead · Set the User profile again each time you start a project, before printing documents for a client

Export buttons

ButtonWhat you get
Export CSV by floorOn the Building take-off → By floor tab — a floor × category × item file (quantity, unit price, amount) with a total for each floor; see section 9
Excel — PR. formsAn .xlsx file — PR.1 (A) · PR.1 · PR.2 (A) · PR.2 · PR.3 · PR.4 · BOQ by system · Quantity source backup (the source and formula of every item; see section 9) · Quantities · The PR.1 sheets for road/irrigation summaries and the BOQ by system sheet include sub-items (no. 16.1 …) under the parent line · The equipment and special-cost sheets appear only when the project has such items · The font is set to TH Sarabun New, as used by government agencies
PDF — PR. formsOpens a print window on A4 portrait, laid out like the forms attached to the 2569 announcement · Sub-items are printed in small type under the parent line, and the set totals still come from the parent lines · Includes the letterhead, signature boxes for the chairman and members of the median price committee, and the amount in words. Choose "Save as PDF" as the destination
Export CSVThe full bill of quantities in a format that other programs can open · Includes sub-items under the parent lines (columns Level · Parent code · Source) and can be imported back; see Sub-items
Preview & print A4/A3Preview the pages before printing, choose A4/A3 portrait or landscape · BOQ by system prints only items that have quantities · The category view in By floor mode gives a book split by floor, with the sub-items of each floor and a floor-by-floor summary (see section 9) · Available on 9 pages — BOQ by system · Factor F · Summary — PR. forms · Price database · Composite materials (see section 11) · Steel tables (see section 12) · Rebar cut sheet (see section 5) · Compare · Installments · The chosen paper size is remembered separately for each page · The letterhead uses your logo and company information; see Letterhead and logo
Send to ERPVisible once you are signed in; see section 16

Formulas in the Excel PR. forms file

Every amount cell in the .xlsx file is an Excel formula — change a quantity, unit price or Factor F in the file and the totals recalculate throughout the workbook. When you open the file the figures match the web page right away (Excel recalculates the whole workbook on opening)

SheetFormula
PR.1 · BOQ by systemAmount = quantity × unit price · Total = material cost + labor cost · A line with sub-items = SUM of its sub-items (unit price = amount ÷ quantity) — you can edit prices directly on the sub-items · Set/project totals = SUMIF on the "Level" column = Main, so sub-items are not counted twice
PR.1 (A)Direct cost = link to the set total in PR.1 · Construction cost = direct cost × Factor F (orange cell)
PR.2 · PR.2 (A)Equipment cost/installation cost = quantity × unit price · PR.2 (A) links the totals from PR.2 and adds tax at the rate in the orange cell
PR.4Links the totals from PR.1 (A) · PR.2 (A) · PR.3 · The amount in words uses Excel's BAHTTEXT()
Bid price summary (private sector)Rate column (orange cells) — contingency · overhead · profit · VAT. Once edited, B to H recalculate in the same order as on the web page
Median price, road–bridge · irrigationCost price = quantity × unit price · Median price = cost price × Factor F · Every line refers to the Factor F cell of its category at the end of the form (orange cell) · Road/bridge totals use SUMIFS on the Category column · Equipment/special-cost totals link from PR.2 (A) / PR.3 · The Factor F of the road, bridge and irrigation categories in PR.1 (A) links from this cell — edit it in one place and PR.4 follows
⚠ What the formulas do not recalculate for you Factor F is the table value for the cost of works at the time of export — if you change the cost of works enough to cross into another band of the table, you must change the F value yourself (see the detailed table at the end of PR.1 (A)) · Values that the web page calculates as a % of another total (CAR insurance · pipe fittings/valves) are stored in the file as numbers and do not change when you edit the totals · Insert new rows within the range of that set, then set the Level column = Main (or Sub), and the totals will count them automatically
💡 The Excel file is built on your own computer The program writes the Excel file entirely by itself without relying on any external library, so you can export even without an internet connection, and no price data is sent anywhere while the file is being built
⚠ If the receiving computer does not have the TH Sarabun New font Excel substitutes a system font and the appearance changes somewhat, but the numbers and formulas are not affected

15Price comparison, installments and sharing

Price comparison

Save several versions of a project (for example an RC structure option and a steel structure option), then pick them to compare on this page. The system shows the difference for each work group so you can see where they differ

Installment tracking

Divide the contract work into installments, entering the installment name, due date and share in % · The system calculates the value of each installment from the total price and draws an S-Curve comparing the plan with the installments already claimed

⚠ The shares must add up to 100% The summary figure at the top stays red until the total is exactly 100%

Share with client

  1. Choose what to show

    Price summary · PR.1 by category · All BOQ items · Cost price database · Installment table — we recommend keeping the cost price database hidden, because it is sensitive company data

  2. Create a link

    Press Create read-only link to get a link valid for 30 days. Recipients can view it without signing in, but cannot edit

  3. Turn it off when no longer needed

    Press Stop sharing and the old link stops working immediately · Creating a new link cancels the old one automatically

16Cloud and sending to ERP

Storing projects in the cloud

Sign in with the same changpile.com account you use for the website and ERP by pressing the cloud chip on the top bar

  • All projects are backed up to the cloud and can be continued from another computer
  • The last 30 versions of edit history are kept for each project
  • Without internet every page still works fully; the system uploads automatically when you are back online

Automatic cloud saving

  1. Press Save the first time

    A project must have been saved to the cloud at least once (while signed in) before the system starts saving it automatically

  2. Work as usual

    After you edit and pause for 20 seconds, the system uploads your latest work to the cloud by itself — including markups, measurement items and quantities sent from drawings, which used to stay only on your computer until you pressed Save

  3. Press Save at important milestones

    Automatic saving does not create versions in the history — restorable versions (30 versions) are created only when you press Save yourself

⚠ If someone else edited the same project first The system does not overwrite automatically — it saves to your computer first and then shows the message "Someone edited this project in the cloud first — press Save again to overwrite the cloud copy" Only the second press of Save overwrites · An automatic save that conflicts with another computer stops automatic saving for that project and asks you to check and save manually
⚠ Browser storage is full If the computer cannot store your latest work (for example when many PDF drawings or photos are attached), the system tells you immediately — no longer silently as in earlier versions · Delete drawing files or photos you no longer use on the Drawings page, or save to the cloud first

Sending prices to ERP

The Send to ERP button on the price summary page (visible once signed in) moves the totals from BOQ Studio into starting data in ERP Studio

  • Choose the destination project in ERP, or create a new project from this project's header information
  • Sends the totals by category to become the ERP BOQ
  • Optionally choose whether to also create work phases from the installments and a starter quotation
⚠ Save the project first The system needs the project's cloud reference number before it can send to ERP · If you have not saved yet, a warning asks you to save first

17Frequently asked questions

I deleted the wrong row — can I get it back without retyping?

Yes — press Back on the top bar or Ctrl + Z (click outside any input field first). The row comes back with every field in its original position, and prices recalculate immediately · You can undo up to 50 steps while this page stays open · If you have already refreshed or opened another project, use Restore BOQ from local backup; see Undo and redo

I press the undo button and nothing happens

In the version released on the evening of 13 October 2569, the button on the top bar did not respond (only Ctrl + Z worked); it was fixed the same day · If it still happens, press Ctrl + F5 (Mac: Cmd + Shift + R) to reload the page · If the button is faded grey, there are no edits to undo yet · If it says you must sign in, this account is view-only; see Undo and redo

I don't want the program to add metal sheet flashing/edge trim (or moldings, formwork, painting) automatically

Press the ✓ Flashing/edge tag in the Auto-calc column of that row to turn it into ✕ — it is excluded for that row only; press again to include it again. If you still need the item but want to enter the quantity yourself, go to BOQ by system → + Add item; see section 5

An item I need to take off has no table to fill in (e.g. sprinkler heads, elevators, demolition, traffic signs)

Use the take-off by item code table at the end of that tab — choose the code, then enter the count and dimensions according to the unit · Demolition, elevators, gas, special systems, equipment and provisional sums are on the Other works tab

The material actually used is not in the selection list

Type its name in the search box of the code field (floor, ceiling, wall, door, metal sheet, etc.) and press Use this value to get a custom item. Its price starts at 0 — enter the price on BOQ by system or on the Price database page → Custom items · You can reuse the same name in other rows by picking it from the list

I picked a new code and the amount is 0 THB

New codes in the category structure (tagged Not priced yet / No price yet) have no default price yet. Enter the material and labor prices on the Price database page → New codes · No price yet; the prices you enter are remembered with the project

I opened an old project and the categories (WBS) changed

Projects that still use the first-generation standard category set (A–K) are converted to the 3-level structure automatically when opened; amounts do not change. Items for which you had chosen a category yourself are moved to the closest sub-category · If you had edited the first-generation structure, it is kept as it was; see section 9

After editing a quantity, do I need to press Update prices?

No — prices recalculate instantly every time you type. The Update prices button shows the difference, e.g. Price +10,350 · Press the button when you want everything recalculated and the latest total confirmed; see Instant price updates

Typing a number digit by digit made the Update prices button show an unusually large difference

Versions before 20:50 on 13 October 2569 counted the difference from the previous keystroke — typing 15 into 17 one digit at a time showed the difference of 1→17 (e.g. +166,299). This has been fixed to count from the price before you started editing, showing Price +20,699 as it really is · The prices in the table and the figures bar were always correct; only the number on the button was wrong · If you still see the old behavior, press Ctrl + F5 (Mac: Cmd + Shift + R); see Instant price updates

I started from a blank sheet but there is still a leftover total

Fixed since 6 October 2569 — a blank sheet starts at 0 THB and 0 items, with no installments or placeholder names · If you still see a leftover total, press Ctrl + F5 (Mac: Cmd + Shift + R) and create a new blank sheet · The Start a new project from defaults button on the project settings page is not a blank sheet but demo data; see Starting a new project

My existing project's total dropped slightly

Since 6 October 2569, some minimum items are calculated only when that work actually exists — projects that used to carry phantom items, such as fire extinguishers in a road-only project, manholes or light poles with no pipes or internal roads, road earthwork items or irrigation items in a building project, no longer have those items, so the total drops slightly (mostly no more than 0.1%) · Projects that do have that work get the same values as before

I chose manual rebar calculation but the BOQ still uses the old figure, or the rebar became 0

Since 13 October 2569, when you choose Manual, the BOQ uses only the total of the bar-by-bar rebar table, and the figures in BOQ by system change immediately · If the table is still empty, the rebar is 0 kg — previously the system silently fell back to the automatic rate, so it seemed not to update · Add rows to the bar-by-bar rebar table, or press Send to building BOQ on the Bar-cut plan; see Rebar method

After editing the Bar-cut plan, do I need to send it to the BOQ again?

No — send it once and they stay linked. Whenever you edit the cut list, the bar-by-bar rebar table and the BOQ update automatically · Projects sent before 13 October 2569 are adjusted to match the current cut list when the project is opened; see Bar-cut plan

AI take-off says I must sign in, or that my account does not have permission

AI quantity take-off is available only to accounts that can edit projects (VIP lifetime, staff, administrators), and you must sign in first · See AI quantity takeoff

The AI says it sent the results to BOQ Studio, but I don't see them in the waiting list

Press Refresh in step 3 of the card (it normally updates by itself every 20 seconds) · Check that you are signed in with the same account that created the link · If you just created a new link, the old link saved in the AI no longer works and must be replaced with the latest one · See Your AI (MCP)

The AI only takes off building works, not road, bridge, irrigation or fire protection works

Connectors added before 14 Oct 2569 still remember the old tool set — Disconnect, then connect BOQ Studio again in the AI's settings (the existing link still works) · Use the latest prompt from the AI quantity takeoff button or step 2 of the card · See Taking off every category at once

ChatGPT has no Developer mode, or I don't see BOQ Studio in the + menu

Adding your own MCP connector in ChatGPT requires a plan that can enable Developer mode — free accounts only have ready-made plugins on the Settings → Plugins page · Check that you are signed in with the same account that added the connector (a different browser profile may be a different account) · If it still does not work, use Claude instead; see Adding the connector in Claude

Claude's Add custom connector window asks me to choose Authentication — what should I pick?

Choose No sign-in (it has a Detected tag) · You do not need to press Add header · The yellow box warning that anyone with the link can use it is normal — keep the link secret and press Add · See Adding the connector in Claude

I can't add the link in Claude or ChatGPT, or the AI says the link is invalid

Copy the whole line of the link (it starts with https:// and ends with a long token) · Your AI plan must allow adding a custom connector / Developer mode · If it still fails, press Create new link and add it again · The message "This link has been revoked or regenerated" means you must use the latest link

I have several drawing files — how do I get the AI to take off all of them?

Attach every file under Drawing sheets in the project, then press AI takeoff one file at a time — wait until the first file shows Review, then import it · When importing the next file, choose Add as new work if it covers a different part, or Replace existing work if it is a revised version of the same set · The tag AI imported N rows under the file name shows which files are done; see The per-file AI takeoff button

Do I have to reconnect my AI every time I open the page?

No — add the link to Claude / ChatGPT once and it works in every chat and every project until you revoke the link or create a new one · Step 1 shows ✓ Your AI is connected once the AI has used the link · The link, AI provider and selected work groups are remembered in this computer's browser · If you switch computers or clear browser data, the link will not be shown (but AIs you already added still work). If you need the link to add to a new AI, create a new link; see Once connected, no need to set up again

I press AI takeoff and nothing seems to happen

The button opens the AI's chat in a new tab and copies the prompt for you — if the browser blocks new windows, allow pop-ups for changpile.com or open claude.ai yourself and paste the copied prompt · Look at the tag under the file name: Waiting for your AI… = still waiting · the button changes to Review = the results have arrived · If the tag does not change for a long time, check in the chat whether the AI has sent the results to BOQ Studio, then press Refresh in step 3; see The take-off with your AI button

How do I delete all the rows imported from the AI?

Delete them one by one in the table like normal rows · Or run the take-off again and, when importing, choose Replace only previous AI rows with the unwanted rows unticked — the rows from the previous AI batch are deleted, while rows you entered yourself remain · See The system asks before importing

The PDF drawing was revised — I want to delete the old results in the inbox and have the AI take off again

Press the trash button at the end of the old item in the AI results waiting to import box → Delete item · Attach the new PDF in the AI's chat and give the instruction again · If the old results were already imported into the project, choose Replace existing work when importing the new results; see Deleting items in the inbox

Importing AI results opens a “This project already has existing work” window

The table that will receive the new rows already has rows, so the system always asks · If the drawing has a new revision or the existing work is outdated, choose Replace existing work · If you are importing a different part to add to it, choose Add as new work · If unsure, press Cancel and check the table first; the results remain waiting; see The system asks before importing

The printed letterhead still shows the Chang Pile logo

This project has no logo attached yet · Press the user-name card at the very bottom of the left menu → press the circular picture to attach the logo → Save, then open the preview again · See Letterhead and logo

After starting a new project, the logo and company information disappeared

The User profile is stored with each project, so new projects and blank sheets start with the default information · Attach the logo and enter the company information again in that project · Existing projects that were already set up still have their logo

I can't attach the logo — it says the file is larger than 1.4 MB

Shrink the image or save it as a smaller PNG/JPG before attaching · The logo on the letterhead is shown at 256 pixels, so an image about 500–1000 pixels wide is sharp enough

Some items are missing from the BOQ by system page

Since 6 October 2569 this page shows only items that have quantities · Items that are still zero are hidden; press Show items without quantity in the table header to see them · The number on the tab also counts only items with quantities; see Adding, deleting and hiding empty items

The printed BOQ by system has no zero items

That is correct — the preview and printout include only items that are actually calculated, so the document has no zero rows mixed in · If you need every code listed, use Export all groups to CSV, which still exports everything as before

The structural steel cutting plan adds weld splices even though I don't want splicing

The required piece is longer than the stock length you set · Add a long enough length in the stock length field, e.g. 6, 12 if your supplier sells it; the system will pick the long bar itself with no splice · See Structural steel cutting plan

When I delete structural steel on the Steel tables page, it says the row comes from a measurement on the drawings

That row was sent from a measurement item on a PDF drawing, so it is recreated every time the measurement item changes · Press Go to drawings and choose — Not sent — for that measurement item, and the row disappears by itself; see Removing structural steel from the project

Steel plates do not appear in the structural steel cutting plan

That is correct — steel plates and checkered plates are not cut from bars, so they are not in the cutting plan. A note under the card lists which steel plate items there are · Their weight still goes into the BOQ as usual

When I delete an item on the category page, it says it cannot be deleted from this page

That item's quantity comes from a take-off table; it was not added manually · Press the button in the pop-up to go to the source tab and edit or delete the row there; the item disappears from the category by itself · On the category page you can delete only items tagged Added manually; see Adding and deleting items

I added an item that already exists, but its quantity did not change to the value I entered

A manually added quantity is added to the existing quantity, not substituted for it · If you want it to equal the value you enter, edit the source table, or enter only the difference · You can delete the manually added part with the trash button at the end of the row

The number next to the labor rate list menu is 1266, but the page says 1,471 lines

Both are correct — the menu counts items (1,266 items), while 1,471 is the number of labor lines, because some items have several labor rates depending on conditions, e.g. piles have separate rates by number of piles (200 piles or more · 100–200 piles · 50–100 piles) · This figure is the size of the W 809 list and does not change with the project; see Numbers next to menus

Pressing “Print / Save PDF” gives a blank page

Fixed since 26 September 2569 — the print window shows only the document in the preview, and long documents flow across several pages · If you still get a blank page, the browser is still using old files; press Ctrl + F5 (Mac: Cmd + Shift + R) to reload the page, then open the preview again

The bend shapes on the cut sheet look shorter or longer than in the drawings

The sketches are not to scale; very short legs are drawn long enough for the shape to be visible · The numbers on the legs are the actual dimensions in meters entered in fields A B C — bend according to the numbers · If a number is wrong, correct it in the cut list on the Bar-cut plan page and print again; see Cut sheets for site workers

I opened a sample project and the Bar-cut plan page is empty

Samples loaded before 26 September 2569 get a cutting plan added automatically when the project is opened, unless you had already opened and edited the cutting plan page of that sample, in which case the system does not overwrite it · Press Load all 5 samples into the project list on the All projects page to get a completely new set; see Sample cutting plans

The totals of the sample projects have changed

They changed three times · 26 October 2569: the 8-story office building sample was split by floor — office areas, restrooms and corridors that used to be counted for one floor even though the row name said several floors became typical-floor rows counted for every floor, so the total went up (the other samples were split by floor with unchanged totals) · 26 September 2569: the road and irrigation samples gained structural steel (bridge railings, traffic sign frames · footbridges, gate hoist frames), so their totals rose slightly · 6 October 2569: phantom items unrelated to the work were removed (e.g. fire extinguishers in road works, manholes in irrigation works, road items in a house), so every sample's total dropped slightly

SampleCurrent total (THB)
Road and bridge works103,615,682
8-story office building92,593,899
Warehouse zone B258,581,237
Irrigation canal improvement89,351,435
2-story house6,724,754
I opened the office building sample and the By floor page has only some floors, with the total still at 83 million

That is a sample loaded before 26 October 2569 — when opened, the system adds the floor set and assigns floors from the row names, but does not add typical-floor ranges, because the old rows already contain totals for several floors and multiplying would count them twice · Press Load all 7 samples into the project list on the All projects page to get the fully floor-split version (floors 2–7 with equal costs · total 92,593,899 THB); see By floor

The By floor page has a “Floor not set” column

Some take-off rows have no floor selected yet — press the Floor not set row in the floor table, then look at the list of rows in the Take-off rows on this floor panel; press a row to go and pick its floor in the table · Or press Auto-assign floors to rows to let the system guess from the row names (floor 2 · roof · foundation · room names that match the room table). Rows it cannot guess must still be assigned manually

Preliminary works, fire protection and insurance are not assigned to any floor

These items are calculated from lump-sum values or whole-project formulas (building area · number of floors · construction months), not from the rows of any floor, so they are in the Common (whole project) column · To see the total budget per floor, press Spread common cost by floor area (floor areas must be entered) · If you want an item to really belong to a floor, take it off as a row in the Take-off by item code table and choose the floor instead of entering a lump sum

Choosing “To floor” multiplied the total several times

A typical-floor row must contain the quantity of a single floor — the system multiplies by the number of floors in the range (L2 → L7 = ×6) · If the row already contains the total for all floors, divide it back to a per-floor quantity, or set To floor to — (single floor) · Example: 120 columns over 5 floors → enter 24 columns and choose B1 → L4

Some quantities on the By floor page show a ≈ sign

These are items the program rounds to whole numbers for the entire project, e.g. pile testing at 1 pile per 50 piles · concrete compressive strength tests — calculating them floor by floor would add up to more than the actual total, so the system splits them in proportion to the floors so that they add up exactly to the BOQ line · The sub-items of that line include a Proportional adjustment to match the BOQ line line

After deleting or moving a floor, the quantities of typical-floor rows changed

Floor ranges are counted by the order in the floor table — delete a floor within the range L2 → L7 and the range is left with 5 floors · Moving another floor into the range adds it to the count · Before deleting, the system tells you how many typical-floor rows span that floor · You can undo with the undo button on the top bar

After sending to CPM split by floor, the total duration is longer than when combined

The Floor-by-floor construction sequence relationship makes the structure go up one floor at a time, and the other categories on each floor wait for that floor's structure to finish, so it is longer than when every category starts in parallel · You can adjust every link in CPM (add a negative Lag · change to SS), or choose Chain within each floor category in the Send to CPM window

I entered quantities, but the price is still zero

Check two things — first, are all the dimension fields filled in? If any dimension is zero, the volume will be zero too · second, go to the Price database page and see whether the related codes have unit prices. If you chose a material tagged "Not priced yet", you must set its price first

I entered one built-in row, but several lines appear in the BOQ

That is correct — one row in the table splits into several BOQ items according to what you entered: one line for the cabinet body, plus the surface material difference if you chose a finish other than melamine, plus the hinges, drawer slides, accessories, handles and LED lights in the quantities entered · They are kept separate so you can see where each cost comes from and remove unwanted items line by line; see section 5

Should built-in work go in Form PR.2 (A), purchased equipment?

No — PR.2 (A) is for items that are purchased and ready to use, such as desks, chairs and freestanding cabinets · Built-in work is construction work that has to be carried out on site and fixed to the building, so it is a work category in PR.1 (A) and goes into the Factor F formula as usual · The program already handles this automatically when you enter it on the Built-in furniture and joinery tab

I edited the price in the PRE-006 insurance field, but the value does not change

That is correct — the system always calculates this item as a % of the total cost of works, so the field is a grey dashed box that cannot be edited. To change it, edit the construction insurance rate on the project settings page · SAN-012 fittings and valves work the same way

Whatever I try to edit, it says I must sign in

Accounts that can edit data must be VIP members or approved staff · If you signed up for VIP but have not paid yet, you still have view-only rights; check your status on the member page · Viewing, calculating, printing and exporting files do not require signing in

The cloud chip says "Sync failed" — is my work lost?

No — the system always writes to your computer first and queues the upload to retry · Press the chip to see the cause; the system tells you what to do next, such as asking the administrator to install the database tables, or signing out and back in · Once fixed, press Sync now and the pending changes upload by themselves

Measuring on a drawing says "Not calibrated"

You must calibrate the scale for every file first — draw a line over a distance of known length on the drawing and enter the actual length in meters, so the system can convert pixels into distances

I fetched the latest prices but no items came up

Possibly the announced prices for that period are the same as all the prices currently in use, so the system shows nothing — the message under the button tells you how many items were fetched · Or there is no data for that period in the system yet; press Fetch from source again

How accurate are measurements from site photos?

They are accurate when the photo is taken square-on to the wall or floor and calibrated against an object of known size in the same plane, such as a tape measure held against the wall, a door leaf or a tile · In photos taken at an angle, near and far distances are not equal, so photograph one wall at a time and use the normal lens (1×) · The price shown to the client is therefore an estimate; confirm the actual price in the quotation

Pressing “Take site photo” does not open the camera

On a computer this button opens a file picker instead, which is normal · On a phone or iPad, check that the browser is allowed to use the camera (device settings → the browser you use → Camera) · If the device asks whether to take a photo or choose from the photo library, choose “Camera” · HEIC images from the iPhone photo library cannot be opened in some browsers; take the photo through this button (you get a JPG) or set the camera to “Most Compatible”

I opened the project on another computer and the PDF drawings are missing

The PDF files themselves are stored on the computer they were attached on and are not uploaded to the cloud (drawing files are often very large) — on the original computer the files come back automatically, but other computers do not have them · Markups and measurement items are stored with the project · Attach the same drawing file again; if the file name matches, all the markups come back automatically · Site photos work the same way: the photos stay on the device that took them — opened from that device you see all the photos, while other devices see the measurement items and prices but not the photos

I opened an old project and the structural steel weight increased by itself

That is correct — the old section table had the weights of H sections in the I-section fields, making them 18–24% lower than the true values. This version corrects them to match the TIS 1227 table, so projects using sections I 150x75 I 200x100 I 250x125 I 300x150 or the box section ▭ 100x50x3.2 now get more accurate weights · Details are in section 12

I opened an old project and the box section weight decreased by itself

That is correct — the old table gave ▭ 150x50x6.3 a weight of 18.77 kg/m, which is 4.5% higher than the true value · A section area of 22.84 cm² × 0.785 gives 17.93 kg/m, whereas 18.77 would need an area of 23.91 cm², more than even the perfectly sharp-cornered case, so it is impossible · This version corrects it, so projects using this section now get more accurate weights and costs · See section 12

I need a document showing the origin of the unit prices to attach to PR.1

Open the Composite materials page, choose the entry that matches the item, then press Preview & print A4/A3 · You get a calculation sheet showing every material row with its quantity, unit price, total per unit, and the comparison with the price database together with the verdict per section 4, all on one sheet, with signature boxes · See section 11

Some items in the left menu are gone and I can't find a page I used to use

They are not gone — that group is collapsed · All four group headers can be collapsed and expanded, and the number in the circle at the end of a header tells you how many pages are hidden. Press the group header to expand it again, or press Expand all on the Menu · 22 bar at the very top to expand every group at once · The program remembers this state per computer; see section 3

I want the price per square meter compared with an old project

Save the old project in the project list, then use the Compare menu to pick them for comparison · The price per square meter is always shown at the right end of the figures bar at the top

When I open the Drawings page, lengths in tables sent from drawings change by themselves

That is correct — versions before 29 Oct 2569 knew the paper size only of pages that had been viewed, so measurement items on pages never opened had wrong lengths/areas (e.g. on an A3 landscape drawing, 19.80 m became 23.507 m) · This version reads the size of every page when the file is opened, so the first time you open the Drawings page the rows sent from drawings update to the correct values by themselves · Values you edited yourself in the destination tables (floor · painting · use as …) are kept as they were · Distances typed on the keyboard (AutoCAD style) use the typed numbers directly and are not distorted by coordinates

How reliable are the prices of bolts, anchors and hangers in the price database?

The whole category is estimated prices (every row is tagged Estimated) — the catalogs used to compile the list have no prices, and the government price lists do not include these items, so they are calculated from weight by size × market price per kg by grade · They can be used for preliminary estimates, but before an actual bid, request quotations for the sizes, lengths and grades in the drawings and edit them on the Price database page; see section 10

I took off bolts in the Connections and fasteners tab, but the structural steel total still includes bolts

Structural steel rows have Bolts ticked by default, which counts bolts/steel plates as a % of the steel weight (STR-025) — if you have taken them off in the Connections and fasteners tab, untick it in the structural steel rows so they are not counted twice; see section 5

A cookie notice bar appears at the bottom of the screen — what should I press?

Choose whichever you like — Accept all, Reject all or Cookie settings to choose category by category · If you reject, the program still works fully, because sign-in, language and the data the program needs to run are in the Necessary category, which is always on · Your choice applies to every page on that device for 12 months; you can change your mind via the Cookie settings link at the end of this manual or of the home page · Details are in the Privacy Policy, section 6

18Glossary of terms used in the system

TermMeaning
AI quantity takeoffLets an AI read PDF drawings and take off quantities for every category (building, road, bridge/box culvert, irrigation, and items by code) in one go; the user reviews and selects rows before importing — uses your own AI (MCP) · The card is on the Drawings page
MCPModel Context Protocol — a common standard that Claude, ChatGPT, Gemini and other AI programs use to connect with external programs · BOQ Studio uses it to receive take-off results from the user's AI
AI connection linkA personal link created in the AI quantity takeoff card, which you add as a connector in your AI · Shown only once · Can be regenerated or revoked at any time
AI results waiting to importThe inbox for results sent by your AI — they do not enter the project until you review and import them
Confidence tagClear / Derived / Estimated-assumed — tells how the AI obtained the value of that row; use it to choose which rows need a careful check
Rebar methodAutomatic = concrete volume × rate in kg/m³ · Manual = total of the bar-by-bar rebar table (including rows from the cutting plan and from the AI)
User profileName, position, contact details, company information and logo used on the letterhead of printed documents — opened from the user-name card at the very bottom of the left menu, and stored with each project
Blank sheetThe “Start from a blank sheet” template — a new project starting at 0 THB and 0 items, with no installments or placeholder names, unlike “Start a new project from defaults”, which is demo data
3-level categoriesMain category (PRE · STR · ROD.05 …) → sub-category (STR.06 · ROD.05.03 …) → item code (STR-005 …), following the company's BOQ category file Rev.0
New codes (no price yet)The 756 codes with "new" status in the company's category file; they already have a name, unit and sub-category, but their default price is 0 and must be entered before use
Custom itemsItems outside the price database whose names the user types in, coded OWN-001 …, stored with the project; the price starts at 0 and only their own quantities are counted
Auto-calcThe ✓/✕ tag column at the end of take-off tables — associated work the program calculates from that row (flashing/edge trim, formwork, moldings, painting, etc.); can be unticked row by row
Elevation · SectionThe panel under take-off tables that draws the plan, section or elevation of the selected row from the actual values in the row, with the meaning of each field and the formula used
Manually added quantityA quantity entered yourself in the panel for assigning items to categories; it is added to the quantities from tables and drawings, and that row carries the “Added manually” tag
Bend shapeA sketch of the bent bar on the cut sheet, with the actual dimensions on each leg and end hook — not to scale; bend according to the numbers
Stock lengthThe length in which suppliers sell steel bars, e.g. 6 m or 12 m — the cutting plan uses it as the starting bar and cuts it into the required pieces
Weld spliceJoining two pieces of structural steel by welding when the required piece is longer than the stock length — there is no lap length; the joint detail must be checked with an engineer
Cut position barA bar representing one full-length bar on the cut sheet, divided into pieces in true proportion; orange hatching marks offcuts kept for reuse, grey hatching marks scrap
Scale calibrationDraw a line over a distance of known length on a drawing or photo and enter the actual length — every measurement on that page is based on this value. For photos, use an object of known size in the picture, such as a tape measure or a door leaf
Estimated price from measurementThe direct cost of what was measured on a drawing or photo × the project multiplier (including Factor F, or operating costs, profit and VAT) — used to show the client a preliminary figure on site
BOQBill of Quantities — a list of work items with quantities and unit prices
PR.1The form detailing the direct cost before adding overhead and profit (formerly PR.4 under the 2560 criteria)
PR.1 (A)The construction cost form = PR.1 × Factor F (formerly PR.5)
PR.2 / PR.2 (A)The purchased equipment form, and the summary sheet with separate VAT columns for the equipment cost and the installation cost
PR.3The form for special costs per specification (formerly PR.4 (P))
PR.4The median price summary form for building construction = PR.1 (A) + PR.2 (A) + PR.3 (formerly PR.6)
2569 criteriaAnnouncement of the Reference Price and Contractor Registration Committee on the criteria and methods for determining median prices of construction works, dated 19 May 2569 — it repeals the announcement dated 19 October 2560 and all its amendments, and renumbers the whole set of PR. forms
Factor FA multiplier that covers overhead, loan interest and profit, according to the government table
W 481The circular letter setting the criteria for calculating median prices of construction works, the edition this program refers to
AACEAACE International (Association for the Advancement of Cost Engineering) — the owner of the cost estimate accuracy classification used in section 4
Composite materialsThe cost of mixed materials per unit of work, e.g. cement, sand, stone and water combined per 1 m³ of concrete — used for items that cannot be taken off directly; see section 11
Floor / zoneThe groups used to split quantities and budgets in a building (FDN foundation · B1 basement · L1…Ln · RF roof · EX exterior), set under Building take-off → By floor · Each has an area for calculating THB/m²
Typical-floor rowA row containing the quantity of a single floor with To floor selected — the system repeats it for every floor in the range, e.g. L2 → L7 ×6 · The BOQ, cutting plan and CPM all multiply it in full
Common (CM)Quantities/costs that do not come from the rows of any floor — lump-sum values, whole-project formulas, quantities from PDF drawings · Road, bridge and irrigation works are always in Common
Floor not set (NA)Take-off rows that have no floor selected yet — their totals are still fully in the BOQ but not yet allocated to any floor
Floor sub-itemsThe source take-off rows that make up the quantity of that line on that floor — shown in the printouts and Excel split by floor; they always add up to the floor's quantity
Floor-by-floor construction sequenceThe default relationship when sending to CPM split by floor — the structure goes up one floor at a time, and the other categories of a floor start after that floor's structure is finished
WBSWork Breakdown Structure — the structure dividing the work into main and secondary categories
Mark-upThe private-sector pricing method that adds overhead and profit as a % directly on the cost
Ix · IyMoment of inertia of the section about the x and y axes, in cm⁴ — the larger it is, the less the deflection
Zx · ZySection modulus, in cm³ — used to check bending stress (stress = moment ÷ Z)
ix · iyRadius of gyration, in cm — used to find the slenderness ratio of columns and braces
fc′Ultimate compressive strength of concrete at 28 days, in ksc or MPa
kscKilograms per square centimeter, the unit of material strength used in Thailand
freeboardThe clearance above the water level in a canal or drainage channel

+Other manuals in this series

© 2569 Chang Pile Co., Ltd. — CHANG PILE CO., LTD. All rights reserved.